Brother DCPL3550CDW LASER-SKRIVER User's Guide
Advertisement
Advertisement
Online User's Guide
DCP-L3515CDW
DCP-L3520CDW
DCP-L3520CDWE
DCP-L3527CDW
DCP-L3555CDW
DCP-L3560CDW
MFC-L3740CDW
MFC-L3740CDWE
MFC-L3760CDW
MFC-L8340CDW
MFC-L8390CDW
© 2023 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.
Table of Contents
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript ® 3 ™ Language Emulation)
i
ii
iii
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority
Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP
iv
v
vi
vii
Home > Before You Use Your Machine
Before You Use Your Machine
•
•
•
•
•
1
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Definitions of Notes
Definitions of Notes
We use the following symbols and conventions throughout this User's Guide:
WARNING
CAUTION
IMPORTANT
NOTE
WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injuries.
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injuries.
IMPORTANT indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in damage to property or loss of product functionality.
NOTE specifies the operating environment, conditions for installation, or special conditions of use.
Tips icons indicate helpful hints and supplementary information.
Electrical Hazard icons alert you to possible electrical shock.
Bold
Italics
Courier New
Fire Hazard icons alert you to the possibility of a fire.
Hot Surface icons warn you not to touch hot machine parts.
Prohibition icons indicate actions you must not perform.
Bold style identifies buttons on the machine's control panel or computer screen.
Italicised style emphasises an important point or refers you to a related topic.
Courier New font identifies messages shown on the machine's LCD.
Related Information
•
2
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Trademarks
Trademarks
Apple, App Store, AirPrint, Mac, macOS, iPadOS, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Safari are trademarks of Apple
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Nuance and PaperPort are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance Communications, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.
Adobe ® , Reader ® , PostScript and PostScript 3 are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
Wi-Fi ® , Wi-Fi Alliance ® , and Wi-Fi Direct ® are registered trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance ® .
WPA ™ , WPA2 ™ , WPA3 ™ , Wi-Fi CERTIFIED, and Wi-Fi Protected Setup are trademarks of Wi-Fi Alliance ® .
Android, Google Drive and Google Play are trademarks of Google LLC. Use of these trademarks is subject to
Google Permissions.
Mopria ™ and the Mopria ™ Logo are registered and/or unregistered trademarks and service marks of Mopria
Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorised use is strictly prohibited.
EVERNOTE is a trademark of Evernote Corporation and used under a license.
The Bluetooth ® word mark is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
Brother Industries, Ltd. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
Each company whose software title is mentioned in this manual has a Software Licence Agreement specific to its proprietary programs.
Software Trademarks
FlashFX ® is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX ® Pro ™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
FlashFX ® Tera ™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance ™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Reliance Nitro ™ is a trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Datalight ® is a registered trademark of Datalight, Inc.
Any trade names and product names of companies appearing on Brother products, related documents and any other materials are all trademarks or registered trademarks of those respective companies.
Related Information
•
3
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Open Source Licensing
Open Source Licensing
This product includes open source software.
To view Open Source Licensing Remarks and Copyright Information, go to your model's Manuals page at support.brother.com/manuals .
Related Information
•
4
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Copyright and License
Copyright and License
©2023 Brother Industries, Ltd. All rights reserved.
This product includes software developed by the following vendors:
This product includes the “KASAGO TCP/IP” software developed by ZUKEN ELMIC, Inc.
Copyright 1989-2020 Datalight, Inc., All Rights Reserved.
FlashFX ® Copyright 1998-2020 Datalight, Inc.
Related Information
•
5
Home > Before You Use Your Machine > Important Notes
Important Notes
• Check support.brother.com/downloads for Brother driver and software updates.
• To keep your machine performance up to date, check support.brother.com/downloads for the latest firmware upgrade. Otherwise, some of your machine's functions may not be available.
• Do not use this product outside the country of purchase as it may violate the wireless telecommunication and power regulations of that country.
• Not all models are available in all countries.
• Before giving your machine to anyone else, replacing it, or disposing of it, we strongly recommend resetting it to its factory settings to remove all personal information.
• Windows 10 in this document represents Windows 10 Home, Windows 10 Pro, Windows 10 Education, and
Windows 10 Enterprise.
• Windows 11 in this document represents Windows 11 Home, Windows 11 Pro, Windows 11 Education, and
Windows 11 Enterprise.
• For macOS v13 Users:
This machine supports macOS v13.
For machine setup and software installation instructions, see the Quick Setup Guide included in the carton.
All features in macOS v11 and macOS v12 are available in the macOS v13 environment and work in a similar way.
• In this User's Guide, the LCD messages of the MFC-L8390CDW are used unless otherwise specified.
• In this User's Guide, the illustrations of the MFC-L8390CDW are used unless otherwise specified.
• The screens or images in this User's Guide are for illustration purposes only and may differ from those of the actual products.
• Unless otherwise specified, the screens in this manual are from Windows 10. Screens on your computer may vary depending on your operating system.
• The contents of this document and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice.
• Not all features are available in countries subject to applicable export restrictions.
Related Information
•
6
Home > Introduction to Your Machine
Introduction to Your Machine
•
•
•
How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD
•
How to Enter Text on Your Machine
•
•
Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
•
Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine
7
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Before Using Your Machine
Before Using Your Machine
Before attempting any printing operation, confirm the following:
• Make sure you have installed the correct software and drivers for your machine.
• For USB or network cable users: Make sure the interface cable is physically secure.
Firewall (Windows)
If your computer is protected by a firewall and you are unable to network print, network scan, or PC-FAX, you may need to configure the firewall settings. If you are using the Windows Firewall and you installed the drivers using the steps in the installer, the necessary firewall settings have been already set. If you are using any other personal firewall software, see the User's Guide for your software or contact the software manufacturer.
Related Information
•
8
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Control Panel Overview
Control Panel Overview
The control panel may vary depending on your model.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1 3 4 5
2 6
1.
Power On/Off
• Turn the machine on by pressing .
• Turn the machine off by pressing and holding . The LCD displays [Shutting Down] and stays on for a few seconds before turning off.
2. Function Buttons
WiFi (for wireless models)
Press the WiFi button and launch the wireless installer on your computer. Follow the on-screen instructions to set up a wireless connection between your machine and your network.
When the WiFi light is on, your machine is connected to a wireless access point. When the WiFi light blinks, the wireless connection is down, or your machine is in the process of connecting to a wireless access point.
Copy/Scan Options
Press to access temporary settings for scanning or copying.
2 in 1 (ID) Copy
Press to copy both sides of an identification card onto a single page.
9
Scan
Press to switch the machine to Scan Mode.
3. Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
Displays messages to help you set up and use the machine.
If the machine is in Ready Mode or Copy Mode, the LCD displays: a b
Stack Copies:01
□□■□□ e c d a. Type of copy b. Number of copies c. Quality d. Contrast e. Copy ratio
4. Menu Buttons
Menu
Press to access the menu for programming your machine's settings.
Clear
• Press to delete entered data.
• Press to cancel the current setting.
OK
Press to store your machine's settings.
a or b
Press to scroll up or down through menus and options.
5. Stop/Exit
• Press to stop an operation.
• Press to exit from a menu.
6. Start buttons
• Mono Start
Press to start making copies in monochrome.
Press to start scanning documents (in colour, grey, or monochrome depending on the scan setting).
• Colour Start
Press to start making copies in full colour.
Press to start scanning documents (in colour, grey, or monochrome depending on the scan setting).
10
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1 3
2 4
1. Touchscreen Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
You can select from two types of screens to set as the Main Home screen: Home screens and Shortcuts screens. When a Home screen is displayed, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the other Home screens.
The Main Home screen displays the machine's status when the machine is idle. When displayed, this screen indicates that your machine is ready for the next command.
If Active Directory Authentication or LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel is locked.
The available features vary depending on your model.
The Home screens provide access to features, such as Fax, Copy, and Scan.
11
Home screen: Screen 1
Home screen: Screen 2
###.###.###.###
###.###.###.###
12
Home screen: Screen 3
###.###.###.###
Shortcuts screen
Create Shortcuts for frequently-used operations, such as sending a fax, copying, scanning, and using Web
Connect.
Eight Shortcuts tabs are available with six Shortcuts on each Shortcuts tab. A total of 48 Shortcuts are available.
8 6
1.
Date & Time
Displays the date and time set on the machine.
2.
Function Icons
• [Fax] (For MFC Models)
Press to access Fax mode.
13
•
•
•
• [Copy]
Press to access Copy mode.
[Scan]
Press to access Scan mode.
[Secure Print]
Press to access the [Secure Print] option.
[Web]
Press to connect your machine to an Internet service.
•
• [Apps]
Press to connect your machine to the Brother Apps service.
[USB] (MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Press to access the USB menu and select [Scan to USB] or [Direct Print] options.
• [2 in 1 ID Copy]
Press to access the 2 in 1 ID Copy option.
3.
(Toner)
Displays the remaining toner life. Press to access the [Toner] menu.
4.
(Settings)
Press to access the [Settings] menu.
If Setting Lock has been turned on, a lock icon appears on the LCD. You must unlock the machine to change settings.
•
•
•
Toner
Displays the remaining toner life.
Press to access the [Toner] menu.
/ Network
Press to set up a network connection.
A four level indicator on the screen displays the current wireless signal strength if you are using a wireless connection.
Fax Preview (For MFC Models)
14
•
•
•
Press to access the [Fax Preview] menu.
Wi-Fi Direct (For DCP Models)
Press to access the [Wi-Fi Direct] menu.
Tray Setting
Press to access the [Tray Setting] menu.
Eco Mode
Press to access the [Eco Mode] menu.
• All Settings
Press to access a menu of all machine settings.
• Date & Time
Displays the date and time set on the machine.
Press to access the [Date & Time] menu.
5.
IP Address
If the IP Address setting in the [Display Information] menu has been turned on, your machine's
[IP Address] appears on the Home screens.
6.
or (Wireless Status)
Press to configure wireless settings.
If you are using a wireless connection, a four-level indicator displays the current wireless signal strength.
0 Max
Wireless LAN Disabled
7.
[Shortcuts]
Press to access the [Shortcuts] screen.
8.
(Home screen)
Press to access the Home screens.
• New Fax (For MFC Models)
When [Fax Preview] is set to [On] , the number of new faxes you received into the memory appears at the top of the screen.
• Warning icon
15
The warning icon appears when there is an error or maintenance message. Press the message area to view it, and then press to return to the Main Home screen.
2. Touchpanel
(Back)
Press to go back to the previous menu.
(Home)
Press to return to the Main Home screen.
(Cancel)
Press to cancel an operation.
3. LED Power Indicator
The LED lights up depending on the machine’s power status.
4.
Power On/Off
• Turn the machine on by pressing .
• Turn the machine off by pressing and holding down . The LCD displays [Shutting Down] for a few seconds before the machine turns off. If you have an external telephone or TAD connected, it is always available.
Near Field Communication (NFC) (MFC-L8390CDW)
Use card authentication, if applicable, by touching your Integrated Circuit Card (IC Card) to the NFC symbol on the machine.
16
Related Information
•
17
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD
How to Navigate the Touchscreen LCD
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Press your finger on the LCD to operate it. To display and access all the options, swipe left, right, up, down, or press d c or a b on the LCD to scroll through them.
IMPORTANT
DO NOT press the LCD with a sharp object, such as a pen or stylus. It may damage the machine.
NOTE
DO NOT touch the LCD immediately after plugging in the power cord or turning the machine on. Doing this may cause an error.
This product uses fonts owned by ARPHIC TECHNOLOGY CO., LTD.
Related Information
•
18
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > How to Enter Text on Your Machine
How to Enter Text on Your Machine
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
When text is required, enter characters on the machine. The characters that are available may differ depending on the operation you perform.
• Hold down or repeatedly press a or b to select a character from this list:
0123456789abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyzABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ(space)!"#$%&'()*+,-./:;<=>?
@[\]^_‘{|}~
• Press OK when the character or symbol you want is displayed, and then enter the next character.
• Press Clear to delete characters entered incorrectly.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
• When you must enter text on your machine, a keyboard appears on the LCD.
• The characters that are available may differ depending on your country.
• The keyboard layout may differ depending on the operation you perform.
• The keyboard display may differ depending on your model.
• Press to cycle between letters, numbers, and special characters.
• Press to cycle between lowercase and uppercase letters.
• To move the cursor to the left or right, press d or c .
Inserting spaces
• To enter a space, press [Space] or c .
Making corrections
• If you entered a character incorrectly and want to change it, press d or c to move the cursor to the incorrect character, and then press . Enter the correct character.
• To insert a character, press d or c to move the cursor to the correct place, and then enter the character.
• Press for each character you want to erase, or press and hold to erase all the characters.
19
Related Information
•
20
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Set the Main Home Screen
Set the Main Home Screen
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can change the LCD to display a specific Home screen or Shortcut screen.
When the machine is idle or you press , the touchscreen will return to the screen you set.
1. Press
Screen] .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Screen Settings] > [Home
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the screen settings, and then press the setting you want.
3. Press .
The LCD displays the screen you selected. You can change this main screen as needed.
Related Information
•
21
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
Brother Utilities is an application launcher that offers convenient access to all Brother applications installed on your computer.
1. Do one of the following:
• (Windows 11)
Click > All apps > Brother > Brother Utilities .
• (Windows 10)
Click > Brother > Brother Utilities .
2. Select your machine.
3. Choose the option you want.
Related Information
•
•
Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows)
22
Home > Introduction to Your Machine >
Access Brother Utilities (Windows) > Uninstall the Software and
Drivers (Windows)
Uninstall the Software and Drivers (Windows)
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click > All apps > Brother > Brother Utilities .
• Windows 10
Click > Brother > Brother Utilities .
2. Select your model from the drop-down list (if it is not already selected).
3. Click Tools in the left navigation bar.
• If the Software Update Notification icon is visible, select it, and then click Check now > Check for
Software Updates > Update . Follow the on-screen instructions.
• If the Software Update Notification icon is not visible, go to the next step.
4. Click Uninstall in the Tools section of Brother Utilities .
Follow the instructions in the dialog box to uninstall the software and drivers.
Related Information
•
Access Brother Utilities (Windows)
23
Home > Introduction to Your Machine > Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine
Input/Output Port Locations on Your Machine
The input/output ports are located on the front and back of the machine.
3
4
1
5
2
1. LINE socket(For MFC models)
2. EXT. socket(For MFC models)
3. USB accessory port (Front) (MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
4. 10BASE-T / 100BASE-TX / 1000BASE-T port (For wired network models)
5. USB port
When connecting the USB or network cable, follow the instructions in the software/driver installer.
To install driver and software necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
Related Information
•
24
Paper Handling
•
•
•
•
•
Unscannable and Unprintable Areas
•
25
Home > Paper Handling > Load Paper
Load Paper
•
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
•
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
•
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
26
Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
•
•
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
27
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray > Load Paper in the Paper
Tray
Load Paper in the Paper Tray
• If, when the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, a message appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type, change these settings, if needed, following the LCD instructions.
• When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Press the green levers to slide the paper guides to fit the paper.
For Legal or Folio size paper, press the release lever (1) in the back of the tray, and then pull out the back of the paper tray. (Legal and Folio size paper are not available in some regions.)
1
3. Fan the stack of paper well.
4. Load paper in the paper tray with the printing surface face down .
When you use preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation.See Related Information : Change
Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray.
28
5. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark ( b b b ).
Overfilling the paper tray will cause paper jams.
6. Slowly push the paper tray completely into the machine.
7. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the output tray.
Related Information
•
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
•
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray
29
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray >
Tray > Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper Tray
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the Paper
Tray
When you use preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings.
• DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may cause the paper to jam or misfeed.
• If the print position is misaligned with the preprinted objects, the print position is adjustable using the
Print Position setting for the paper tray.
• Some preprinted paper may cause print stains, depending on the printing method and ink type.
Orientation
For 1-sided printing
• face down
• top edge towards the front of the paper tray
For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)
• face up
• bottom edge towards the front of the paper tray
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the following: a. Select [Printer] . Press OK .
b. Select [2-sided] . Press OK .
c. Select [Single Image] . Press OK .
d. Select [2-sided Feed] . Press OK .
3. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2sided Feed] .
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
30
Related Information
•
31
Load Paper > Load and Print Using the Multi
‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
Load Paper in the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
•
Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
•
Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
•
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
32
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
> Load
Paper in the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Load Paper in the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
• Plain Paper
• Thin Paper
• Thick Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Bond Paper
• Glossy Paper
1. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face down output tray.
2. Open the MP tray and lower it gently.
3. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
2
1
33
4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
• Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).
• When using glossy paper, load only one sheet at a time in the MP tray to avoid a paper jam.
• When you use preprinted paper, load the paper in the correct orientation. See Related Information :
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray.
• To remove a small printout from the output tray, use both hands to lift up the scanner cover as shown in the illustration.
• You can still use the machine while the scanner cover is up. To close the scanner cover, gently push it down with both hands.
34
Related Information
•
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
•
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray
35
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
>
Paper in the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
> Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the MP Tray
Change Machine Settings to Print on Preprinted Paper Using the MP
Tray
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When you use preprinted paper for 2-sided printing, change the machine's settings.
• DO NOT load different sizes and types of paper in the paper tray at the same time. Doing this may cause the paper to jam or misfeed.
• If the print position is misaligned with the preprinted objects, the print position is adjustable using the
Print Position setting for the MP tray.
• Some preprinted paper may cause print stains, depending on the printing method and ink type.
Orientation
For 1-sided printing
• face up
• top edge first
For automatic 2-sided printing (long edge binding)
• face down
• bottom edge first
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [2-sided] > [Single Image] > [2sided Feed] .
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
•
Load Paper in the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
36
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
> Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
Load and Print Labels Using the MP Tray
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When the back cover (face up output tray) is pulled down, the machine has a straight paper path from the MP tray through to the back of the machine. Use this paper feed and output method when you print on labels.
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
2. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.
3. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
2
1
4. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
37
5. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark (1).
6. Change your print preferences in the Print screen.
7. Send your print job to the machine.
8. When finished, close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
•
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
38
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
> Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
Load and Print Envelopes Using the MP Tray
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can load up to three envelopes in the MP tray.
Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible.
When you load a different size and type of paper in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and Paper
Type settings on the machine, or on your computer.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
2. Pull down the two grey levers, one on the left side and one on the right side, as shown in the illustration.
3. On the front of the machine, open the MP tray and lower it gently.
39
4. Pull out the MP tray support (1) and unfold the flap (2).
2
1
5. Slide the MP tray paper guides to fit the width of the envelopes that you are using.
6. Load paper with the printing surface face up in the MP tray.
1
Load up to three envelopes in the MP tray with the printing surface face up. Make sure the envelopes are below the maximum paper mark (1). Loading more than three envelopes may cause paper jams.
7. Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box.
Settings Options for Envelopes
Paper Size Com-10
DL
C5
Monarch
Media Type Envelopes
Env. Thick
Env. Thin
8. Send your print job to the machine.
9. When you have finished printing, return the two grey levers you adjusted in the earlier step back to their original positions.
10. Close the back cover (face-up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
40
Related Information
•
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
41
Load Paper > Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Related Models : DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW/DCP-L3555CDW/
DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW
•
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
•
Load and Print on Labels Using the Manual Feed Slot
•
Load and Print on Envelopes in the Manual Feed Slot
42
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot > Load and Print
Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
Related Models : DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW/DCP-L3555CDW/
DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW
When you load a different paper size in the tray, you must change the Paper Size setting in the machine or on your computer at the same time.
• Plain Paper
• Thin Paper
• Recycled Paper
• Bond Paper
• Glossy Paper
1. Lift the support flap to prevent paper from sliding off the face down output tray.
2. Open the manual feed slot cover.
3. Use both hands to slide the manual feed slot paper guides to fit the width of the paper you are using.
43
4. Using both hands, place one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot until the front edge touches the paper feed roller. When you feel the machine pull it in, let go.
• Load paper into the manual feed slot with the printing surface facing up .
• Make sure the paper is straight and in the correct position in the manual feed slot. If it is not, the paper may not be fed correctly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
• To remove a small printout from the output tray, use both hands to lift up the scanner cover.
• You can still use the machine while the scanner cover is up. To close the scanner cover, gently push it down with both hands.
5. Send your print job to the machine.
Change your print preferences in the Print screen.
6. After the printed page comes out from the machine, load the next sheet of paper in the manual feed slot.
Repeat for each page that you want to print.
Related Information
•
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
44
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot > Load and Print on
Labels Using the Manual Feed Slot
Load and Print on Labels Using the Manual Feed Slot
Related Models : DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW/DCP-L3555CDW/
DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW
When you load a different paper size in the tray, you must change the Paper Size setting in the machine or on your computer at the same time.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
The machine automatically turns on Manual Feed mode when you load paper in the manual feed slot.
2. On the front of the machine, open the manual feed slot cover.
3. Use both hands to slide the manual feed slot paper guides to fit the width of the paper that you are using.
45
4. Using both hands, place one sheet of label in the manual feed slot until the front edge touches the paper feed roller. When you feel the machine pull it in, let go.
• Load label into the manual feed slot with the printing surface facing up .
• Pull the label out completely if you must reload the label into the manual feed slot.
• Do not put more than one sheet of label in the manual feed slot at one time, as it may cause a jam.
• Make sure the label is straight and in the correct position in the manual feed slot. If it is not, the label may not be fed correctly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
5. Send your print job to the machine.
Change your print preferences in the Print screen.
6. After the printed page comes out from the back of the machine, load the next sheet of label in the manual feed slot. Repeat for each page that you want to print.
7. When finished, close the back cover (the face up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
•
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
46
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot > Load and Print on
Envelopes in the Manual Feed Slot
Load and Print on Envelopes in the Manual Feed Slot
Related Models : DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW/DCP-L3555CDW/
DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW
Before loading, press the corners and sides of the envelopes to make them as flat as possible.
When you load a different paper size in the tray, you must change the Paper Size setting in the machine or on your computer at the same time.
1. Open the machine's back cover (the face up output tray).
The machine automatically turns on Manual Feed mode when you load paper in the manual feed slot.
2. Pull down the two grey levers, one on the left side and one on the right side, as shown in the illustration.
3. On the front of the machine, open the manual feed slot cover.
47
4. Use both hands to slide the manual feed slot paper guides to fit the width of the envelope that you are using.
5. Using both hands, put one envelope in the manual feed slot until the front edge touches the paper feed roller.
When you feel the machine pull it in, let go.
• Load the envelope into the manual feed slot with the printing surface facing up .
• Pull the envelope out completely when you reload the envelope into the manual feed slot.
• Do not put more than one envelope in the manual feed slot at one time, as it may cause a jam.
• Make sure the envelope is straight and in the correct position on the manual feed slot. If it is not, the envelope may not be fed correctly, resulting in a skewed printout or a paper jam.
6. Send your print job to the machine.
Change your print preferences in the Print dialog box.
Settings Options for Envelopes
Paper Size Com-10
DL
C5
Monarch
Media Type Envelopes
Env. Thick
Env. Thin
7. After the printed envelope comes out of the machine, load the next envelope. Repeat for each envelope that you want to print.
8. When you have finished printing, return the two grey levers you adjusted in the earlier step back to their original positions.
9. Close the back cover (face-up output tray) until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
•
Load and Print Paper in the Manual Feed Slot
48
Home > Paper Handling > Paper Settings
Paper Settings
•
Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
•
Select the Paper Tray For Printing
•
Change the Check Paper Setting
49
Paper Settings > Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
Change the Paper Size and Paper Type
When you change the size and type of paper you load in the tray, you must also change the Paper Size and
Paper Type settings on the LCD.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Tray Setting] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to display the [Paper Type] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to display the [Thin Paper] , [Plain Paper] , [Thick Paper] , or [Recycled Paper] option, and then press OK .
6. Press a or b to display the [Paper Size] option, and then press OK .
7. Press a or b to display the option you want, and then press OK .
8. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press
Type] .
[Settings]
2. Press the option you want.
> [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Paper
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper type options, and then press the option you want.
4. Press .
5. Press [Paper Size] .
6. Press the option you want.
7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper size options, and then press the option you want.
8. Press .
Related Information
•
50
Paper Settings > Select the Paper Tray For Printing
Select the Paper Tray For Printing
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Change the machine's default paper tray for printing copies, received faxes, and print jobs from your computer.
DCP models do not support the fax feature.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] .
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Tray Use: Copy] , [Tray Use: Fax] , or [Tray Use:
Print] option, and then press the option you want.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the option you want, and then press it. For example, when you select the [MP>T1] option, the machine pulls paper from the MP tray until it is empty, and then from Tray 1.
4. Press .
• When you make a copy using the ADF and give priority to multiple trays, the machine looks for the tray with the most suitable paper and pulls paper from that tray.
• When you make a copy using the scanner glass, your document is copied from the higher priority tray even if more suitable paper is in another paper tray.
• (For models with facsimile function) Use the following sizes of paper for printing faxes: Letter, A4, Legal,
Folio, Mexico Legal, or India Legal. When an appropriate size is not in any of the trays, the machine stores received faxes and [Size Mismatch] appears on the touchscreen.
• (For models with facsimile function) If the tray is out of paper and received faxes are in the machine’s memory, [No Paper] appears on the touchscreen. Load paper in the empty tray.
Related Information
•
51
Paper Settings > Change the Check Paper Setting
Change the Check Paper Setting
When the Check Paper setting is set to On and you pull the paper tray out of the machine, or load paper in the paper tray, a message appears on the LCD asking if you want to change the paper size and paper type.
The default setting is On.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Tray Setting] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to display the [Check Paper] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to select the [On] or [Off] option, and then press OK .
6. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press
Paper] .
[Settings]
2. Press [On] or [Off] .
> [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Tray Setting] > [Check
3. Press .
Related Information
•
52
Home > Paper Handling > Recommended Print Media
Recommended Print Media
To get the best print quality, we recommend using the paper listed in the table.
Paper Type
Plain Paper
Recycled Paper
Labels
Envelopes
Glossy Paper
Item
Xerox Premier TCF 80 g/m 2
Xerox Business 80 g/m 2
Steinbeis Evolution White 80 g/m 2
Avery laser label L7163
Antalis River series (DL)
Mondi Color Copy Coated Glossy 135 g/m 2
Related Information
•
53
Home > Paper Handling > Load Documents
Load Documents
•
Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
•
Load Documents on the Scanner Glass
54
Load Documents > Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Load Documents in the Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use the ADF when copying or scanning multi page, standard-sized documents.
• The ADF can hold the following sheets and feed each sheet individually:
Up to 50 sheets
• Use standard 80 g/m 2 paper.
• Make sure documents with correction fluid or written in ink are completely dry.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT leave thick documents on the scanner glass. If you do this, the ADF may jam.
• DO NOT use paper that is curled, wrinkled, folded, ripped, stapled, paper-clipped, glued together, or taped.
• DO NOT use cardboard, newspaper, or fabric.
• To avoid damaging your machine while using the ADF, DO NOT pull on the document while it is feeding.
Supported Document Sizes
Length:
Width:
Weight:
147.3 mm to 355.6 mm
105 mm to 215.9 mm
60 to 105 g/m²
1. Unfold the ADF document output support flap.
2. Fan the pages well.
3. Stagger the pages of your document and load it into the ADF face up and top edge first , as shown in the illustration.
55
4. Adjust the paper guides to fit the width of your document.
Related Information
•
56
Load Documents > Load Documents on the Scanner Glass
Load Documents on the Scanner Glass
Use the scanner glass to fax, copy, or scan one page at a time.
Supported Document Sizes
Length:
Width:
Weight:
Up to 300 mm
Up to 215.9 mm
2 kg
NOTE
(For ADF models) To use the scanner glass, the ADF must be empty.
1. Lift the document cover.
2. Place the document on the scanner glass face down .
3. Place the corner of the page in the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
4. Close the document cover.
If the document is a book or is thick, gently press on the document cover.
Related Information
•
57
Home > Paper Handling > Unscannable and Unprintable Areas
Unscannable and Unprintable Areas
The measurements in the table below show maximum unscannable and unprintable areas from the edges of the most commonly-used paper sizes. These measurements may vary depending on the paper size or settings in the application you are using.
1
2 4
3
Do not attempt to scan, copy, or print in these areas. Any content included in such areas will not be reflected in the output.
Usage
Fax (Sending)
Document Size
Letter, Legal
A4
Top (1)
Bottom (3)
3 mm
3 mm
Left (2)
Right (4)
4 mm
(ADF)
1 mm
(Scanner Glass)
3 mm
4 mm
Letter, Legal 4 mm
Scan
A4
Letter
A4
Legal
Letter, Legal
A4
4 mm
4.2 mm
4.2 mm
3 mm
3 mm
3 mm
3 mm
4.2 mm
4.2 mm
1
2
The number shown is the default value. This number is adjustable to 0 mm. If the number is set to 0 mm, a black shadow may appear around the edges on the scanned image.
A 1 in 1 copy and 100% document size copy
Related Information
•
58
Home > Paper Handling > Using Special Paper
Using Special Paper
Always test paper samples before purchasing them to ensure desirable performance.
• DO NOT use inkjet paper; it may cause a paper jam or damage your machine.
• If you use bond paper, paper with a rough surface, or paper that is wrinkled or creased, the paper may exhibit degraded performance.
Store paper in its original packaging and keep it sealed. Keep the paper flat and away from moisture, direct sunlight, and heat.
IMPORTANT
Some types of paper may not perform well or may cause damage to your machine.
DO NOT use paper:
• that is highly textured
• that is extremely smooth or shiny
• that is curled or warped
• that is coated or has a chemical finish
• that is damaged, creased, or folded
• that exceeds the recommended weight specification in this guide
• with tabs and staples
• that is multipart or carbonless
• that is designed for inkjet printing
If you use any of the types of paper listed above, they may damage your machine. This damage is not covered under any Brother warranty or service agreement.
Related Information
•
59
•
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
•
Print from Your Computer (Mac)
•
•
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
•
•
•
•
60
> Print from Your Computer (Windows)
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
•
•
•
•
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
•
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript ® 3 ™ Language
•
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
61
> Print from Your Computer (Windows)
> Print a Document (Windows)
Print a Document (Windows)
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model's name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
4. Click the Paper Size drop-down list, and then select your paper size.
5. In the Orientation field, select the Portrait or Landscape option to set the orientation of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application.
6. Type the number of copies (1-999) you want in the Copies field.
7. Click the Media Type drop-down list, and then select the type of paper you are using.
8. To print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper or print one page of your document on multiple sheets, click the Multiple Page drop-down list, and then select your options.
9. Change other printer settings, if needed.
10. Click OK .
11. Complete your print operation.
62
Related Information
•
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
•
63
> Print from Your Computer (Windows)
> Print Settings (Windows)
Print Settings (Windows)
Basic Tab
1. Paper Size
Select the paper size you want to use. You can either choose from standard paper sizes or create a custom paper size.
2. Orientation
Select the orientation (portrait or landscape) of your printout.
If your application contains a similar setting, we recommend that you set the orientation using the application.
3. Copies
Type the number of copies (1-999) that you want to print in this field.
Collate
Select this option to print sets of multi-page documents in the original page order. When this option is selected, one complete copy of your document will print, and then reprint according to the number of
64
copies you choose. If this option is not selected, then each page will print according to the number of copies chosen before the next page of the document is printed.
4. Media Type
Select the media type you want to use. To achieve the best print results, the machine automatically adjusts its print settings according to the selected media type.
5. Print Quality
Select the print quality you want. Because print quality and speed are related, the higher the quality, the longer it will take to print the document.
6. Colour / Mono
Select the Colour/Mono settings to use.
NOTE
• The machine’s colour sensor is very sensitive and may perceive faded black text or an off-white background as colour. If you know that your document is black and white and you want to conserve colour toner, select the Mono mode.
• If either the Cyan, Magenta, or Yellow toner reaches the end of its life while printing a colour document, the print job cannot be completed. Cancel your print job and select to start the print job again in the Mono mode, as long as the Black toner is available.
7. Document Type
Select the type of document you want to print.
Settings button
Specify advanced settings, such as colour mode.
Colour Mode
Select the colour mode to suit your preference.
Import
To adjust the print configuration of a particular image, click Settings . When you have finished adjusting the image parameters, such as brightness and contrast, import those settings as a print configuration file. Use the Export option to create a print configuration file from the current settings.
Export
To adjust the print configuration of a particular image, click Settings . When you have finished adjusting the image parameters, such as brightness and contrast, export those settings as a print configuration file. Use the Import option to load a previously exported configuration file.
Improve Grey Colour
Select this option to improve the image quality of shaded areas.
Enhance Black Printing
If a black graphic does not print correctly, select this setting.
Improve Pattern Printing
Select this option to improve the pattern printing if printed fills and patterns are different from the fills and patterns you see on your computer screen.
8. Multiple Page
Select this option to print multiple pages on a single sheet of paper, or print one page of your document on multiple sheets.
Page Order
Select the page order when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
Border Line
Select the type of border to use when printing multiple pages on a single sheet of paper.
65
9. 2-sided / Booklet (available for certain models)
Select this option to print on both sides of the paper, or print a document in booklet format using 2-sided printing.
2-sided Settings button
Click this button to select the type of 2-sided binding. Four types of 2-sided bindings are available for each orientation.
10. Paper Source
Select the paper source setting according to your print conditions or purpose.
First Page
Select the paper source to use for printing the first page.
Other Pages
Select the paper source to use for printing the second and subsequent pages.
Advanced Tab
1. Scaling
Select these options to enlarge or reduce the size of the pages in your document.
66
Fit to Paper Size
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages to fit a specified paper size. When you select this option, select the paper size you want from the drop-down list.
Free [ 25 - 400 % ]
Select this option to enlarge or reduce the document pages manually. When you select this option, type a value into the field.
2. Reverse Print
Select this option to rotate the printed image 180 degrees.
3. Use Watermark
Select this option to print a logo or text on your document as a watermark. Select one of the preset watermarks, add a new watermark, or use an image file you have created.
4. Header-Footer Print
Select this option to print the date, time, and login user name on the document.
5. Toner Save Mode
Select this feature to use less toner to print documents; printouts appear lighter, but are still legible.
6. Secure Print
This feature ensures that confidential or sensitive documents are not printed out until you enter a password on the machine's control panel.
7. Administrator
This feature allows you to change the administrator password and restrict various printing functions.
8. User Authentication
This feature allows you to confirm the restrictions for each user.
9. Other Print Options button
Sleep Time
Select this option to set the machine to enter sleep mode immediately after printing.
Macro/Stream (available for certain models)
Select this feature to print an electronic form (macro/stream), which you have stored in your machine's memory, as an overlay on the print job.
Improve Print Output
Select this option to reduce the amount of paper curling and improve the toner fixing.
Edge Emphasis
Select this option to make the text appear sharper.
Skip Blank Page
Select this option to allow the printer driver to automatically detect blank pages and exclude them from printing.
TrueType Mode
Mode
Select how the fonts are processed for printing.
Use Printer TrueType Fonts (available for certain models)
Select whether to use built-in fonts for the font processing.
Eco settings
Select this option to reduce printing noise.
Related Information
•
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
67
Related Topics:
•
68
> Print from Your Computer (Windows)
> Secure Print (Windows)
Secure Print (Windows)
Use Secure Print to ensure that confidential or sensitive documents do not print until you enter a password on the machine's control panel.
The secure data is deleted from the machine when you turn the machine off.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model's name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Click the Settings button in the Secure Print field.
5. Select the Secure Print checkbox.
6. Type your four-digit password in the Password field.
7. Type the user name and job name in the User Name and Job Name fields, if needed.
8. Click OK to close the Secure Print Settings window.
9. Click OK .
10. Complete your print operation.
11. On the machine's control panel, press Menu .
12. Press a or b to display the [Secure Print] option, and then press OK .
13. Press a or b to display your user name, and then press OK .
14. Enter your four-digit password.
To enter each digit, press a or b to select a number, and then press OK .
15. Press a or b to display the print job, and then press OK .
16. Press a or b to select the [Print] option, and then press OK .
17. Press a or b to enter the number of copies you want.
18. Press OK . The machine prints the data.
The secured data will be cleared from the machine's memory after printing.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model's name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Advanced tab.
4. Click the Settings button in the Secure Print field.
5. Select the Secure Print checkbox.
6. Type your four-digit password in the Password field.
7. Type the user name and job name in the User Name and Job Name fields, if needed.
8. Click OK to close the Secure Print Settings window.
9. Click OK .
69
10. Complete your print operation.
11. On the machine's control panel, swipe left or right or press d or c to display the [Secure Print] option, and then press it.
12. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display user names, and then press your user name.
13. Enter your four-digit password, and then press [OK] .
14. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the print job, and then press it.
15. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK] .
16. Press [Start] .
The secured data will be cleared from the machine's memory after printing.
Related Information
•
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
70
> Print from Your Computer (Windows)
> Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
When you change an application's print settings, the changes only apply to documents printed with that application. To change print settings for all Windows applications, you must configure the printer driver properties.
1. Do one of the following:
• For Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers .
• For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click > Windows System > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers .
• For Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers .
• For Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings , and then click Control Panel . In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers .
2. Right-click your model's icon, and then select Printer properties . (If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver.)
The printer properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the General tab, and then click the Printing Preferences...
or Preferences...
button.
The printer driver dialog box appears.
• To configure the tray settings, click the Device Settings tab (available for certain models).
• To change the printer port, click the Ports tab.
4. Select the print settings you want to use as defaults for all of your Windows programs.
5. Click OK .
6. Close the printer properties dialog box.
Related Information
•
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
•
Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
71
> Print from Your Computer (Windows)
> Change the Default Print Settings
> Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
Configure the Optional Tray Settings (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L8390CDW
Access your machine's Properties to auto-detect your machine's Optional Tray and check the machine's serial number.
The printer driver automatically detects the Optional Tray during the driver installation. If you added the
Optional Tray after the driver installation, follow these steps:
1. Do one of the following:
• For Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers .
• For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click > Windows System > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers .
• For Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers .
• For Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings , and then click Control Panel . In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers .
2. Right-click your model's icon, and then select Printer properties . (If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver.)
The printer properties dialog box appears.
3. Click the Device Settings tab.
4. Click the Auto Detect button.
The Optional Tray and the machine's serial number are automatically detected.
5. Click the Apply button.
6. Close the printer properties dialog box.
The Auto Detect function is not available under the following machine conditions:
• The machine is turned off.
• The machine is shared via Print Server
• The machine and your computer are not connected.
Related Information
•
Change the Default Print Settings (Windows)
72
> Print from Your Computer (Windows)
> Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer
Driver (PostScript ® 3 ™ Language Emulation) (Windows)
Print a Document Using the BR-Script3 Printer Driver (PostScript ® 3 ™
Language Emulation) (Windows)
The BR-Script3 printer driver lets you print PostScript ® data more clearly.
Go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads to install the PS driver (BR-Script3 printer driver).
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model with BR-Script3 in the name, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
The printer driver window appears.
3. Click the Layout , Paper/Quality , or Secure Print tab to change basic print settings. (available for certain models)
Click the Layout or Paper/Quality tab, and then click the Advanced...
button to change advanced print settings. Click OK .
4. Click OK .
5. Complete your print operation.
Related Information
•
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
73
> Print from Your Computer (Windows)
> Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your
Computer (Windows)
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
The Status Monitor is a configurable software tool for monitoring the status of one or more machines, allowing you to get immediate notification of errors.
Do one of the following:
Double-click the icon in the task tray.
Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model's name (if not already selected). Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Status Monitor .
Troubleshooting
Click the Troubleshooting button to access the support website.
Looking for replacement supplies?
Click the Looking for replacement supplies?
button for more information on Brother genuine supplies.
Related Information
•
Print from Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
•
74
> Print from Your Computer (Mac)
Print from Your Computer (Mac)
•
•
75
> Print an Email Attachment
Print an Email Attachment
You can print files by emailing them to your Brother machine.
• Make sure Web Based Management is set to On. For more information, see Related Information .
• You can attach up to 10 documents, 20 MB in total, to an email.
• This feature supports the following formats:
Document files: PDF, TXT, and Microsoft Office files
Image files: JPEG, BMP, GIF, PNG, and TIFF
• The machine prints both the email content and attachments by default. To print only email attachments, change the settings as necessary.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Online Functions > Online Functions Settings .
• If the left navigation bar is not visible, start navigating from .
• If this function is locked, contact your network administrator for access.
5. Click the I accept the terms and conditions button.
6. Go to your machine, and then follow the machine's instructions to enable the settings.
7. On your computer, click General Settings .
The Email Print : General Settings screen appears.
8. Click the Enable button.
The machine prints the instruction sheet.
9. Send your email to the email address included on the sheet. The machine prints the email attachments.
• To change the settings, including email address and printer settings, click the Online Functions
Settings Page button.
• (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
You can also configure the settings from your machine. Press [Apps] > [Online Functions] , and then follow the on-screen instructions.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
•
76
> Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
You can print photos directly from a digital camera or a USB flash drive.
Supported file types are PDF, JPEG, TIFF, XPS, and PRN.
•
•
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage
•
Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)
77
> Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
> Compatible USB Flash Drives
Compatible USB Flash Drives
Related Models : MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
IMPORTANT
The USB direct interface supports only USB flash drives and digital cameras that use the USB mass storage standard. Other USB devices are not supported.
Compatible USB Flash Drives
USB Class
USB Mass Storage Sub Class
Transfer Protocol
Format
Sector Size
Encryption
1 NTFS format is not supported.
Related Information
•
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
USB Mass Storage Class
SCSI or SFF-8070i
Bulk transfer Only
FAT12/FAT16/FAT32/exFAT
Max. 4096 Byte
Encrypted devices are not supported.
78
> Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
> Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or
Digital Camera Supporting Mass Storage
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive or Digital Camera Supporting
Mass Storage
Related Models : MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
• Make sure your digital camera is turned on.
• Your digital camera must be switched from PictBridge mode to Mass Storage mode.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to your machine, DO NOT connect any device other than a digital camera or USB flash drive to the USB direct interface.
USB Port Location (Front View)
1. Connect your USB flash drive or digital camera to the USB direct interface. The touchscreen will automatically display the USB menu to confirm that the USB flash drive or digital camera is correctly connected.
• If an error occurs, the USB menu will not appear on the touchscreen.
• When the machine is in Deep Sleep mode, the touchscreen does not display any information even if you connect a USB flash drive to the USB direct interface. Press the touchscreen to wake up the machine.
• If your machine's Secure Function Lock is On, you may not be able to print from a USB flash drive or digital camera.
2. Press [Direct Print] .
3. Swipe up or down, or press a or b to display the file you want to print, and then select the file.
To print an index of the files stored on the USB flash drive or digital camera, press [Index Print] on the touchscreen. Press [Mono Start] or [Colour Start] to print the data.
4. Do one of the following:
• To change the settings, press [Print Settings] . Go to the next step.
• If you want to use the default settings, enter the number of copies, and then press [Mono Start] or
[Colour Start] .
5. Select the print settings you want to change:
• [Print Quality]
79
• [Tray Use]
• [Paper Type]
• [Paper Size]
• [Multiple Page]
• [Orientation]
• [2-sided]
• [Collate]
• [PDF Print Options]
• [PDF Fit to Page]
Depending on the file type, some of these settings may not appear.
6. Press [OK] .
7. Enter the number of copies you want.
8. Press [Mono Start] or [Colour Start] to print the data.
9. Press .
IMPORTANT
DO NOT remove the USB flash drive or digital camera from the USB direct interface until the machine has finished printing.
Related Information
•
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
80
> Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
> Create a PRN File for Direct Printing
(Windows)
Create a PRN File for Direct Printing (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
These instructions may vary depending on your print application and operating system.
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select your model, and then select the print to file option.
3. Complete your print operation.
4. Enter the required information to save the file.
If the computer prompts you to enter a file name only, you can also specify the folder where you want to save the file by typing the directory name (for example: C:\Temp\FileName.prn).
If a USB flash drive is connected to your computer, you can save the file directly to the USB flash drive.
Related Information
•
Print Data Directly from a USB Flash Drive
81
> Print Duplicate Copies
Print Duplicate Copies
Related Models : MFC-L8390CDW
Use the Carbon Copy function to make multiple copies of the same print data, as if printing on carbon paper.
Send the data to individual paper trays that you loaded with different paper types or colours.
For example, you may want to set the machine to send your print data to Tray 1, which you have pre-loaded with blue coloured paper, and then reprint the data in a certain location on the page from the MP Tray, which you have loaded with yellow coloured paper that already contains text.
If you load blue paper in Tray 1 and yellow paper in the MP tray, the printer will automatically feed paper for
Sheet 1 from Tray 1 and Sheet 2 from the MP Tray.
If you enable the Carbon Copy function, the machine will always make copies automatically.
Windows
The Carbon Copy function also allows you to select a different printing macro/stream for each page.
1. Press
[On] .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Carbon Menu] > [Carbon Copy] >
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copies] option, and then press the [Copies] option.
3. Enter the number of copies you want, and then press [OK] .
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copy1 Tray] option, and then press the [Copy1 Tray] option.
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the paper tray you want to configure for the [Copy1 Stream] option, and then press to select the paper tray.
Windows a. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Copy1 Stream] option, and then press it.
b. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the ID number of the macro/stream you want to use, and then press it.
6. Repeat these steps until you have selected all the tray settings for each copy.
7. Press .
8. Send your print job to the machine.
Related Information
•
82
> Cancel a Print Job
Cancel a Print Job
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
Press Stop/Exit .
To cancel multiple print jobs, press and hold Stop/Exit for four seconds.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Press .
To cancel multiple print jobs, press and hold for about four seconds.
Related Information
•
83
> Test Print
Test Print
If there are problems with print quality, follow these instructions to do a test print:
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [Printer] option, and then press OK .
3. (For Printer Emulation Supported models)
Press a or b to display the [Print Options] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to display the [Test Print] option, and then press OK .
5. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine prints a Test Print page.
6. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Print Options] > [Test Print] .
2. Press [Yes] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
84
> Universal Print
Universal Print
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based Management
•
Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
•
Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
•
•
Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
85
> Universal Print > Universal Print Overview
Universal Print Overview
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Universal Print is a cloud-based print service from Microsoft. You can print documents, from anywhere on the
Internet, without installing a printer driver. Universal Print is available for Azure Active Directory (Azure AD) users with the Microsoft 365 subscription.
1. Computer running Windows 10 20H1 or greater
2. Cloud server
Related Information
•
86
> Universal Print > Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based
Management
Register Your Machine with Universal Print Using Web Based
Management
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
• Make sure you set the correct date and time for your time zone.
• If your network uses a proxy server, configure the proxy server settings.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the Universal Print checkbox, and then click Advanced Settings .
6. Change your machine's name in the Device Name field if necessary.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
7. Click Register .
If an error occurs, follow the on-screen instructions.
8. A Universal Print user code appears. Click the Sign in button, and then type the user code.
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to finish the registration.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
•
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
•
87
> Universal Print > Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
Assign Universal Print Users via Microsoft Azure Portal
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can assign users to the Universal Print service only if your machine is registered on the Microsoft Azure portal.
1. Access the Microsoft Azure portal.
URL: portal.azure.com
2. Log in as a Printer Administrator.
3. Select the Universal Print service.
4. Select the Printers option, and then select your machine from the list.
5. Select the Share option.
6. Select the users you want to assign to the Universal Print service, and then click Share Printer .
Related Information
•
88
> Universal Print > Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
Add a Universal Print-enabled Printer to Your Computer
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Click > > Devices > Printers & scanners > Add a printer or scanner .
2. Select your machine registered as a Universal Print-enabled printer from the list, and then click Add device .
Related Information
•
89
> Universal Print > Print Using Universal Print
Print Using Universal Print
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Select the print command in your application.
2. Select the machine you registered as a Universal Print-enabled printer, and then click the printer's properties or preferences button.
3. Change the printer settings, if needed.
4. Complete your print operation.
Related Information
•
90
> Universal Print > Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
Deregister Your Machine from Universal Print
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To deregister your machine, you must delete it from Web Based Management, and then delete it on the Microsoft
Azure portal.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Next to the Universal Print checkbox, click Advanced Settings .
6. Click Delete Registration Data , and then follow the on-screen instructions.
7. Access the Microsoft Azure portal.
URL: portal.azure.com
8. Log in as a Printer Administrator.
9. Select the Universal Print service.
10. Select the Printers option, and then select your machine from the list.
11. Click Delete Printer Share .
12. Click Unregister .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
91
Scan
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
•
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
•
•
Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
92
Home > Scan > Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
•
•
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File
•
Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
•
Scan Multiple Business Cards and Photos (Auto Crop)
•
Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
•
Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment
•
Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient
•
•
•
•
•
Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
•
Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
•
Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs
•
Disable Scanning from Your Computer
93
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan Photos and Graphics
Scan Photos and Graphics
Send scanned photos or graphics directly to your computer.
Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press ( Scan ).
3. Press a or b to select the [to PC] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [Image] option, and then press OK .
5. If the machine is connected over the network, press a or b to select the destination computer.
6. Press OK .
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN, enter the four-digit PIN for the destination computer on the LCD and then press OK .
7. Do one of the following:
• To change the scan settings for this document, press Options or Copy/Scan Options and then go to the next step.
• To use the default scan settings, press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to the machine.
8. The machine will prompt you to set each of the following scan settings. Press a or b to select the desired option, and then press OK to proceed to the next scan setting.
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Auto Deskew] (available only for certain models)
94
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip B. Sens.]
• [Remove Bkg Clr] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [B&W TIFF Comp]
9. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to Image] .
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK] .
4. To change the settings, press [Options] , and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L8390CDW)
• [Scan Settings]
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [B&W TIFF Compress]
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK] .
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut] .
5. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
95
Related Topics:
•
Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
96
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF
File
Save Scanned Data to a Folder as a PDF File
Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer as PDF files.
Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press ( Scan ).
3. Press a or b to select the [to PC] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [File] option, and then press OK .
5. If the machine is connected over the network, press a or b to select the destination computer.
6. Press OK .
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN, enter the four-digit PIN for the destination computer on the LCD and then press OK .
7. Do one of the following:
• To change the scan settings for this document, press Options or Copy/Scan Options and then go to the next step.
• To use the default scan settings, press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to the machine.
8. The machine will prompt you to set each of the following scan settings. Press a or b to select the desired option, and then press OK to proceed to the next scan setting.
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Auto Deskew] (available only for certain models)
97
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip B. Sens.]
• [Remove Bkg Clr] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [B&W TIFF Comp]
9. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to File] .
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK] .
4. To change the settings, press [Options] , and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L8390CDW)
• [Scan Settings]
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [B&W TIFF Compress]
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK] .
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut] .
5. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
98
Related Topics:
•
Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
99
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
Save Scanned Data to a USB Flash Drive
Related Models : MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Scan documents directly to a USB flash drive.
1. Load your document.
2. Insert a USB flash drive into your machine.
3. Press [Scan to USB] .
4. To change the settings, press [Options] , and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L8390CDW)
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [File Name]
• [File Name Style]
• [File Size]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Crop]
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [Document Separation]
• [B&W TIFF Compress]
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK] .
• To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default] option, and then press [Yes] .
• To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset] , and then press [Yes] .
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut] .
5. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job.
100
IMPORTANT
The LCD displays a message while reading the data. DO NOT unplug the power cord or remove the USB flash drive from the machine while it is reading the data. You could lose your data or damage the USB flash drive.
Related Information
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
101
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan Multiple Business Cards and Photos
(Auto Crop)
Scan Multiple Business Cards and Photos (Auto Crop)
Related Models : MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can scan multiple documents placed on the scanner glass. The machine will scan each document and use the Auto Crop feature to create separate files or a single multi-page file.
Guidelines for Auto Crop
1
A4
A4
1 3
2
4
2 1
1. 10 mm or greater
2. 20 mm or greater (bottom)
• This setting is available only for documents that are rectangular or square.
• If your document is too long or wide, this feature will not work as described here.
• You must place the documents away from the edges of the scanner glass as shown in the illustration.
• You must place the documents at least 10 mm away from each other.
• Auto Crop adjusts the skew of the document on the scanner glass; however, if your document is skewed more than 45 degrees at less than 300 x 300 dpi or 10 degrees at 600 x 600 dpi, this feature will not work.
• The ADF must be empty to use Auto Crop.
• The Auto Crop feature is available for a maximum of 16 documents, depending on the size of the documents.
To scan documents using the Auto Crop feature, you must place the documents on the scanner glass.
1. Load documents on the scanner glass.
2. Insert a USB flash drive into your machine.
The LCD automatically changes.
3. Press [Scan to USB] > [Options] > [Auto Crop] .
4. Press [On] .
5. Press [OK] .
6. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. Follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
102
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
Scan to an Editable Text File (OCR)
Your machine can convert characters in a scanned document to text using the optical character recognition
(OCR) technology. You can edit this text using your preferred text-editing application.
• The Scan to OCR feature is available only for certain languages.
• Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press ( Scan ).
3. Press a or b to select the [to PC] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [OCR] option, and then press OK .
5. If the machine is connected over the network, press a or b to select the destination computer.
6. Press OK .
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN, enter the four-digit PIN for the destination computer on the LCD and then press OK .
7. Do one of the following:
• To change the scan settings for this document, press Options or Copy/Scan Options and then go to the next step.
• To use the default scan settings, press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to the machine.
8. The machine will prompt you to set each of the following scan settings. Press a or b to select the desired option, and then press OK to proceed to the next scan setting.
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Auto Deskew] (available only for certain models)
103
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip B. Sens.]
• [Remove Bkg Clr] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options.)
• [Margin Settings]
9. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to OCR] .
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK] .
4. To change the settings, press [Options] , and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L8390CDW)
• [Scan Settings]
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK] .
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut] .
5. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Related Topics:
•
Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
104
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Save Scanned Data as an Email
Attachment
Save Scanned Data as an Email Attachment
Send the scanned data from your machine to your email application as an attachment.
• Use the Scan button on the machine to make temporary changes to the scan settings. To make permanent changes, use Brother iPrint&Scan.
• To use this feature with your machine's Scan button, make sure you select one of these applications in
Brother iPrint&Scan:
Windows: Microsoft Outlook
Mac: Apple Mail
For other applications and Webmail services, use the Scan to Image or Scan to File feature to scan a document, and then attach the scanned file to an email message.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press ( Scan ).
3. Press a or b to select the [to PC] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [E-mail] option, and then press OK .
5. If the machine is connected over the network, press a or b to select the destination computer.
6. Press OK .
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN, enter the four-digit PIN for the destination computer on the LCD and then press OK .
7. Do one of the following:
• To change the scan settings for this document, press Options or Copy/Scan Options and then go to the next step.
• To use the default scan settings, press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to the machine.
105
8. The machine will prompt you to set each of the following scan settings. Press a or b to select the desired option, and then press OK to proceed to the next scan setting.
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Auto Deskew] (available only for certain models)
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip B. Sens.]
• [Remove Bkg Clr] (available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [B&W TIFF Comp]
9. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine scans the document and saves it as a file attachment. It then launches your email application and opens a new, blank email message with the scanned file attached.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to PC] > [to E-mail] .
3. If the machine is connected over the network, select the computer name where you want to send data.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK] .
4. To change the settings, press [Options] , and then select the scan settings you want to change. If you use the default settings, skip this step.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L8390CDW)
• [Scan Settings]
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [B&W TIFF Compress]
106
• To change scan settings, a computer with the Brother iPrint&Scan software installed must be connected to your machine.
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK] .
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut] .
5. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Related Topics:
•
Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
107
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient
Send Scanned Data to an Email Recipient
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Send scanned data directly from your machine to an email recipient without using a computer. This function allows your machine to scan documents and send them to an email address without your machine being connected to a computer. To send the scanned data as an attachment directly to your default email application using the iPrint&Scan software on your computer or the Scan button on your machine, use the "Scan to Email
Attachment" function instead.
• To send scanned data to an email recipient, you must configure your machine to communicate with your network and email server, which is used to send and receive emails.
• Configure these items from the machine's control panel or Web Based Management.
• To use the Scan to Email Server function, connect your machine to the network and access an SMTP server. Set up the following SMTP email settings:
Server address
Port number
User name
Encryption type (SSL or TLS)
Email server certificate (if used)
If you do not know these settings, contact your email service provider or network administrator.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to E-mail Server] .
• If you registered your email address with your user ID, the [to My E-mail] option appears when you log on to the machine using Secure Function Lock, Active Directory Authentication, or LDAP
Authentication.
• To send scanned data to your email address, press [to My E-mail] . When your email address appears on the LCD, press [Next] .
• To enable this feature in Web Based Management, go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan >
Scan to E-mail Server . In the Send to My E-mail field, select On . Click Submit .
3. Do one of the following to enter the destination email address:
• To enter the email address manually, press [Manual] , and then enter the email address using the keyboard on the LCD. When finished, press [OK] .
• If the email address is stored in the machine's address book, press [Address Book] , and then select the email address.
Press [OK] .
4. Confirm the email address, and then press [Next] .
5. To change the settings, press [Options] , and then select the scan settings you want to change.
• [2-sided Scan] (MFC-L8390CDW)
• [Colour Setting]
• [Resolution]
• [File Type]
• [Document Size]
• [Brightness]
• [Contrast]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
108
• [File Name]
• [File Name Style]
• [File Size]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Auto Deskew]
• [Skip Blank Page]
• [Skip Blank Page Sensitivity]
• [Remove Background Colour]
(available only for the [Colour] and [Grey] options)
• [Margin Settings]
• [Document Separation]
• [B&W TIFF Compress]
• If your machine displays the [OK] button, press [OK] .
• To set your own default settings: after making changes to settings, press the [Set New Default] option, and then press [Yes] .
• To restore the factory settings: press [Factory Reset] , and then press [Yes] .
• To save the settings as a shortcut, press [Save as Shortcut] .
(This function may not be available depending on your machine conditions.)
6. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
109
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to FTP
Scan to FTP
Scan documents directly to an FTP server when you need to share the scanned information. For added convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to FTP destinations.
•
•
Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server
110
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
> Set up a Scan to FTP
Profile
Set up a Scan to FTP Profile
Set up a Scan to FTP Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to an FTP location.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Windows
Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Mac
Google Chrome ™ for Android ™
Safari and Google Chrome ™ for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the FTP option, and then click Submit .
6. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option
Profile Name
Host Address
Port Number
Username
Password
SSL/TLS
Store Directory
File Name
Description
Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The default setting is port 21. In most cases this setting does not need to be changed.
Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the FTP server.
Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
Set the SSL/TLS option to scan securely using SSL/TLS communication. Change the CA Certificate setting, if needed.
Type the path (up to 60 characters) to the folder on the FTP server where you want to send your scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from userdefined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be
111
Option
Quality
File Type
Document Size
File Size
Auto Deskew
Skip Blank Page
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity
2-sided Scan (MFC-L8390CDW)
Remove Background Colour
Margin Settings
Document Separation
(MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
B&W TIFF Compress
Brightness
Contrast
Passive Mode
Description the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned.
Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results.
Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank pages.
Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the document, depending on the layout of your original.
Change the amount of background colour that is removed.
Adjust your document's margins.
Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save the documents separately by using this function.
Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Select the brightness level.
Select the contrast level.
Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server and network firewall configuration. The default setting is on. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed.
8. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
112
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
> Upload Scanned Data to an
FTP Server
Upload Scanned Data to an FTP Server
Share scanned information by saving it to your FTP server.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press ( Scan ).
3. Press a or b to select the [to FTP] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select one of the profiles listed, and then press OK .
If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
5. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The LCD shows the message [Connecting] . When the connection to the FTP server is successful, the machine starts scanning. If you are using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Do one of the following:
• (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW)
Press [Scan] > [to FTP] .
• (MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Press [Scan] > [to FTP/SFTP] .
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
4. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•
113
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
Scan to SSH Server (SFTP)
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Uses the Secure Shell Protocol to establish a private and safe data stream when scanning documents to a network destination. For added convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to SFTP destinations.
•
•
Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
•
Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
•
Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
•
Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
114
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
> Set up a
Scan to SFTP Profile
Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Set up a Scan to SFTP Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to an SFTP location.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Windows
Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Mac
Google Chrome ™ for Android ™
Safari and Google Chrome ™ for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the SFTP option, and then click Submit .
6. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option
Profile Name
Host Address
Username
Auth. Method
Password
Client Key Pair
Server Public Key
Description
Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the SFTP server.
Select Password or Public Key .
When you select Password for the Auth. Method option, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.
When you select Public Key for the Auth. Method option, select the authentication type.
Select the authentication type.
115
Option
Store Directory
File Name
Quality
File Type
Document Size
File Size
Auto Deskew
Skip Blank Page
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity
2-sided Scan (MFC-L8390CDW)
Remove Background Colour
Margin Settings
Document Separation
B&W TIFF Compress
Brightness
Contrast
Port Number
8. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Description
Type the path (up to 60 characters) to the folder on the SFTP server where you want to send your scanned data. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from userdefined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned.
Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results.
Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank pages.
Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the document, depending on the layout of your original.
Change the amount of background colour that is removed.
Adjust your document's margins.
Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save the documents separately by using this function.
Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Select the brightness level.
Select the contrast level.
Change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The default setting is port 22. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed.
116
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
> Create a
Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
Create a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Client Key Pair .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create New Client Key Pair .
6. In the Client Key Pair Name field, type the name (up to 20 characters) you want.
7. Click the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list, and then select the algorithm you want.
8. Click Submit .
The client key pair is created and saved in your machine's memory. The client key pair name and public key algorithm will be displayed in the Client Key Pair List .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
117
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
> Export a
Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
Export a Client Key Pair Using Web Based Management
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Client Key Pair .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Export Public Key shown with Client Key Pair List .
6. Click Submit .
The client key pair is exported to your computer.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
118
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
> Import a
Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
Import a Server Public Key Using Web Based Management
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Server Public Key .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import Server Public Key .
6. Specify the file that you want to import.
7. Click Submit .
The server public key is imported to your machine.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
119
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
> Upload
Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
Upload Scanned Data to an SFTP Server
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to FTP/SFTP] .
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
4. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•
120
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to Network (Windows)
Scan to Network (Windows)
Scan documents directly to a CIFS server on your local network. For added convenience, you can configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to Network destinations.
•
Set up a Scan to Network Profile
•
Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
121
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
> Set up a
Scan to Network Profile
Set up a Scan to Network Profile
Set up a Scan to Network Profile to scan and upload scanned data directly to a folder on a CIFS server.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Windows
Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Mac
Google Chrome ™ for Android ™
Safari and Google Chrome ™ for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the Network option, and then click Submit .
If you want to send the data to your designated folder on the CIFS server, select On for the Send to My
Folder option.
6. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option
Profile Name
Network Folder Path
File Name
Quality
File Type
Description
Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to send your scanned data.
Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from userdefined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
122
Option
Document Size
File Size
Auto Deskew
Skip Blank Page
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity
2-sided Scan (MFC-L8390CDW)
Remove Background Colour
Margin Settings
Document Separation
(MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
B&W TIFF Compress
Brightness
Contrast
Use PIN for Authentication
Auth. Method
Username
Password
Kerberos Server Address
Description
Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned.
Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results.
Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank pages.
Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the document, depending on the layout of your original.
Change the amount of background colour that is removed.
Adjust your document's margins.
Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save the documents separately by using this function.
Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Select the brightness level.
Select the contrast level.
To PIN-protect this profile, select On and type a four-digit PIN in the PIN
Code field.
To set your authentication method, select Auto , Kerberos , or NTLMv2 .
Type a user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the folder specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the following styles:
• user@domain
• domain\user
Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
8. Click Submit .
9. You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) or set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel for all authentication methods. The machine's time must match the time used by the
Kerberos Server and CIFS Server.
Related Information
•
•
Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
•
123
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
> Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Set the Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Make sure the date and time and the time zone settings are set correctly using Web Based Management or the control panel. The machine's time must match the time used by the server providing authentication.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Windows
Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Mac
Google Chrome ™ for Android ™
Safari and Google Chrome ™ for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
• Ignore step 1, if you already have a Web Based Management window open.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Date&Time .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
124
5. Clear the Synchronize with SNTP server checkbox.
6. In the Date fields, enter the date.
7. Select the clock type from the Clock Type field.
8. In the Time fields, enter the time.
9. Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For example, the time zone for Eastern time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.
10. In the Auto Daylight field, click On to set the machine to change automatically to Daylight Saving Time. It will reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and back one hour in the autumn (available only for some countries).
11. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Set up a Scan to Network Profile
Related Topics:
•
125
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
> Upload
Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
Upload Scanned Data to a CIFS Server
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press ( Scan ).
3. Press a or b to select the [to Network] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select one of the profiles listed, and then press OK . If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN, enter the four-digit PIN for the destination computer on the LCD and then press OK .
5. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to Network] .
• If you registered your user ID, the [to My Folder] option appears when you log on to the machine using Active Directory Authentication or LDAP Authentication.
• To send scanned data to your designated folder on the CIFS server, press [to My Folder] .
• To enable this feature in Web Based Management, go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan >
Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint . In the Send to My Folder field, select On .
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK] .
4. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•
126
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Scan to SharePoint
Scan to SharePoint
Scan documents directly to a SharePoint server when you need to share the scanned information. For added convenience, configure different profiles to save your favourite Scan to SharePoint destinations.
•
Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile
•
Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server
127
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
Scan to SharePoint > Set up a Scan to
SharePoint Profile
Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile
Set up a Scan to SharePoint Profile to scan and upload the scanned data directly to a SharePoint location.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Windows
Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Mac
Google Chrome ™ for Android ™
Safari and Google Chrome ™ for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the SharePoint option, and then click Submit .
6. Click the Scan to FTP/SFTP/Network/SharePoint Profile menu.
7. Select the profile you want to set up or change.
NOTE
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
Option
Profile Name
SharePoint Site Address
SSL/TLS
File Name
Quality
Description
Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Copy and paste the full destination address shown in the address bar of your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared
%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or the IP address (for example: http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx).
If the address in the SharePoint Site Address field starts with "https://", you can verify the server certificate by selecting the Verify Server
Certificate checkbox.
Select a file name prefix from the preset names provided, or from userdefined names. The file name used for the scanned document will be the file name prefix you select, followed by the last six digits of the flatbed/ADF scanner counter and the file extension (for example:
"Estimate_098765.pdf").
Select a quality setting. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
128
Option
File Type
Document Size
File Size
Auto Deskew
Skip Blank Page
Skip Blank Page Sensitivity
2-sided Scan (MFC-L8390CDW)
Remove Background Colour
Margin Settings
Document Separation
(MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
B&W TIFF Compress
Brightness
Contrast
Use PIN for Authentication
Auth. Method
Username
Password
Kerberos Server Address
Description
Select the file type you want to use for the scanned document. If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select your document size from the list. This is necessary to make sure the scanned file is the correct size.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select your file size from the list.
If you choose the User Select option, the machine will prompt users to select a setting each time they use the scan profile.
Select the Auto option to set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned.
Select the On option to remove blank pages of the document from the scanning results.
Select the sensitivity level for detecting blank pages in the scanned data.
The higher the sensitivity, the easier it is for the machine to detect blank pages.
Select the Long Edge or Short Edge option to scan both sides of the document, depending on the layout of your original.
Change the amount of background colour that is removed.
Adjust your document's margins.
Split a scanned image.
When multiple documents have been scanned, you can split and save the documents separately by using this function.
Select the TIFF compression option for a black and white document.
Select the brightness level.
Select the contrast level.
To PIN-protect this profile, select On and type a four-digit PIN in the PIN
Code field.
To set your authentication method, select Auto , NTLMv2 , Kerberos , or
Basic . If you choose Auto , the authentication method will be detected automatically.
Type the user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the following styles:
• user@domain
• domain\user
Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
8. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
129
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
Scan to SharePoint > Upload Scanned
Data to a SharePoint Server
Upload Scanned Data to a SharePoint Server
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press ( Scan ).
3. Press a or b to select the [to SharePoint] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select one of the profiles listed, and then press OK . If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN, enter the four-digit PIN for the destination computer on the LCD and then press OK .
5. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the LCD instructions to complete the scanning job.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [to SharePoint] .
3. When the server profiles you set up using Web Based Management appear, select the profile you want. If the profile is not complete (for example, if the logon account name and password are missing, or if the quality or file type is not specified), you will be prompted to enter any missing information.
If the LCD prompts you to enter a PIN for the computer, enter the four-digit PIN on the LCD, and then press
[OK] .
4. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning. If using the machine's scanner glass, follow the touchscreen instructions to complete the scanning job.
Related Information
•
130
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and
Windows 11)
The Web Services protocol enables Windows 10 and Windows 11 users to scan using a Brother machine on the network. You must install the driver via Web Services.
•
Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner Driver (Windows 10 and Windows
•
Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services Protocol (Windows 10 and Windows
•
Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol
131
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner
Driver (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
Use the Web Services Protocol to Install the Scanner Driver (Windows
10 and Windows 11)
• Make sure you have installed the correct software and drivers for your machine.
• Verify that the host computer and the Brother machine are on the same subnet, or that the router is correctly configured to pass data between the two devices.
• You must configure the IP address on your Brother machine before you configure this setting.
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device .
• Windows 10
Click > Windows System > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device .
• The Web Services Name for the Brother machine is your model's name and the MAC Address.
• Move your mouse over the machine's name to display the machine's information.
2. Select the machine you want to install, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
To uninstall the drivers, click Uninstall or ( Remove device ).
Related Information
•
Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
132
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services
Protocol (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
Scan From Your Machine Using the Web Services Protocol (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
If you have installed the scanner driver via Web Services, you can access the Web Services scanning menu on your machine's LCD.
Certain characters in the messages displayed on the LCD may be replaced with spaces if the language settings of your operating system and your machine are different.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press ( Scan ).
3. Press a or b to select the [Web Service] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the type of scan you want to do, and then press OK .
5. Select the destination computer where you want to send the scan, and then press OK .
6. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine starts scanning.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Scan] > [WS Scan] .
3. Select the scan type.
4. Select the computer name where you want to send scanned data.
5. Press [Start] .
The machine starts scanning.
If you are requested to select a scanning application, select Windows Fax and Scan from the list.
Related Information
•
Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
133
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine >
Use the Web Services Protocol for
Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11) > Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol
Configure Scan Settings for the Web Services Protocol
1. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers .
• Windows 10
Click > Windows System > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers .
2. Right-click the machine icon, and then select Scan profiles...
. The Scan Profiles dialog box appears.
3. Select the scan profile you want to use.
4. Make sure the scanner selected in the Scanner list is a machine that supports Web Services for scanning, and then click the Set as Default button.
5. Click Edit...
.
The Edit Default Profile dialog box appears.
6. Select the Source , Paper size , Colour format , File type , Resolution (DPI) , Brightness and Contrast settings.
7. Click the Save Profile button.
These settings will be applied when you scan using the Web Services protocol.
If the machine prompts you to select a scanning application, select Windows Fax and Scan from the list.
Related Information
•
Use the Web Services Protocol for Network Scanning (Windows 10 and Windows 11)
134
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Change the Scan Button Settings from
Brother iPrint&Scan
Change the Scan Button Settings from Brother iPrint&Scan
Brother iPrint&Scan allows you to change the machine's Scan Button settings.
1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan.
• Windows
Launch ( Brother iPrint&Scan ).
• Mac
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications , and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon.
The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears.
2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then follow the on-screen instructions to select your Brother machine.
3. Click the Machine Scan Settings button, and then follow the on-screen instructions to change the scan settings, such as document size, colour, and resolution.
Related Information
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
135
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs
Configure Certificates for Signed PDFs
If you select Signed PDF for Scan features, you must configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based
Management.
To use Signed PDF, you must install a certificate on your machine and your computer.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Signed PDF .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Select the Certificate drop-down list, and then select the certificate.
6. Click Submit .
136
Related Information
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Related Topics:
•
137
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine > Disable Scanning from Your Computer
Disable Scanning from Your Computer
To disable the scan function on your computer, disable the Pull Scan setting using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan from PC .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Pull Scan field, click Disabled .
6. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Scan Using the Scan Button on Your Machine
Related Topics:
•
138
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
There are several ways you can use your computer to scan photos and documents on your machine. Use the software applications we provide or use your favourite scanning application.
•
Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
•
Scan Using Nuance ™ PaperPort ™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications
•
Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
139
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
> Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan.
• Windows
Launch ( Brother iPrint&Scan ).
• Mac
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications , and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon.
The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears.
2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then select your model's name from the list. Click OK .
3. Click OK again.
4. Click the Scan icon, and then follow the on-screen instructions to scan your documents.
Related Information
•
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
•
140
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
> Scan Using Nuance ™ PaperPort ™ 14SE or Other
Windows Applications
Scan Using Nuance ™ PaperPort ™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications
You can use the Nuance ™ PaperPort ™ 14SE application for scanning.
• To download the Nuance ™ PaperPort ™ 14SE application, click the left navigation bar, and then click PaperPort .
• Nuance ™ PaperPort ™ 14SE supports Windows 10 and Windows 11.
( Brother Utilities ), select Do More in
• For detailed instructions on using each application, click the application's Help menu, and then click
Getting Started Guide in the Help ribbon.
The instructions for scanning in these steps are for PaperPort ™ 14SE. For other Windows applications, the steps will be similar. PaperPort ™ 14SE supports both TWAIN and WIA drivers; the TWAIN driver
(recommended) is used in these steps.
1. Load your document.
2. Start PaperPort ™ 14SE.
Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click > All apps > Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort .
• Windows 10
Click > Nuance PaperPort 14 > PaperPort .
3. Click the Desktop menu, and then click Scan Settings in the Desktop ribbon.
The Scan or Get Photo panel appears on the left side of the screen.
4. Click Select .
5. From the available Scanners list, select your model with TWAIN: TW in the name.
6. Click OK .
7. Select the Display scanner dialog box checkbox in the Scan or Get Photo panel.
8. Click Scan .
The Scanner Setup dialog box appears.
141
9. Adjust the settings in the Scanner Setup dialog box, if needed.
10. Click the Document Size drop-down list, and then select your document size.
To scan both sides of the document (MFC-L8390CDW):
Automatic 2-sided scan is available only when using the ADF.
You cannot use PreScan to preview the scanned image.
11. Click PreScan to preview your image and crop unwanted portions before scanning.
12. Click Start .
The machine starts scanning.
Related Information
•
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
•
TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)
142
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
> Scan Using Nuance ™ PaperPort ™ 14SE or Other
Windows Applications > TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)
TWAIN Driver Settings (Windows)
• Note that the item names and assignable values will vary depending on the machine.
• The Contrast option is available only when selecting the Grey (Error Diffusion) , True Grey , or 24bit
Colour options from the Color Setting settings.
1. Scan
Select the Photo , Web , or Text option depending on the type of document you want to scan.
Scan (Image Type)
Photo
Web
Text Use for scanning text documents.
Resolution
Use for scanning photo images.
300 x 300 dpi
Use for attaching scanned images to web pages.
100 x 100 dpi
200 x 200 dpi
Colour Setting
24bit Colour
24bit Colour
Black & White
2. Resolution
Select a scanning resolution from the Resolution drop-down list. Higher resolutions take more memory and transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
3. Color Setting
Select from a range of scan colour depths.
143
• Black & White
Use for text or line art images.
• Grey (Error Diffusion)
Use for photographic images or graphics. (Error Diffusion is a method for creating simulated grey images without using true grey dots. Black dots are arranged in a specific pattern to give a grey appearance.)
• True Grey
Use for photographic images or graphics. This mode is more accurate because it uses up to 256 shades of grey.
• 24bit Colour
Use to create an image with the most accurate colour reproduction. This mode uses up to 16.8 million colours to scan the image, but it requires the most memory and has the longest transfer time.
4. Document Size
Select the exact size of your document from a selection of preset scan sizes.
If you select Custom , the Custom Document Size dialog box appears and you can specify the document size.
5. Auto Crop (MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Scan multiple documents placed on the scanner glass. The machine will scan each document and create separate files or a single multi-page file.
6. Brightness
Set the brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the field to set the brightness level.
7. Contrast
Increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a value in the field to set the contrast level.
8. 2-sided Scanning (MFC-L8390CDW)
Scan both sides of the document. When using the Automatic 2-sided Scan feature, you must select the
Long-edge binding or Short-edge binding option from the 2-sided Scanning drop-down list, so that when you turn the pages, they are facing the way you want.
9. Advanced Settings
Configure advanced settings by clicking the Advanced Settings button in the Scan Settings dialog box.
• Document Correction
Auto Deskew
Set the machine to correct document skewing automatically as the pages are scanned.
Detect End of Page (ADF)
Detects the end of page and automatically adjusts the size of a page when the length of the document scanned from the ADF is shorter than the selected document size.
Margin Settings
Adjust the margins in your document.
Rotate Image
Rotate the scanned image.
Fill With Color
Fill in the edges on four sides of the scanned image using the selected colour and range.
Skip Blank Page
Remove the document's blank pages from the scanning results.
• Image Quality
Background Processing
144
• Remove Bleed-through / Pattern
Prevent bleed-through.
• Remove Background Colour
Remove the base colour of documents to make the scanned data more legible.
Colour Drop
Select a colour to remove from the scanned image.
Edge Emphasis
Make the characters of the original sharper.
Reduce Noise
Improve the quality of your scanned images with this selection. The Reduce Noise option is available when selecting the 24bit Colour option and the 300 x 300 dpi , 400 x 400 dpi , or 600 x 600 dpi scan resolution.
• B&W Image Quality
Character Correction
• Blurred Character Correction
Correct the broken or incomplete characters of the original to make them easier to read.
• Boldface Formatting
Emphasise the characters of the original by making them bold.
B&W Inversion
Invert black and white in the monochrome image.
• Feed Control
Layout (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Select the layout.
Continuous Scan
Select this option to scan multiple pages. After a page is scanned, select whether to continue scanning or finish.
Related Information
•
Scan Using Nuance ™ PaperPort ™ 14SE or Other Windows Applications
145
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
> Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
The Windows Fax and Scan application is another option that you can use for scanning.
• Windows Fax and Scan uses the WIA scanner driver.
• If you want to crop a portion of a page after pre-scanning a document, you must scan using the scanner glass (also called the flatbed).
1. Load your document.
2. Launch Windows Fax and Scan.
3. Click File > New > Scan .
4. Select the scanner you want to use.
5. Click OK .
The New Scan dialog box appears.
6. Adjust the settings in the dialog box, if needed.
The scanner resolution can be set to a maximum of 1200 dpi. If you want to scan at higher resolutions, use the Scanner Utility software from Brother Utilities .
If your machine supports 2-sided scanning and you want to scan both sides of your document, select Feeder
(Scan both sides) from the Source drop-down list
7. Click Scan .
The machine starts scanning the document.
Related Information
•
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
•
146
Scan from Your Computer (Windows)
> Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
> WIA Driver
Settings (Windows)
WIA Driver Settings (Windows)
Profile
Select the scan profile you want to use from the Profile drop-down list.
Source
Select the Flatbed , Feeder (Scan one side) , or Feeder (Scan both sides) option from the drop-down list.
Paper size
The Paper size option is available if you select the Feeder (Scan one side) or Feeder (Scan both sides) option from the Source drop-down list.
Colour format
Select a scan colour format from the Colour format drop-down list.
File type
Select a file format from the File type drop-down list.
Resolution (DPI)
Set a scanning resolution in the Resolution (DPI) field. Higher resolutions take more memory and transfer time, but produce a finer scanned image.
Brightness
Set the brightness level by dragging the slider to the right or left to lighten or darken the image. If the scanned image is too light, set a lower brightness level and scan the document again. If the image is too dark, set a higher brightness level and scan the document again. You can also type a value in the field to set the brightness level.
Contrast
Increase or decrease the contrast level by moving the slider to the right or left. An increase emphasises dark and light areas of the image, while a decrease reveals more details in grey areas. You can also type a value in the field to set the contrast level.
147
Related Information
•
Scan Using Windows Fax and Scan
148
Home > Scan > Scan from Your Computer (Mac)
Scan from Your Computer (Mac)
•
Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
•
149
Home > Scan > Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
•
Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management
•
Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management
150
Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
> Set the Scan File Name Using
Web Based Management
Set the Scan File Name Using Web Based Management
Set up a file name for scanned data using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan File Name .
If the left navigation bar is not visible, start navigating from .
5. Select the File Name Style from the drop-down list.
6. If you selected the option to include the date in File Name Style field, select the date format from the dropdown list.
7. In the Time field, select On to include the time information in the file name.
8. In the Counter field, select Continuous or Reset after each job .
If you select Reset after each job , duplication of file names may occur.
9. If you want to create a user-defined file name prefix, type a file name in the user-defined fields of each scan function.
Do not use the following characters: ? / \ *
10. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
•
151
Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
> Set the Scan Job Email Report
Using Web Based Management
Set the Scan Job Email Report Using Web Based Management
When you scan a document, the machine will send a scan job email report automatically to the registered email address.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Scan > Scan Job e-mail report .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Administrator Address field, type the email address.
6. For the scan functions you want, select On to send a scan job email report.
7. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Configure Scan Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
•
152
Copy
•
Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided)
•
Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided)
•
Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images
•
Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature
•
•
•
153
Home > Copy > Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided)
Copy on One Side of the Paper (1-sided)
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
2. Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
3. Press a or b to enter the number of copies you want.
The LCD displays:
Stack Copies:01
□□■□□
4. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Make sure you have loaded the correct size paper in the paper tray.
154
2. Do one of the following:
• Place the document face up in the ADF.
(If you are copying multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)
• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
NOTE
For important or fragile documents, use the machine’s scanner glass.
3. Press [Copy] .
The LCD displays:
4. Change the copy settings, if needed.
• (Number of copies)
Enter the number of copies in one of the following ways:
Press or on the LCD.
155
•
Press
[OK] .
[Options]
to display a numeric keypad on the LCD, and then enter the number of copies. Press
Press to change the copy settings for the next copy only.
When finished, press [OK] . (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
After you have finished choosing new options, you can save them by pressing the [Save as
Shortcut] button.
-
-
-
Current setting
Press the following display area to change these settings for the next copy only. The icon displayed varies depending on the model.
[Quality]
[Tray Use]
[Enlarge/Reduce]
5. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start] .
To stop copying, press .
Related Information
•
156
Home > Copy > Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided)
Copy on Both Sides of the Paper (2-sided)
Reduce the amount of paper you use by copying onto both sides of the paper.
• You must choose a 2-sided copy layout from the following options before you can start 2-sided copying.
• The layout of your original document determines which 2-sided copy layout you should choose.
• (For ADF models) For important or fragile documents, use the machine’s scanner glass.
• (For ADF models) To use the automatic 2-sided copy feature, you must load your document in the ADF.
• When you manually make 2-sided copies from a 2-sided document, use the scanner glass.
• (For models without the lever on the 2-sided tray) Select A4 sized paper when using the 2 ‑ sided copy option.
Portrait
2–sided to 2–sided
1 1
2 2
1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip)
1
1
2
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip)
1
1
2 2
Landscape
2–sided to 2–sided
1 1
2 2
1–sided to 2–sided (Long Edge Flip)
1
1
2
2
1–sided to 2–sided (Short Edge Flip)
1
1
2 2
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
157
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press a or b to enter the number of copies you want.
3. Press Copy/Scan Options .
4. Press a or b to select [2-sided] , and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to display [Layout Long] or [Layout Short] , and then press OK .
6. Select flip on long edge or flip on short edge, and then press OK .
7. Press a or b to display [2sided
⇒
2sided] or [1sided
⇒
2sided] , and then press OK .
8. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
If you are using the scanner glass, go to the next step.
9. After the machine scans the page, place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press a to select the
[Yes] option.
10. After scanning all the pages, press b to select the [No] option.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
NOTE
• (For MFC-L8390CDW) Load your 2-sided document in the ADF. If you use the scanner glass for your
2-sided document, select the [1-sided ⇒ 2-sided] option.
• (For DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW) Load your 2-sided document to the scanner glass.
2. Press [Copy] .
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [2-sided Copy] .
5. Do one of the following:
• To make 2-sided copies of a 2-sided document, press [2-sided ⇒ 2-sided] .
• To make 2-sided copies from a 1-sided document, follow these steps: a. To change the layout options, press [Layout] , and then press [Long Edge Flip] or [Short
Edge Flip] .
b. Press [1-sided ⇒ 2-sided] .
NOTE
(For DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW) If you select [2-sided ⇒ 2-sided] , you cannot use the ADF. Use the scanner glass.
6. When finished, press [OK] . (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
7. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start] .
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
8.
If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
For a 2-sided document, turn the sheet over along the long edge to scan the other side.
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
158
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish] .
Related Information
•
159
Home > Copy > Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images
Enlarge or Reduce Copied Images
Select an enlargement or reduction ratio to resize your copied data.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press a or b to enter the number of copies you want.
3. Press Copy/Scan Options .
4. Press a or b to select [Enlarge/Reduce] , and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to select the option you want. Press OK .
6. Do one of the following:
• If you select [Enlarge] or [Reduce] , press a or b to select the enlargement or reduction ratio you want to use. Press OK .
• If you select [Custom(25-400%)] , press a or b to enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from [25%] to [400%] and then press OK .
• If you select [100%] , go to the next step.
7. When finished, press Mono Start or Colour Start .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy] .
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [Enlarge/Reduce] .
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options, and then press the option you want.
6. Do one of the following:
• If you select [Enlarge] or [Reduce] , press the enlargement or reduction ratio you want to use.
• If you select [Custom(25-400%)] , press (backspace) to erase the displayed percentage, or press d to move the cursor, and then enter an enlargement or reduction ratio from [25] to [400] .
Press [OK] .
• If you selected [100%] , go to the next step.
7. When finished, press [OK] . (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
160
8. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start] .
Related Information
•
161
Home > Copy > Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature
Make N in 1 Copies Using the Page Layout Feature
The N in 1 copy feature saves paper by copying two or four pages of your document onto one page of the copy.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press a or b to enter the number of copies you want.
3. Press Copy/Scan Options .
4. Press a or b to select [Page Layout] , and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to select [Off(1 in 1)] , [2 in 1(P)] , [2 in 1(L)] , [4 in 1(P)] or [4 in 1(L)] , and then press OK .
6. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
7. After the machine scans the page, place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press a to select the
[Yes] option.
8. After scanning all the pages, press b to select the [No] option.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy] .
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [Page Layout] .
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the options, and then press the option you want.
Option
2in1(Portrait)
Description
2in1(Landscape)
162
Option
4in1(Portrait)
Description
4in1(Landscape)
6. When finished, press [OK] . (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
7. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start] .
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
8.
If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish] .
Related Information
•
163
Sort Copies
Sort multiple copies. Pages will be stacked in the order they are fed, that is: 1, 2, 3, and so on.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press a or b to enter the number of copies you want.
3. Press Copy/Scan Options .
4. Press a or b to select [Stack/Sort] , and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to select [Sort] , and then press OK .
6. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
If you are using the scanner glass, go to the next step.
7. After the machine scans the page, place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press a to select the
[Yes] option.
8. After scanning all the pages, press b to select the [No] option.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Copy] .
3. Enter the number of copies.
4. Press [Options] > [Stack/Sort] > [Sort] .
5. When finished, press [OK] . (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
6. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start] .
If you placed the document in the ADF, the machine scans the pages and starts printing.
7.
If you are using the scanner glass, repeat the following steps for each page of the document:
• Place the next page on the scanner glass, and then press [Continue] to scan the page.
• After scanning all the pages, press [Finish] .
Related Information
•
164
Copy an ID Card
You may copy an identification card only to the extent permitted under applicable laws. For more detailed information, see the Product Safety Guide .
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Place an identification card face down near the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
1
1: Distance 4.0 mm or greater (top, left)
2. Press 2 in 1 (ID) Copy .
3. Press a or b to enter the number of copies you want.
4. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine scans one side of the identification card.
5. After the machine has scanned the first side, turn over the identification card.
6. Press Mono Start or Colour Start to scan the other side.
165
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Place your identification card face down near the upper left corner of the scanner glass.
1
1: Distance 4.0 mm or greater (top, left)
2. Press [Copy] .
3. Press [ID] .
4. Enter the number of copies.
5. Press [Colour Start] or [Mono Start] .
The machine scans one side of the identification card.
6. After the machine has scanned the first side, turn over the identification card.
7. Press [Continue] to scan the other side.
Related Information
•
166
Copy Options
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
To change Copy settings, press the Options or Copy/Scan Options button.
Menu selections
Quality
Enlarge/Reduce
Density
Remove Bkg Clr
2-sided
(available only for certain models)
Options
Select the copy quality for your type of document.
100%
Enlarge
Reduce
Custom(25-400%)
-
Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy.
Select a reduction ratio for the next copy.
Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Increase the density to make the text darker.
Decrease the density to make the text lighter.
Select to remove the background colour of the document when copying.
Select to copy on both sides of the paper.
1-sided → 2-sided
1
1
2
2-sided → 2-sided
1 1
2
Contrast
Stack/Sort
2 2
Increase the contrast to make an image clearer.
Decrease the contrast to make an image more subdued.
Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
Stack
1
Sort
1
2
2
2
1
2
1
167
Menu selections
Page Layout
Options
Make N in 1 copies.
4 in1
Auto Deskew
Colour Adjust
Set the machine to automatically correct skewed copies.
Change the default setting for colour saturation.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To change the Copy settings, press [Options] .
Menu selections
Quality
Tray Use
(MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Enlarge/Reduce
Options
Select the copy quality for your type of document.
Select a paper tray for the next copy.
Density
Remove Background Colour
2-sided Copy
100%
Enlarge
-
Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy.
Reduce
Custom(25-400%)
Select a reduction ratio for the next copy.
Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Increase the density to make the text darker.
Decrease the density to make the text lighter.
Select to remove the background colour of the document when copying.
Select to copy on both sides of the paper.
1-sided → 2-sided
1
1
2
2
2-sided → 2-sided
1 1
2-sided Copy Page Layout
2 2
The available options will vary depending on your model.
Select long edge binding or short edge binding.
168
Menu selections
(available for certain settings)
Contrast
Stack/Sort
Page Layout
Options
Increase the contrast to make an image clearer.
Decrease the contrast to make an image more subdued.
Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
Stack
1
Sort
1
2
2
2
1
2
Make N in 1 copies.
4 in1
1
Auto Deskew
Colour Adjust
Related Information
•
Set the machine to automatically correct skewed copies.
Change the default setting for colour saturation.
169
Fax
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
•
Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
•
Telephone Services and External Devices
•
•
170
> Send a Fax
Send a Fax
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
•
•
Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
•
Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
•
•
Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
•
•
•
Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
•
171
Send a Fax
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Do one of the following:
• Place the document face up in the ADF.
(If you are faxing multiple pages, we recommend using the ADF.)
• Place the document face down on the scanner glass.
2. Press [Fax] .
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On] , press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes] .
3. Enter the fax number.
• Using the dial pad
Press the digits to enter the fax number.
172
• Using the Address Book
Press [Address Book] , and then do one of the following:
Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it.
Press [Search:] , and then enter the name or the first letter of the name and press [OK] . Press the name you want to dial.
When finished, press [Apply] .
• Using the Call History
Press [Call History] , and then press the [Outgoing Call] option.
Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the fax number you want, and then press it.
To send a fax, press [Apply] .
4. Press [Fax Start] .
The machine scans and sends the document.
If you placed the document on the scanner glass, follow the instructions in the table.
Option Description
Yes To scan the next page, press the Yes option, and then place the next page on the scanner glass.
Press OK to scan the page.
No After you have scanned the last page, press the No option.
The machine sends the document.
To stop faxing, press , and then press .
When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?] , press [Yes] .
Related Information
•
173
> Send a Fax > Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
Send a 2-sided Fax from the ADF
Related Models : MFC-L8390CDW
You must select a 2-sided scanning format before sending a 2-sided fax. Select either the Long Edge or Short
Edge option, depending on the layout of your document.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] .
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On] , press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes] .
3. Press [Options] > [2-sided Fax] .
4. Do one of the following:
• If your document is flipped on the long edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Long Edge] option.
• If your document is flipped on the short edge, press the [2-sided Scan: Short Edge] option.
5. Press [OK] . (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
6. Enter the fax number.
7. Press [Fax Start] .
Related Information
•
174
> Send a Fax > Send a Fax Manually
Send a Fax Manually
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Manual fax transmission lets you hear the dialling, ringing and fax-receiving tones while sending a fax.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] .
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On] , press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes] .
3. Pick up the handset of the external telephone.
4. Dial the fax number you want to call.
5. When you hear the fax tone, press [Fax Start] .
If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send] .
6. Replace the handset of the external telephone.
Related Information
•
175
> Send a Fax > Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
Send a Fax at the End of a Conversation
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
At the end of a conversation, you can send a fax to the other party before you both hang up.
1. Ask the other party to wait for fax tones (beeps) and then to press the Start button before hanging up.
2. Load your document.
3. Press [Fax Start] .
If you are using the scanner glass, press [Send] .
4. Replace the handset.
Related Information
•
176
> Send a Fax > Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use the Broadcasting feature to send the same fax to multiple fax numbers at the same time.
• The same broadcast can include Groups, Address Book numbers, and up to 50 manually dialled numbers.
• Address Book numbers must be stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast.
• Group numbers must also be stored in the machine’s memory before they can be used in a broadcast.
Group numbers include many stored Address Book numbers for easier dialling.
If you did not use any of the Address Book numbers for Groups, you can broadcast faxes to the maximum number of locations supported by your machine. For information about the broadcasting locations, see
Related Information : Specifications .
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] .
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On] , press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes] .
3. Press [Options] > [Broadcasting] .
4. Press [Add Number] .
You can add numbers to the broadcast in the following ways:
• Press [Add Number] and enter a number using the LCD.
Press [OK] .
If you want to broadcast using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK] .
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email server feature.)
• Press [Add from Address book] . Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to add to the broadcast. Select the checkboxes of the broadcast. After you select all the numbers you want, press [OK] .
• Press [Search in Address book] . Press the name and press [OK] . Press the name or the first letter of the name, and then press the number you want to add.
5. When finished, press [OK] .
6. Press [Fax Start] .
• The machine’s available memory will vary depending on the types of jobs in the memory and the numbers used for broadcasting. If you broadcast to the maximum number available, you will not be able to use dual access and delayed fax.
• If the [Out of Memory] message appears, press or [Quit] to stop the job. If more than one page has been scanned, press [Send Now] to send the portion that is in the machine's memory.
Related Information
•
•
Cancel a Broadcast in Progress
177
Related Topics:
•
178
Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting) > Cancel a
Broadcast in Progress
Cancel a Broadcast in Progress
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
While broadcasting multiple faxes, you can cancel just the fax currently being transmitted or cancel the whole broadcast job.
1. Press .
2. Press .
3. Do one of the following:
• To cancel the entire broadcast, press [Entire Broadcast] .
When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?] , press [Yes] .
• To cancel the current job, press the name or number being dialled on the LCD.
When the LCD displays [Cancel Job?] , press [Yes] .
• To exit without cancelling, press .
Related Information
•
Send the Same Fax to More than One Recipient (Broadcasting)
179
> Send a Fax > Send a Fax in Real Time
Send a Fax in Real Time
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When sending a fax, the machine scans the document into the memory before sending it. As soon as the telephone line is free, the machine starts dialling and sending. If you want to send an important document immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve the scan from its memory, turn [Real Time TX] on.
• If the memory is full and you are sending a fax from the ADF, the machine sends the document in real time
(even if [Real Time TX] is set to [Off] ). If the memory is full, faxes from the scanner glass cannot be sent until you clear some of the memory.
• In Real Time Transmission, the automatic redial feature does not work when using the scanner glass.
• If [Real Time TX] is set to on, the option to scan 2-sided documents is not available.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] .
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On] , press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes] .
3. Press [Options] > [Real Time TX] .
4. Press [On] or [Off] .
5. Press [OK] . (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
6. Enter the fax number.
7. Press [Fax Start] .
Related Information
•
180
> Send a Fax > Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
Send a Fax at a Specified Time (Delayed Fax)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can store up to 50 faxes in the machine's memory to be sent within the next twenty-four hour period.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] .
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On] , press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes] .
3. Press [Options] > [Delayed Fax] > [Delayed Fax] .
4. Press [On] .
5. Press [Set Time] .
6. Enter the time you want the fax to be sent (in 24-hour format), and then press [OK] .
(For example, enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
7. Press [OK] .
8. Enter the fax number.
9. Press [Fax Start] .
10. Press .
Related Information
•
181
> Send a Fax > Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
Add a Cover Page to Your Fax
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can add a cover page to the next fax or every outgoing fax.
• This feature will not work unless you have set up your Station ID.
• The cover page includes your Station ID, a comment, and the name stored in the Address Book.
1. Load your document.
2. Press [Fax] .
If the Fax Preview option is set to [On] , press [Fax] > [Sending Faxes] .
3. Press [Options] > [Coverpage Setup] > [Coverpage Setup] .
4. Press [On] .
5. Press [Coverpage Note] .
6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to choose the comment you want to use, and then press the comment.
Press .
7. Press [OK] . (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
8. Enter the fax number.
9. Press [Fax Start] .
The cover page will be added to the next fax. If you want to add the cover page to every outgoing fax, set the settings as the new default.
Related Information
•
•
182
Add a Cover Page to Your Fax > Create a Cover Page Message
Create a Cover Page Message
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Create up to two custom cover page messages to add to outgoing faxes.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Send] > [Coverpage Note] .
2. Press [5.] or [6.] to store your customised message.
3. Enter the cover page message using the LCD. Press [OK] .
Press to select numbers, letters, or special characters.
4. Press .
Related Information
•
183
> Send a Fax > Cancel a Fax in Progress
Cancel a Fax in Progress
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press .
2. Press while the machine is dialling or sending a fax.
The LCD displays [Cancel Job?] .
3. Press an option in the table to cancel or continue the fax job in progress.
Option Description
Yes The machine cancels sending the fax job.
No The machine does not cancel the fax job.
Related Information
•
184
> Send a Fax > Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
Check and Cancel a Pending Fax
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can cancel a fax job before it is sent, while it is stored in the memory.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remaining Jobs] .
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the waiting jobs, and then press the job you want to cancel.
3. Press [OK] .
4. Press [Yes] to cancel the fax job or press [No] to exit without cancelling.
5. When finished, press .
Related Information
•
185
Fax Options
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To change the fax-sending settings, press [Options] .
Option
Fax Resolution
Contrast
Description
Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
The fax quality often can be improved by changing the Fax
Resolution.
Adjust the contrast.
If your document is very light or very dark, changing the contrast may improve the fax quality.
Set the 2-sided scanning format.
2-sided Fax
(For automatic 2-sided scanning models)
Glass Scan Size
Broadcasting
Preview
Delayed Fax
Real Time TX
Coverpage Setup
Overseas Mode
Call History
Address Book
Set New Default
Factory Reset
Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the document.
Send the same fax message to more than one fax number at the same time.
Preview a fax message before you send it.
Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent.
Send a fax immediately without waiting for the machine to retrieve the scan from its memory.
Set the machine to automatically send a pre-programmed cover page.
Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas.
Select a number from the Call History.
Select a number from the Address Book.
Save your settings as the default.
Restore all settings back to the factory settings.
You can save the current settings by pressing [Save as Shortcut] .
Related Information
•
186
> Receive a Fax
Receive a Fax
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
•
187
> Receive a Fax > Receive Mode Settings
Receive Mode Settings
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
Choose the Correct Receive Mode
•
Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
•
Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring)
•
•
Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
•
Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
•
•
Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation
188
Receive Mode Settings > Receive Modes Overview
Receive Modes Overview
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Some receive modes answer automatically (Fax Only Mode and Fax/Tel Mode). You may want to change the
Ring Delay before using these modes.
Fax Only Mode
( [Fax Only] in the machine's menu)
Fax Only Mode automatically answers every call as a fax.
Fax/Tel Mode
( [Fax/Tel] in the machine's menu)
Fax/Tel Mode helps you manage incoming calls, by recognising whether they are fax or voice calls and handling them in the following ways:
• Faxes will be received automatically.
• Voice calls will start the F/T ring to tell you to pick up the call. The F/T ring is a fast pseudo/double-ring made by your machine.
Manual Mode
( [Manual] in the machine's menu)
Manual Mode turns off all automatic answering operations unless you are using the BT Call Sign feature.
To receive a fax in Manual Mode, lift the handset of the external telephone connected to the machine.
When you hear fax tones (short repeating beeps), press the buttons in the table to receive a fax. Use the Fax
Detect feature to receive faxes when you have lifted a handset on the same line as the machine.
Applicable Models
MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW
To receive a fax
Fax Start > Receive
External TAD Mode
( [External TAD] in the machine's menu)
External TAD Mode lets an external answering device manage your incoming calls.
Incoming calls will be handled in the following ways:
• Faxes will be received automatically.
• Voice callers can record a message on the external TAD.
Related Information
•
189
Receive Mode Settings > Choose the Correct Receive Mode
Choose the Correct Receive Mode
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You must choose a Receive Mode depending on the external devices and telephone services you have on your line.
By default, your machine will automatically receive any faxes that are sent to it. The diagram below will help you select the correct mode.
Do you want to use the telephone feature of your machine (if available), an external telephone or external telephone answering device connected on the same line as the machine?
Yes
Are you using the voice message function of an external telephone answering device?
No
No
Yes
Fax Only Mode
External TAD Mode
Do you want the machine to answer fax and telephone calls automatically?
1. Press
Fax/Tel Mode
Yes
No
Manual Mode
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Receive Mode] .
(U.K. only) If you cannot change the [Receive Mode] option, make sure the BT Call Sign feature is set to
Off.
2. Press [Fax Only] , [Fax/Tel] , [External TAD] , or [Manual] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
190
Receive Mode Settings > Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine
Answers (Ring Delay)
Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When somebody calls your machine, you will hear the normal telephone ring sound. The number of rings is set in the Ring Delay option.
• The Ring Delay setting sets the number of times the machine rings before it answers in the Fax Only and
Fax/Tel Modes.
• If you have external or extension telephones on the same line as the machine, choose the maximum number of rings.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Ring Delay] .
2. Press the number of rings you want.
If you select [0] , the machine will answer immediately and the line will not ring at all (available only for some countries).
3. Press .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
191
Receive Mode Settings > Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring)
Set the F/T Ring Time (Fast Double-ring)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When you set the Receive Mode to Fax/Tel Mode, if the call is a fax, your machine will automatically receive it.
However, if it is a voice call, the machine will sound the F/T ring (fast double-ring) for the time you set in the F/T
Ring Time option. When you hear the F/T ring, it means that a voice caller is on the line.
The F/T Ring Time feature works when you set Fax/Tel Mode as the Receive Mode.
Because the F/T ring is made by the machine, extension and external telephones will not ring; however, you can still answer the call on any telephone.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [F/T Ring Time] .
2. Press how long you want the machine to ring to alert you that you have a voice call.
3. Press .
Even if the caller hangs up during the pseudo/double-ringing, the machine will continue to ring for the set time.
Related Information
•
192
Receive Mode Settings > Set Fax Detect
Set Fax Detect
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If Fax Detect is On: The machine receives a fax call automatically, even if you answer the call. When you see [Receiving] on the LCD or when you hear “chirps” through the handset you are using, just replace the handset. Your machine will do the rest.
If Fax Detect is Off: If you are at the machine and answer a fax call by lifting the handset, press the buttons in the following table to receive the fax. If you answered at an extension or external telephone, press * 51 .
Applicable Models
MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To receive a fax
Fax > Fax Start > Receive
• If this feature is set to [On] , but your machine does not connect a fax call when you lift an extension or external telephone handset, press the remote activation code * 51 .
• If you send faxes from a computer on the same telephone line and the machine intercepts them, set
Fax Detect to [Off] .
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Fax Detect] .
2. Press [On] or [Off] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
193
Receive Mode Settings > Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
Shrink Page Size of an Oversized Incoming Fax
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If you enable the auto reduction function, the machine reduces each page of an incoming fax to fit on your paper.
The machine calculates the reduction ratio by using the fax page size and your Paper Size setting.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Auto Reduction] .
2. Press [On] or [Off] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
194
Receive Mode Settings > Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
Set the 2-sided Printing for Received Faxes
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Your machine prints received faxes on both sides of the paper when [2-sided] is set to [On] .
• Use A4 size paper (60 to 105 g/m 2 ) for this function.
• When 2-sided printing is enabled, incoming faxes are automatically reduced to fit the paper in the paper tray.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [2-sided] .
2. Press [On] or [Off] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
195
Receive Mode Settings > Set the Fax Receive Stamp
Set the Fax Receive Stamp
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can set the machine to print the received date and time at the top centre of each received fax page.
• Make sure you have set the current date and time on the machine.
• The received time and date will not appear when using Internet Fax.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Fax Rx Stamp] .
2. Press [On] or [Off] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
196
Receive Mode Settings > Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone
Conversation
Receive a Fax at the End of a Telephone Conversation
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If you are speaking on the telephone connected to your machine and the other party is also speaking on a telephone connected to his fax machine, at the end of the conversation, the other party can send you a fax before you both hang up.
Your machine's ADF must be empty.
1. Ask the other party to place the document in their machine and to press Start or Send.
2. When you hear the CNG tones (slowly repeating beeps), press [Fax Start] .
3. Press [Receive] to receive a fax.
4. Replace the external handset.
Related Information
•
197
> Receive a Fax > Memory Receive Options
Memory Receive Options
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use the Memory Receive options to direct incoming faxes while you are away from the machine. You can use only one Memory Receive option at a time.
Memory Receive can be set to:
• PC-Fax Receive
• Fax Forwarding
• Fax Storage
• Forward to Cloud (The machine forwards your received faxes to online services.)
• Forward to Network (The machine forwards your received faxes to a network destination.)
• Off
•
Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)
•
Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
•
Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
•
•
•
Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
•
Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
198
Memory Receive Options > Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received
Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)
Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer
(Windows only)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Turn the PC-Fax Receive feature on to automatically store incoming faxes to your machine's memory, and then send them to your computer. Use your computer to view and store these faxes.
To transfer the received faxes to your computer you must have the PC-FAX Receiving software running on your computer.
Even if you have turned computer off (at night or on the weekend, for example), your machine will receive and store your faxes in its memory.
When you start your computer and the PC-FAX Receiving software runs, your machine transfers your faxes to your computer automatically.
If you selected [Backup Print: On] , the machine will also print the fax.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [PC Fax Receive] .
2. Press [On] .
3. Press [OK] , and then follow the instructions on the LCD.
• PC-Fax Receive is not available for macOS.
• If you get an error message and the machine cannot print the faxes in the memory, you can use this setting to transfer your faxes to your computer.
4. Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer you want to receive faxes if you are on a network, and then press [OK] .
5. Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off] .
6. Press .
Related Information
•
199
Memory Receive Options > Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
Forward Incoming Faxes to Another Machine
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use the Fax Forwarding feature to automatically forward your incoming faxes to another machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive] .
2. Press [Fax Forward] .
3. Do one of the following:
• Press [Manual] to enter the recipient's fax number (up to 20 digits) or email address using the LCD.
Press [OK] .
To forward a fax using an email address, press , enter the email address, and press [OK] .
Select the file type you want.
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email server feature.)
• Press [Address Book] .
Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where you want your faxes to be forwarded.
Press the fax number or email address you want.
Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off] . If you select [Backup Print: On] , the machine also prints a copy of received faxes at your machine.
4. Press .
Related Information
•
200
Memory Receive Options > Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
Store Incoming Faxes in the Machine's Memory
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use the Fax Storage feature to store incoming faxes in the machine's memory. Retrieve your stored fax messages from your fax machine when you are at another location using the Remote Retrieval commands. Your machine will print a backup copy of each stored fax.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive] .
2. Press [Fax Storage] .
Press [Backup Print: On] or [Backup Print: Off] . If you select [Backup Print: On] , the machine also prints a copy of received faxes at your machine.
3. Press .
Related Information
•
201
Memory Receive Options > Change Memory Receive Options
Change Memory Receive Options
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If received faxes are in your machine's memory when you change the Remote Fax operations, the LCD will ask you one of the following questions:
If received faxes have been printed automatically, the LCD displays [Erase all documents?]
• Do one of the following:
If you press [Yes] , faxes in the memory will be erased before the setting changes.
If you press [No] , faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged.
If unprinted faxes are in the machine's memory, the LCD displays [Print all faxes?]
• Do one of the following:
If you press [Yes] , faxes in the memory will be printed before the setting changes.
If you press [No] , faxes in the memory will not be printed and the setting will be unchanged.
If received faxes are left in the machine’s memory when you change to [PC Fax Receive] from another option ( [Fax Forward] , [Fax Storage] , [Forward to Cloud] , or [Forward to Network] ).
• Press [<USB>] or the name of the computer if you are on a network, and then press [OK] . You will be asked if you want to turn on Backup Print.
The LCD displays:
[Send Fax to PC?]
If you press [Yes] , faxes in the memory will be sent to your computer before the setting changes.
If you press [No] , faxes in the memory will not be erased and the setting will be unchanged.
Related Information
•
202
Memory Receive Options > Turn Memory Receive Off
Turn Memory Receive Off
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Turn Memory Receive off if you do not want the machine to save or transfer incoming faxes.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive] .
2. Press [Off] .
The LCD displays options if there are received faxes still in your machine's memory.
3. Press .
Related Information
•
203
Memory Receive Options > Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If you select [Fax Storage] , you can still print a fax from the machine's memory.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Print Document] .
2. Press [Yes] .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
204
> Receive a Fax > Remote Fax Retrieval
Remote Fax Retrieval
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use Remote Retrieval to call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine, and use a remote access code and remote commands to retrieve fax messages.
•
•
•
•
•
Change the Fax Forwarding Number
205
> Set a Remote Access Code
Set a Remote Access Code
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Set a Remote Access Code to access and control your machine even when you are away from it.
Before you can use the remote access and retrieval features, you must set up your own code. The factory default code is the inactive code (---*).
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Remote Access] .
2. Enter a three-digit code using the numbers [0] to [9] , [*] or [#] using the LCD (the preset '*' cannot be changed), and then press [OK] .
•
• DO NOT use the same code used for your Remote Activation Code (*51) or Remote Deactivation Code
(#51).
To make your code inactive, press and hold
[OK] .
to restore the inactive setting (---*), and then press
3. Press .
Related Information
•
206
> Use Your Remote Access Code
Use Your Remote Access Code
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Dial your fax number from a telephone or another fax machine using touch tone.
2. When your machine answers, immediately enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *).
3. The machine signals if it has received messages:
• One long beep -- Fax messages
• No beeps -- No messages
4. When the machine gives two short beeps, enter a command.
• The machine will hang up if you wait longer than 30 seconds to enter a command.
• The machine will beep three times if you enter an invalid command.
5. Press 9 0 to reset the machine when you are finished.
6. Hang up.
This function may not be available in some countries or supported by your local telephone company.
Related Information
•
207
> Remote Retrieval Commands
Remote Retrieval Commands
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use the Remote Commands in this table to access fax commands and options when you are away from your machine. When you call the machine and enter your remote access code (three digits followed by *), the system will sound two short beeps and you must enter a Remote Command (column 1), followed by one of the options
(column 2) for that command.
Option Description Remote
Command
95 Change the Fax Forwarding, or Fax
Storage settings
1 OFF
2 Fax Forwarding
4 Fax Forwarding number
6 Fax Storage
You can select Off after you retrieve or erase all your messages.
One long beep means the change is accepted. If you hear three short beeps, you cannot make a change because one of the settings may not be configured correctly (for example, a Fax
Forwarding number has not been registered). You can register your Fax Forwarding number by entering 4. After you register the number, Fax
Forwarding will work.
96 Retrieve a fax
2 Retrieve all faxes
3 Erase faxes from memory
Enter the fax number of a remote fax machine to receive stored fax messages.
If you hear one long beep, fax messages have been erased from memory.
97 Check the receiving status
1 Fax Check whether your machine has received any faxes. If yes, you will hear one long beep. If not, you will hear three short beeps.
98
90
Change the Receive Mode
1 External TAD
2 Fax/Tel
3 Fax Only
Exit
One long beep means the change has been accepted.
Press 9 0 to stop remote retrieval. Wait for the long beep, then hang up.
Related Information
•
208
> Forward Faxes Remotely
Forward Faxes Remotely
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Call your machine from any touch-tone telephone or fax machine to forward incoming faxes to another machine.
You must turn Fax Storage on to use this feature.
1. Dial your fax number.
2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one long beep, you have messages.
3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 6 2.
4. Wait for the long beep, and then use the dial pad to enter the number of the remote fax machine where you want your fax messages sent, followed by # # (up to 20 digits).
You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause.
5. Hang up after you hear your machine beep. Your machine will call the other fax machine, which will then print your fax messages.
Related Information
•
209
> Change the Fax Forwarding Number
Change the Fax Forwarding Number
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can change your fax forwarding number from another touch-tone telephone or fax machine.
1. Dial your fax number.
2. When your machine answers, enter your Remote Access Code (three digits followed by *). If you hear one long beep, you have messages.
3. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 5 4.
4. Wait for the long beep, enter the new number (up to 20 digits) of the remote fax machine you want your fax messages forwarded to using the dial pad, then enter # #.
You will hear one long beep.
You cannot use * and # as dial numbers. However, press # if you want to create a pause.
5. When you hear two short beeps, press 9 0 to stop Remote Access when you have finished.
6. Hang up after you hear your machine beep.
Related Information
•
210
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
•
•
211
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Voice Operations
Voice Operations
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode
212
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers >
Voice Operations > Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel
Receive Mode
Pick up a Voice Call in Fax/Tel Receive Mode
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When the machine is in Fax/Tel mode, it will use the F/T Ring (fast double-ring) to alert you to pick up a voice call.
If you are at the machine, lift the external telephone’s handset, and then press the button in the following table to answer:
Applicable Models
MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To pick up a voice call
Pickup
If you are at an extension telephone, lift the handset during the F/T Ring, and then press #51 between the fast double-rings. If no one is on the line, or if someone wants to send you a fax, send the call back to the machine by pressing *51.
Related Information
•
213
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Store Fax Numbers
Store Fax Numbers
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers
214
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers >
> Store Address Book Numbers
Store Address Book Numbers
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] .
2. Do the following steps: a. Press [Edit] .
b. Press [Add New Address] .
c. Press [Name] .
d. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters), and then press [OK] .
e. Press [Address] .
f. Enter the fax or telephone number using the LCD (up to 20 digits), and then press [OK] .
To store an email address to use with Internet Fax or Scan to Email server, press and enter the email address and press [OK] .
(On certain models, you must download Internet Fax to use the Internet Fax feature and the Scan to Email server feature.) g. Press [OK] .
To store another Address Book number, repeat these steps.
3. Press .
Related Information
•
•
Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book
215
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers >
Numbers > Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book
Save Outgoing Call Numbers to the Address Book
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can copy numbers from your Outgoing Call history and save them in your Address Book.
1. Press [Fax] > [Call History] > [Outgoing Call] .
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want, and then press it.
3. Press [Edit] > [Add to Address Book] > [Name] .
To delete the number, press [Edit] > [Delete] . Press [Yes] to confirm.
4. Enter the name using the LCD (up to 16 characters).
5. Press [OK] .
6. Press [OK] to confirm the fax or telephone number you want to store.
7. Press .
Related Information
•
216
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers >
> Change or Delete Address
Book Names or Numbers
Change or Delete Address Book Names or Numbers
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] .
2. Do one of the following:
Press [Change] to edit the names or fax or telephone numbers.
Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to change, and then press it.
To change the name, press [Name] . Enter the new name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
To change the fax or telephone number, press [Address] . Enter the new fax or telephone number (up to
20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
Press [OK] to finish.
How to enter text:
To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then press .
Enter the new character.
To delete numbers, press [Delete] .
Select the fax or telephone numbers you want to delete by pressing them to display a check mark, and then press [OK] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
217
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Set up Broadcasting Groups
Set up Broadcasting Groups
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
A broadcasting group can be stored in the Address Book. It allows you to send the same fax message to many fax numbers.
Store fax numbers in the Address Book and add them to a broadcasting group as needed.
Applicable Models
MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW
Maximum number of groups Maximum numbers in a group
20 299
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] .
2. Do the following steps: a. Press [Edit] > [Setup Groups] > [Name] .
b. Enter the Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
c. Press [Add/Delete] .
d. Add Address Book numbers to the Group by pressing them to display a check mark, and then press
[OK] .
e. Read and confirm the displayed list of names and numbers you have chosen, and then press [OK] to save your Group.
To store another Group for broadcasting, repeat these steps.
3. Press .
Related Information
•
Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
•
Change a Broadcasting Group Name
•
•
Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member
218
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers >
Set up Broadcasting Groups > Change a
Broadcasting Group Name
Change a Broadcasting Group Name
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change] .
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Press [Name] .
4. Enter the new Group name (up to 16 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
How to change the stored name:
To change a character, press d or c to position the cursor to highlight the incorrect character, and then press .
Enter the new character.
5. Press [OK] .
6. Press .
Related Information
•
219
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers >
Set up Broadcasting Groups > Delete a Broadcasting
Group
Delete a Broadcasting Group
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Delete] .
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Press [OK] .
4. Press .
Related Information
•
220
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers >
Set up Broadcasting Groups > Add or Delete a
Broadcasting Group Member
Add or Delete a Broadcasting Group Member
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] > [Edit] > [Change] .
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the Group you want, and then press the Group name.
3. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Add/Delete] option, and then press [Add/Delete] .
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number you want to add or delete.
5. Do the following for each number you want to change:
• To add a number to the Group, press the checkbox of the number to add a check mark.
• To delete a number from the Group, press the checkbox of the number to remove the check mark.
6. Press [OK] .
7. Press [OK] .
8. Press .
Related Information
•
221
> Voice Operations and Fax Numbers > Combine Address Book Numbers
Combine Address Book Numbers
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Sometimes you may want to choose from several long-distance carriers when you send a fax. Rates may vary depending on the time and destination. To take advantage of low rates, you can store the access codes of longdistance carriers and credit card numbers as Address Book numbers.
You can store these long dialling sequences by dividing them and setting them up as separate Address Book numbers in any combination. You can even include manual dialling using the dial pad.
For example: You might have stored '01632' and '960555' in your machine as shown in the following table.
Applicable Models
MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW
'01632' stored in
Address Book: Brother 1
'960555' stored in
Address Book: Brother 2
You can use them both to dial '01632-960555' by using the following procedure.
1. Press [Fax] > [Address Book] .
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 1.
3. Press the number.
4. Press [Apply] .
5. Press [Options] .
6. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Address Book] option, and then press it.
7. Press [OK] .
8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the number of Brother 2.
9. Press the number.
10. Press [Apply] .
11. Press [Fax Start] .
The machine will dial '01632-960555'.
To temporarily change a number, you can substitute part of the number by pressing it using the LCD. For example, to change the number to '01632-960556', you could enter the number (Brother 1: 01632) using the
Address Book, press [Apply] , and then enter 960556 using the LCD.
If you must wait for another dial tone or signal at any point in the dialling sequence, create a pause in the number by pressing [Pause] .
Related Information
•
Voice Operations and Fax Numbers
222
> Telephone Services and External Devices
Telephone Services and External Devices
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
•
External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
•
External and Extension Telephones
•
223
> Telephone Services and External Devices > Use BT Call Sign
Use BT Call Sign
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
This feature lets you use the BT Call Sign subscriber service which allows you to have at least two separate telephone numbers on one telephone line. Each telephone number has its own distinctive ringing pattern, so you know which telephone number is ringing. This is one way you can have a separate telephone number for your machine.
Your machine has a BT Call Sign compatible distinctive ringing function, allowing you to dedicate a second telephone number (on the same telephone line) just for receiving faxes.
• This feature is available only in the U.K.
• You can switch BT Call Sign Off temporarily, then turn it back on. When you get a new fax number, make sure you reset this function. This machine will automatically answer incoming calls that use your new fax number.
• When you set the BT Call Sign feature to On, the receive mode is set to [Manual] automatically. The
[Manual] mode will not respond to incoming telephone calls, because the number you use for telephone calls will use the normal ring pattern.
Related Information
•
Telephone Services and External Devices
•
Enable the Machine to Work with BT Call Sign
224
> Telephone Services and External Devices >
Use BT Call Sign > Enable the Machine to Work
with BT Call Sign
Enable the Machine to Work with BT Call Sign
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
• This feature is available only in the U.K.
• This feature will only work with your external phone.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Miscellaneous] > [BT Call Sign] .
2. Press [On] or [Off] .
3. Press .
If you turn BT Call Sign off, the receive mode stays in Manual mode. You will need to set the receive mode again.
Related Information
•
225
> Telephone Services and External Devices > Set the Telephone Line Type
Set the Telephone Line Type
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If you are connecting the machine to a line that features PBX or ISDN to send and receive faxes, you must select a Telephone Line Type that matches your line's features.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Phone Line Set] .
2. Press [Normal] , [PBX] , or [ISDN] .
3. If you selected [PBX] , do the following: a. Press [On] or [Always] .
• If you select [On] , the machine dials a prefix number before the fax number only when [R] is pressed.
• If you select [Always] , the machine always dials a prefix number before the fax number.
b. Press [Dial Prefix] .
c. Enter the prefix number using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
Use the numbers 0 to 9, #, * and !. You cannot use ! with any other numbers or characters.
4. Press .
Related Information
•
Telephone Services and External Devices
•
226
> Telephone Services and External Devices >
> PBX and
TRANSFER
PBX and TRANSFER
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
The machine's [Phone Line Set] default setting is [Normal] , which lets the machine connect to a standard
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) line. However, many offices use a central telephone system or
Private Branch Exchange (PBX). Your machine can be connected to most types of PBX. The machine's recall feature supports timed break recall only (TBR). TBR will work with most PBX systems allowing you to gain access to an outside line, or transfer calls to another extension. To use this feature, press the button in the table.
Applicable Models
MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To use the machine's recall feature
R
Assign a telephone number to the button stored in the Address Book (One Touch Dial and Speed Dial in some models). When programming the Address Book number (One Touch Dial number and Speed Dial number in some models), press the button first (the LCD displays ‘!’), then enter the telephone number. This avoids having to press the button each time before you dial from the Address Book (One Touch Dial or
Speed Dial). Your Telephone Line Type must be set to PBX on the machine to use this feature.
Related Information
•
227
> Telephone Services and External Devices > External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Connect an external Telephone Answering Device (TAD) to the same line as your machine. When the TAD answers a call, your machine will “listen” for the CNG (fax calling) tones sent by a sending fax machine. If it hears them it will take over the call and receive the fax. If it does not hear them, it will let your TAD take a voice message and the LCD will show [Telephone] .
The external TAD must answer within four rings (we recommend setting it to two rings). This is because your machine cannot hear the CNG tones until the external TAD has picked up the call. The sending machine will send CNG tones for only eight to ten seconds longer. We do not recommend using the toll saver feature on your external TAD if it needs more than four rings to activate it.
1
1
(Example for U.K.)
1 TAD
IMPORTANT
DO NOT connect a TAD elsewhere on the same telephone line.
If you have problems receiving faxes, reduce the Ring Delay setting on your external TAD.
Related Information
•
Telephone Services and External Devices
•
•
Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
228
> Telephone Services and External Devices >
External TAD (Telephone Answering
> Connect an External TAD
Connect an External TAD
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Set your external TAD to the minimum number of rings allowed. For more information, contact your telephone provider. (The machine’s Ring Delay setting does not apply.)
2. Record an outgoing message on your external TAD.
3. Set the TAD to answer calls.
4. Set the Receive Mode on your machine to [External TAD] .
Related Information
•
External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
229
> Telephone Services and External Devices >
External TAD (Telephone Answering
> Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
Record an Outgoing Message (OGM) on the External TAD
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your message. This allows your machine time to listen for fax tones.
2. Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
3. End your 20-second message by giving your Remote Activation Code for those who may need to send faxes manually. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and start to send a fax.”
NOTE
We recommend beginning your OGM with an initial five-second silence because the machine cannot hear fax tones over a loud voice. You may try leaving out this pause, but if your machine has trouble receiving faxes, then you should re-record the OGM to include it.
Related Information
•
External TAD (Telephone Answering Device)
230
> Telephone Services and External Devices > External and Extension Telephones
External and Extension Telephones
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
Connect an External or Extension Telephone
•
Operation from External and Extension Telephones
•
•
If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
•
231
> Telephone Services and External Devices >
External and Extension Telephones > Connect
an External or Extension Telephone
Connect an External or Extension Telephone
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can connect a separate telephone to your machine as shown in the diagram below.
1
2
(Example for U.K.)
1 Extension telephone
2 External telephone
Make sure you use an external telephone with a cable no more than three metres long.
Related Information
•
External and Extension Telephones
232
> Telephone Services and External Devices >
External and Extension Telephones > Operation
from External and Extension Telephones
Operation from External and Extension Telephones
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If you answer a fax call at an extension or an external telephone, you can make your machine take the call by using the Remote Activation Code. When you press the Remote Activation Code *51 , the machine starts to receive the fax.
If the machine answers a voice call and pseudo/double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at an extension telephone by pressing the Remote Deactivation Code #51 .
If you answer a call and no one is on the line:
You are receiving a manual fax.
Press *51 and wait for the chirp or until the LCD displays [Receiving] , and then hang up.
You can also use the Fax Detect feature to make your machine automatically take the call.
Related Information
•
External and Extension Telephones
233
> Telephone Services and External Devices >
External and Extension Telephones > Use
Extension Telephones
Use Extension Telephones
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Your premises may already be wired with parallel extension telephones, or you may plan to add extension telephones to your line, as well as your machine. While the simplest arrangement is a straightforward parallel connection, there are some problems with this. The most obvious is inadvertent interruption of a fax transmission caused by someone picking up an extension telephone to make an outgoing call. Also, the remote activation code feature may not operate reliably in such a simple configuration.
This machine may also be set to make a delayed transmission (a transmission at a preset time). This preset job may coincide with someone picking up an extension handset.
These problems can be eliminated, if you arrange modification of your extension wiring circuit, such that extension devices are connected “downstream” of your machine in a master/slave configuration (see Figure 1).
In this configuration the machine can always detect whether a telephone is in use. Thus it will not attempt to use the line during that time. This is known as “telephone off-hook detection.”
The inadvisable configuration is shown in figure 2, and the recommended master/slave configuration is shown in figure 1.
This new connection configuration can be arranged by contacting BT, Kingston upon Hull Telecommunications, your PBX maintainer, or a qualified telephone installation company. The extension telephone circuit should be terminated on a normal modular plug (BT 431A style), which in turn should be put into the modular socket of the white “T”-shaped connector provided as part of the line cord assembly.
Connection of Extension Sockets: Recommended (Figure 1)
1 1 2
3
FAX
1. Extension socket
2. Master socket
3. Incoming line
Connection of Extension Sockets: Not Recommended (Figure 2)
1 1 2
3
FAX
1. Extension socket
2. Master socket
3. Incoming line
The fax machine must be plugged into the master socket.
These telephones are now connected as external devices, because they are connected to the machine via the T-connector.
Related Information
•
External and Extension Telephones
234
> Telephone Services and External Devices >
External and Extension Telephones > If You Use
a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
If You Use a Non-Brother Cordless External Handset
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If your non-Brother cordless telephone is connected to the telephone line cord and you typically carry the cordless handset elsewhere, it is easier to answer calls during the Ring Delay.
If you let the machine answer first, you must go to the machine so you can press [Pickup] or Tel/R to transfer the call to the cordless handset.
Related Information
•
External and Extension Telephones
235
> Telephone Services and External Devices >
External and Extension Telephones > Use the
Remote Codes
Use the Remote Codes
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Remote Activation Code
If you answer a fax call on an extension or external telephone, you can tell your machine to receive it by pressing the Remote Activation Code *51 . Wait for the chirping sounds, and then replace the handset.
If you answer a fax call at the external telephone, you can make the machine receive the fax by pressing the buttons in the following table:
Applicable Models
MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To make the machine receive a fax
Fax Start and then Receive
Remote Deactivation Code
If you receive a voice call and the machine is in F/T mode, it will start to sound the F/T ring (fast double-ring) after the initial ring delay. If you pick up the call on an extension telephone you can turn the F/T ring off by pressing
#51 (make sure you press this between the rings).
If the machine answers a voice call and fast double-rings for you to take over, you can take the call at the external telephone by pressing the button in the following table:
Applicable Models
MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To pick up a voice call
Pickup
Related Information
•
External and Extension Telephones
•
236
> Telephone Services and External Devices >
External and Extension Telephones >
Remote Codes > Change the Remote Codes
Change the Remote Codes
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
The preset Remote Activation Code is *51 . The preset Remote Deactivation Code is #51 . If you are always disconnected when accessing your External TAD remotely, try changing the three-digit remote codes using the numbers 0-9, * or #.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Remote Codes] .
2. Do one of the following:
• To change the Remote Activation Code, press [Act.Code] . Enter the new code, and then press [OK] .
• To change the Remote Deactivation Code, press [Deact.Code] . Enter the new code, and then press
[OK] .
• If you do not want to change the Codes, go to the next step.
• To turn off (or turn on) the Remote Codes, press [Remote Codes] , and then press [Off] (or [On] ).
3. Press .
Related Information
•
237
> Telephone Services and External Devices > Multi-line Connections (PBX)
Multi-line Connections (PBX)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
We suggest you ask the company that installed your PBX to connect your machine. If you have a multi-line system we suggest you ask the installer to connect the unit to the last line on the system. This prevents the machine from being activated each time the system receives telephone calls. If all incoming calls are answered by a switchboard operator, we recommend setting the Receive Mode to [Manual] .
We cannot guarantee that your machine will operate correctly under all circumstances when connected to a PBX.
Any difficulties with sending or receiving faxes should be reported first to the company that handles your PBX.
Related Information
•
Telephone Services and External Devices
238
> Fax Reports
Fax Reports
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
Print a Transmission Verification Report
•
239
> Fax Reports > Print a Transmission Verification Report
Print a Transmission Verification Report
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can use the Transmission Verification Report as proof that you sent a fax. This report lists the receiving party's name or fax number, the time and date of transmission, duration of transmission, number of pages sent, and whether or not the transmission was successful.
There are several settings available for the Transmission Verification Report:
On
On(+Image)
Prints a report after every fax you send.
Prints a report after every fax you send.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Error only Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
Error only(+Image) Prints a report if your fax is unsuccessful due to a transmission error.
A portion of the fax’s first page appears on the report.
Off Your machine does not print any reports after sending faxes.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [XMIT Report] .
2. Press the option you want.
If you select [On(+Image)] or [Error only(+Image)] , the image will not appear on the Transmission
Verification Report if Real Time Transmission is set to [On] .
3. Press .
If the transmission is successful, OK appears next to RESULT on the Transmission Verification Report. If the transmission is not successful, NG appears next to RESULT.
Related Information
•
240
> Fax Reports > Print a Fax Journal
Print a Fax Journal
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can set the machine to print a Fax Journal at specific intervals (every 50 faxes, 6, 12 or 24 hours, 2 or 7 days).
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Report Setting] > [Journal Period] >
[Journal Period] .
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the interval you want, and then press it.
• Every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days
The machine will print the report at the selected time and then erase all reception and transmission log data from its memory. If the machine's memory becomes full with 200 log data before the time you selected has passed, the machine will print the Journal early and then erase all jobs from the memory. If you want an extra report before it is due to print, you can print it without erasing the log data from the memory.
• Every 50 Faxes
The machine will print the Journal when the machine has stored 50 reception and transmission log data.
3. If you selected every 6, 12, 24 hours, 2 or 7 days, press [Time] and enter the time to start printing (in 24hour format) using the LCD, and then press [OK] . (For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
4. If you selected [Every 7 Days] , press [Day] .
5. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Every Monday] , [Every Tuesday] , [Every
Wednesday] , [Every Thursday] , [Every Friday] , [Every Saturday] or [Every Sunday] option, and then press the first day of the 7-day countdown.
6. Press .
Related Information
•
241
> PC-FAX
PC-FAX
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
242
> PC-FAX for Windows
PC-FAX for Windows
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows)
•
Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)
243
> PC-FAX for Windows > PC-FAX Overview (Windows)
PC-FAX Overview (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Reduce paper consumption and save time by using the Brother PC-FAX software to send faxes directly from your computer.
•
•
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
244
PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure PC-FAX
(Windows)
Configure PC-FAX (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Before sending faxes using PC-FAX, personalise the send options in each tab of the PC-FAX Setup dialog box.
1. Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Setup Sending .
The PC-FAX Setup dialog box appears.
3. Do one of the following:
• Click the User Information tab, and then type your user information in the fields.
Each Microsoft account can have its own customised User Information screen for custom fax headers and cover pages.
• Click the Sending tab, and then type the number needed to access an outside line (if needed) in the
Outside line access field. Select the Include header checkbox to include the header information.
• Click the Address Book tab, and then select the address book you want to use for PC-FAX from the
Select Address Book drop-down list.
4. Click OK .
Related Information
•
245
PC-FAX Overview (Windows) > Configure your PC-Fax
Address Book (Windows)
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Add, edit, and delete members and groups to personalise your Address Book .
•
Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
•
Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
•
Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
•
Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
•
Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
•
Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
246
Address Book (Windows) > Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Add a Member to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Add new people and their fax information to the PC-Fax Address Book if you want to send a fax using the
Brother PC-Fax software.
1. Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send) .
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click to add new members.
The Address Book Member Setup dialog box appears.
4. Type the member's information in the corresponding fields. The Name field is required.
5. Click OK .
Related Information
•
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
247
Address Book (Windows) > Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Create a Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Create a group to broadcast the same PC-FAX to several recipients at once.
1. Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send) .
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click to add a new group.
The Address Book Group Setup dialog box appears.
4. Type the name of the new group in the Group Name field.
5. In the Available Names field, select each name you want to include in the group, and then click Add >> .
Members added to the group appear in the Group Members box.
6. When finished, click OK .
Each group can contain up to 50 members.
Related Information
•
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
248
Address Book (Windows) > Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Edit Member or Group Information in your PC-FAX Address Book
(Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send) .
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Select the member or group you want to edit.
4. Click ( Properties ).
5. Change the member or group information.
6. Click OK .
Related Information
•
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
249
Address Book (Windows) > Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Delete a Member or Group in your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send) .
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Select the member or group you want to delete.
4. Click ( Delete ).
5. When the confirmation dialog box appears, click OK .
Related Information
•
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
250
Address Book (Windows) > Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Export your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can export the Address Book as an ASCII text file (*.csv) or a vCard (an electronic business card) and save it on your computer.
You cannot export the group settings when you export the Address Book data.
1. Launch selected).
( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send) .
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click File > Export .
4. Select one of the following:
• Text
The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to the next step.
• vCard
You must select the member you want to export from your address book before selecting this option.
Browse to the folder where you want to save the vCard, type the vCard name in the File name field, and then click Save .
5. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to export, and then click Add >> .
Select and add the items in the order you want them listed.
6. If you are exporting to an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to separate the data fields.
7. Click OK .
8. Browse to the folder on your computer where you want to save the data, type the file name, and then click
Save .
251
Related Information
•
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
252
Address Book (Windows) > Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Import Information to your PC-FAX Address Book (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can import ASCII text files (*.csv) or vCards (electronic business cards) into your Address Book.
1. Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Address Book (Send) .
The Address Book dialog box appears.
3. Click File > Import .
4. Select one of the following:
• Text
The Select Items dialog box appears. Go to step 5.
• vCard
Go to step 8.
5. In the Available Items field, select the data you want to import, and then click Add >> .
You must select and add fields from the Available Items list in the same order they are listed in the import text file.
6. If you are importing an ASCII file, under the Divide Character section, select the Tab or Comma option to separate the data fields.
7. Click OK .
8. Browse to the folder where you want to import the data, type the file name, and then click Open .
Related Information
•
Configure your PC-Fax Address Book (Windows)
253
> PC-FAX for Windows > Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows)
Send a Fax Using PC-FAX (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
PC-FAX supports only monochrome faxes. A monochrome fax will be sent even if the original data is in colour and the receiving fax machine supports colour faxes.
1. Create a file in any application on your computer.
2. Select the print command in your application.
3. Select Brother PC-FAX as your printer, and then complete your print operation.
The Brother PC-FAX dialog box appears.
4. Type a fax number using one of the following methods:
• Click the numbers on the dial pad to type the number, and then click Add Send Address .
If you select the Dial Restriction checkbox, a confirmation dialog box will appear for you to re-type the fax number using the keyboard. This feature helps to prevent transmissions to the wrong destination.
• Click the Address Book button, and then select a member or group from the Address Book.
If you make a mistake, click All Clear to delete all entries.
5. To include a cover page, select the Add Cover Page checkbox. You can also click to create or edit a cover page.
6. Click Start to send the fax.
• To cancel the fax, click Cancel .
• To redial a number, click Redial to show the last five fax numbers, select a number, and then click Start .
Related Information
•
254
> PC-FAX for Windows > Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)
Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use the Brother PC-FAX software to receive faxes on your computer, view them, and print only those faxes you want.
•
Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
255
Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) > Receive
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
The Brother PC-FAX Receive software lets you view and store faxes on your computer. It is automatically installed when you install your machine's software and drivers and works on locally or network-connected machines.
PC-FAX Receive supports only monochrome faxes.
When you turn your computer off, your machine will continue to receive and store faxes in your machine's memory. The machine's LCD will display the number of stored faxes received. When you start this application, the software will transfer all received faxes to your computer at once. You can enable the Backup Print option if you want the machine to print a copy of the fax before the fax is sent to your computer, or before the computer is switched off. You can configure the Backup Print settings from your machine.
Related Information
•
Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows)
•
Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
•
View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows)
256
Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) >
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If the PC-FAX receiving is disabled on your machine, enable the setting before trying to run the PC-FAX receiving.
For information on how to enable this function, , see Related Information : Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using
Web Based Management .
We recommend selecting the Start PC-FAX Receive on computer startup checkbox so that the software runs automatically and transfers any faxes when you turn your computer on.
1. Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected).
2. Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive .
3. Confirm the message and click Yes .
The PC-FAX Receive window appears. The ( PC-FAX Receive ) icon also appears in your computer task tray.
Related Information
•
Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
•
Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Related Topics:
•
Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using Web Based Management
257
Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) >
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) >
Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer
> Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Set Up PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Double-click the ( PC-FAX Receive ) icon in your computer task tray.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
2. Click Settings .
3. Configure these options as needed:
Preferences
Configure to start PC-FAX Receive automatically when you start Windows.
Save
Configure the path to save PC-FAX files and select the received document format.
Upload to
Configure the path to the server and select the option to upload automatically or manually (available only for administrators).
Device
Select the machine where you want to receive PC-FAX files.
Lock (available only for administrators)
Restrict users who do not have administrator privileges from configuring the settings options shown above.
4. Click OK .
Related Information
•
Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
258
Receive Faxes on Your Computer (Windows) >
Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows) > View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows)
View Received PC-FAX Messages (Windows)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Receiving Status
Icon Status
Standby mode
No unread messages
Receiving messages
Messages received
Unread messages
1. Double-click the ( PC-FAX Receive ) icon in your computer task tray.
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
2. Click any faxes in the list to view them.
3. When finished, close the window.
259
Even after closing the window, PC-FAX Receive is active and the ( PC-FAX Receive ) icon will remain in your computer task tray. To close PC-FAX Receive, click the icon in the computer task tray and click
Close .
Related Information
•
Receive Faxes Using PC-FAX Receive (Windows)
260
> PC-FAX for Mac
PC-FAX for Mac
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
261
Network
•
Supported Basic Network Features
•
•
•
262
Home > Network > Supported Basic Network Features
Supported Basic Network Features
The machine supports various features depending on the operating system. Use this table to see which network features and connections are supported by each operating system.
Operating Systems
Printing
Scanning
PC Fax Send (available for certain models)
PC Fax Receive (available for certain models)
Status Monitor
Driver Deployment Wizard
Windows
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Windows Server
Yes
Yes
Yes macOS
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
1 The default password to manage your machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked " Pwd ". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorised access.
• When connecting your machine to an outside network such as the Internet, make sure your network environment is protected by a separate firewall or other means in order to prevent information leaks due to inadequate settings or unauthorised access by malicious third parties.
• When your machine is connected to the global network, a warning appears. When you see this warning, we strongly recommend confirming your network settings, and then re-connecting to a secure network.
• Enabling your machine's global network communication filtering feature blocks access from the global network. The global network communication filtering feature may prevent the machine from receiving certain print or scan jobs from a computer or mobile device that uses a global IP address.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
263
Home > Network > Configure Network Settings
Configure Network Settings
•
Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel
•
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
264
> Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel
Configure Network Details Using the Control Panel
To configure the machine for your network, use the control panel's [Network] menu selections.
• For information about the network settings you can configure using the control panel, see Related
Information : Settings Tables .
• You can also use Web Based Management, to configure and change your machine's network settings.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the network option you want, and then press OK . Repeat this step until you access the menu you want to configure, and then follow the LCD instructions.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] .
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the network option you want, and then press it. Repeat this step until you access the menu you want to configure, and then follow the LCD instructions.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Settings Tables (DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW)
•
Settings Tables (MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
•
Settings Tables (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW)
•
Supported Basic Network Features
265
Home > Network > Wireless Network Settings
Wireless Network Settings
•
•
•
•
266
Wireless Network Settings > Use the Wireless Network
Use the Wireless Network
•
Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network
•
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your
•
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel
•
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi
•
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected
•
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
•
Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
267
Use the Wireless Network > Before Configuring Your
Machine for a Wireless Network
Before Configuring Your Machine for a Wireless Network
Before attempting to configure a wireless network, confirm the following:
• If you are using an enterprise wireless network, you must know the User ID and Password.
• To achieve optimum results with normal everyday document printing, place your machine as close to the wireless LAN access point/router as possible with minimal obstructions. Large objects and walls between the two devices and interference from other electronic devices can affect the data transfer speed of your documents.
Due to these factors, wireless may not be the best method of connection for all types of documents and applications. If you are printing large files, such as multi-page documents with mixed text and large graphics, you may want to consider selecting wired Ethernet for faster data transfer (supported models only), or USB for the fastest throughput speed.
• Although your machine can be used in a wired and wireless network (supported models only), only one connection method can be used at a time. However, a wireless network connection and Wi-Fi Direct connection, or a wired network connection (supported models only) and Wi-Fi Direct connection can be used at the same time.
• If there is a signal in the vicinity, wireless LAN allows you to freely make a LAN connection. However, if security settings are not correctly configured, the signal may be intercepted by malicious third-parties, possibly resulting in:
Theft of personal or confidential information
Improper transmission of information to parties impersonating the specified individuals
Dissemination of transcribed communication contents that were intercepted
Make sure you know your wireless router/access point's Network Name (SSID) and Network Key
(Password). If you cannot find this information, consult the manufacturer of your wireless router/access point, your system administrator, or Internet provider. Brother cannot provide this information.
Related Information
•
268
Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your Computer
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Setup Wizard from Your Computer
1. Download the installer from your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
2. Start the installer, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
3. Select Wireless Network Connection (Wi-Fi) , and then click Next .
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.
You have completed the wireless network setup.
Related Information
•
269
Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's
Control Panel Setup Wizard
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings of the computer to which you are connecting.
Network Name (SSID)
Network Key
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Network Key
12345
• Your access point/router may support the use of multiple WEP keys, but your Brother machine supports the use of only the first WEP key.
• If you need assistance during setup and want to contact Brother customer service, make sure you have your SSID (Network Name) and Network Key (Password) ready. We cannot assist you in locating this information.
• If you do not know this information (SSID and Network Key), you cannot continue the wireless setup.
How can I find this information?
Check the documentation provided with your wireless access point/router.
The initial SSID could be the manufacturer's name or the model name.
If you do not know the security information, consult the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or your Internet provider.
2. Press Menu .
3. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to select the [Find Network] option, and then press OK .
6. When [WLAN Enable?] appears, select On.
This will start the wireless setup wizard.
7. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. When a list of SSIDs appears, press a or b to select the SSID you want.
8. Press OK .
9. Do one of the following:
270
• If you are using an authentication and encryption method that requires a Network Key, enter the Network
Key you wrote down in the first step.
When you have entered all the characters, press OK .
To apply the settings, select [Yes] .
• If your authentication method is Open System and your encryption mode is None, go to the next step.
10. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings of the computer to which you are connecting.
Network Name (SSID)
Network Key (Password)
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Network Key (Password)
12345
• Your access point/router may support the use of multiple WEP keys, but your Brother machine supports the use of only the first WEP key.
• If you need assistance during setup and want to contact Brother customer service, make sure you have your SSID (Network Name) and Network Key (Password) ready. We cannot assist you in locating this information.
• If you do not know this information (SSID and Network Key), you cannot continue with the wireless setup.
How can I find this information?
a. Check the documentation provided with your wireless access point/router.
b. The initial SSID could be the manufacturer's name or the model name.
c. If you do not know the security information, consult the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or your Internet provider.
2. Press
Network] .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
3. When [Switch Network interface to wireless?] appears, press [Yes] .
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No] .
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs.
If a list of SSIDs is displayed, swipe up or down or press a or b to display the SSID to which you want to connect, and then press the SSID.
271
5. Press [OK] .
6. Do one of the following:
• If you are using an authentication and encryption method that requires a Network Key, enter the Network
Key you wrote down in the first step.
When you have entered all the characters, press [OK] .
• If your authentication method is Open System and your encryption mode is None, go to the next step.
7. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] . Press [OK] , and then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
How to Enter Text on Your Machine
•
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
272
Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™ (WPS)
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push
Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™ (WPS)
If your wireless access point/router supports WPS (PBC: Push Button Configuration), you can use WPS from your machine's control panel menu to configure your wireless network settings.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [WPS/PushButton] option, and then press OK .
5. When [WLAN Enable?] appears, select On.
This will start the wireless setup wizard.
6. When the LCD displays [Press Key on rtr] , press the WPS button on your wireless access point/router.
Then follow the LCD instructions on your machine. Your machine will automatically detect your wireless access point/router and try to connect to your wireless network.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [WPS/Push Button] .
2. When [Switch Network interface to wireless?] appears, press [Yes] .
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No] .
3. When the touchscreen displays [Start WPS on your wireless access point/router, then press [OK].] , press the WPS button on your wireless access point/router. Then press [OK] on your machine. Your machine will automatically detect your wireless access point/router and try to connect to your wireless network.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] . Press [OK] , and then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
273
Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™ (WPS)
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™ (WPS)
If your wireless LAN access point/router supports WPS, you can use the Personal Identification Number (PIN)
Method to configure your wireless network settings.
The PIN Method is one of the connection methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance ® . By submitting a PIN created by an Enrollee (your machine) to the Registrar (a device that manages the wireless LAN), you can set up the wireless network and security settings. For more information on how to access WPS mode, see the instructions provided with your wireless access point/router.
Type A
Connection when the wireless LAN access point/router (1) doubles as the Registrar:
1
Type B
Connection when another device (2), such as a computer, is used as the Registrar:
274
2
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [WPS/PIN Code] option, and then press OK .
5. When [WLAN Enable?] appears, select On.
This will start the wireless setup wizard.
6. The LCD displays an eight-digit PIN and the machine starts searching for a wireless LAN access point/router.
7. Using a computer connected to the network, in your browser's address bar, type the IP address of the device you are using as the Registrar (for example: http://192.168.1.2).
8. Go to the WPS settings page and type the PIN, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
• The Registrar is usually the wireless LAN access point/router.
• The settings page may differ depending on the brand of wireless LAN access point/router. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
If you are using a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, complete the following steps:
9. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device .
• Windows 10
Click > Windows System > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device .
275
• To use a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, you must register it to your network in advance. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/ router.
• If you use Windows 10 or Windows 11 as a Registrar, you can install the printer driver after the wireless configuration by following the on-screen instructions. To install the driver and software necessary to use your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
10. Select your machine and click Next .
11. Type the PIN displayed on the machine's LCD, and then click Next .
12. Click Close .
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [WPS/PIN Code] .
2. When [Switch Network interface to wireless?] appears, press [Yes] .
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No] .
3. The LCD displays an eight-digit PIN and the machine starts searching for a wireless LAN access point/router.
4. Using a computer connected to the network, in your browser's address bar, type the IP address of the device you are using as the Registrar (for example: http://192.168.1.2).
5. Go to the WPS settings page and type the PIN, and then follow the on-screen instructions.
• The Registrar is usually the wireless LAN access point/router.
• The settings page may differ depending on the brand of wireless LAN access point/router. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
If you are using a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, complete the following steps:
6. Do one of the following:
• Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device .
• Windows 10
Click > Windows System > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click Add a device .
• To use a Windows 10 or Windows 11 computer as a Registrar, you must register it to your network in advance. For more information, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/ router.
• If you use Windows 10 or Windows 11 as a Registrar, you can install the printer driver after the wireless configuration by following the on-screen instructions. To install the driver and software necessary to use your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
7. Select your machine and click Next .
8. Type the PIN displayed on the machine's LCD, and then click Next .
9. Click Close .
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] . Press [OK] , and then press .
276
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
277
Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for a
Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not
Broadcast
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and write down the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method
Open System
Shared Key
WPA/WPA2-PSK
Encryption Mode
NONE
WEP
WEP
AES
TKIP
AES
Network Key
-
WPA3-SAE
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method
WPA2-PSK
Encryption Mode
AES
Network Key
12345678
If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as the first WEP key. Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.
2. Press Menu .
3. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to select the [Find Network] option, and then press OK .
6. When [WLAN Enable?] appears, select On.
This will start the wireless setup wizard.
7. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Press a or b to select the
[<New SSID>] option, and then press OK .
8. Enter the SSID name, and then press OK .
9. Press a or b to select the Authentication Method you want, and then press OK .
10. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [Open System] option, press a or b to select the Encryption Type [None] or [WEP] , and then press OK .
278
If you selected the [WEP] option for Encryption Type, enter the WEP key, and then press OK .
• If you selected the [Shared Key] option, enter the WEP key, and then press OK .
• If you selected the [WPA-Personal] option, press a or b to select the Encryption Type [TKIP+AES] or
[AES] , and then press OK .
Enter the WPA ™ key, and then press OK .
• If you selected the [WPA3-SAE] option, select the Encryption Type [AES] , and then press OK .
Enter the WPA ™ key, and then press OK .
Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.
11. To apply the settings, select [Yes] . To cancel, select [No] .
12. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers and software necessary to use your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and write down the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method
Open System
Shared Key
WPA/WPA2-PSK
Encryption Mode
NONE
WEP
WEP
AES
TKIP
AES
Network Key
-
WPA3-SAE
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method
WPA2-PSK
Encryption Mode
AES
Network Key
12345678
If your router uses WEP encryption, enter the key used as the first WEP key. Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.
2. Press
Network] .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
3. When [Switch Network interface to wireless?] appears, press [Yes] .
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No] .
279
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display [<New SSID>] . Press [<New SSID>] , and then press [OK] .
5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK] .
6. Select the Authentication Method.
7. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [Open System] option, press the Encryption type [None] or [WEP] .
If you selected the [WEP] option for Encryption type, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK] .
• If you selected the [Shared Key] option, select and enter the WEP key, and then press [OK] .
• If you selected the [WPA/WPA2-PSK/WPA3-SAE] option, press the Encryption type [TKIP+AES] or
[AES] .
Enter the WPA ™ key, and then press [OK] .
• If you selected the [WPA3-SAE] option, press the Encryption type [AES] .
Enter the WPA ™ key, and then press [OK] .
Your Brother machine supports the use of the first WEP key only.
8. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] . Press [OK] , and then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
•
How to Enter Text on Your Machine
•
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
280
Use the Wireless Network > Configure Your Machine for an
Enterprise Wireless Network
Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method
EAP-FAST/NONE
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2
EAP-FAST/GTC
PEAP/MS-CHAPv2
PEAP/GTC
EAP-TTLS/CHAP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2
EAP-TTLS/PAP
EAP-TLS
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
Encryption Mode
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
User ID Password
-
-
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2
Encryption Mode
AES
User ID
Brother
Password
12345678
281
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate name you want to use.
• If you verify your machine using the common name of the server certificate, we recommend writing down the common name before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the common name of the server certificate.
2. Press Menu .
3. Press a or b to select the following: a. Select [Network] . Press OK .
b. Select [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] . Press OK .
c. Select [Find Network] . Press OK .
4. When [WLAN Enable?] appears, select On.
This will start the wireless setup wizard.
5. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Press a or b to select the
[<New SSID>] option, and then press OK .
6. Enter the SSID name, and then press OK .
7. Press a or b to select the Authentication Method you want, and then press OK .
8. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [EAP-FAST] , [PEAP] or [EAP-TTLS] option, press a or b to select the Inner
Authentication Method [NONE] , [CHAP] , [MS-CHAP] , [MS-CHAPv2] , [GTC] or [PAP] , and then press
OK .
Depending on your Authentication Method, the Inner Authentication Method selections differ.
Press a or b to select the Encryption Type [TKIP+AES] or [AES] , and then press OK .
Press a or b to select the Verification Method [No Verification] , [CA] or [CA+Server ID] , and then press OK .
If you selected the [CA+Server ID] option, enter the server ID, user ID and password (if required), and then press OK for each option.
For other selections, enter the user ID and the Password (if required), and then press OK for each option.
If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine will display the message [No
Verification] .
• If you selected the [EAP-TLS] option, press a or b to select the Encryption Type [TKIP+AES] or [AES] , and then press OK .
When the machine displays a list of available Client Certificates, select the certificate you want.
Press a or b to select the Verification Method [No Verification] , [CA] or [CA+Server ID] , and then press OK .
If you selected the [CA+Server ID] option, enter the server ID and user ID, and then press OK for each option.
For other selections, enter the user ID, and then press OK .
9. To apply the settings, select [Yes] . To cancel, select [No] .
10. The machine will attempt to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
282
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Before configuring your machine, we recommend writing down your wireless network settings. You will need this information before you continue with the configuration.
1. Check and record the current wireless network settings.
Network Name (SSID)
Authentication Method
EAP-FAST/NONE
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2
EAP-FAST/GTC
PEAP/MS-CHAPv2
PEAP/GTC
EAP-TTLS/CHAP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP
EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2
EAP-TTLS/PAP
EAP-TLS
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
Encryption Mode
AES
TKIP
AES
TKIP
User ID Password
-
-
For example:
Network Name (SSID)
HELLO
Authentication Method
EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2
Encryption Mode
AES
User ID
Brother
Password
12345678
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate name you want to use.
• If you verify your machine using the common name of the server certificate, we recommend writing down the common name before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the common name of the server certificate.
283
2. Press
Network] .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] > [Find Wi-Fi
3. When [Switch Network interface to wireless?] appears, press [Yes] .
This will start the wireless setup wizard. To cancel, press [No] .
4. The machine will search for your network and display a list of available SSIDs. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display [<New SSID>] . Press [<New SSID>] , and then press [OK] .
5. Enter the SSID name, and then press [OK] .
6. Select the Authentication Method.
7. Do one of the following:
• If you selected the [EAP-FAST] , [PEAP] or [EAP-TTLS] option, select the Inner Authentication method
[NONE] , [CHAP] , [MS-CHAP] , [MS-CHAPv2] , [GTC] or [PAP] .
Depending on your Authentication method, the Inner Authentication method selections may differ.
Select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES] .
Select the verification method [No Verification] , [CA] or [CA + Server ID] .
If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID, user ID, and password (if required), and then press [OK] for each option.
For other selections, enter the user ID and Password (if required), and then press [OK] for each option.
If you have not imported a CA certificate into your machine, the machine displays [No Verification] .
• If you selected the [EAP-TLS] option, select the encryption type [TKIP+AES] or [AES] .
The machine will display a list of available Client Certificates, and then select the certificate.
Select the verification method [No Verification] , [CA] or [CA + Server ID] .
If you selected the [CA + Server ID] option, enter the server ID and user ID, and then press [OK] for each option.
For other selections, enter the user ID, and then press [OK] .
8. The machine attempts to connect to the wireless device you have selected.
If your wireless device is connected successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] . Press [OK] , and then press .
You have completed the wireless network setup. To install the drivers or the application necessary for operating your machine, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
284
Wireless Network Settings > Use Wi-Fi Direct
®
Use Wi-Fi Direct ®
•
•
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
•
Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
285
> Wi-Fi Direct Overview
Wi-Fi Direct Overview
Wi-Fi Direct is one of the wireless configuration methods developed by the Wi-Fi Alliance ® . It allows you to securely connect your mobile device to your machine without using a wireless router/access point.
1
2
1. Mobile device
2. Your machine
• You can use Wi-Fi Direct with the wired or wireless network connection at the same time.
• The Wi-Fi Direct-supported device can become a Group Owner. When configuring the Wi-Fi Direct network, the Group Owner serves as an access point.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
•
Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
286
> Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network
Manually
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct or WPS, you must configure a Wi-Fi Direct network manually.
When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Connect?] appears on the LCD. Select OK to connect.
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [Wi-Fi Direct] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [Manual] option, and then press OK .
5. When [Wi-Fi Direct On?] appears, select On.
6. The machine will display the SSID name and Password. Go to your mobile device's wireless network settings screen, select the SSID name, and then enter the password.
7. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] . You have completed the Wi-Fi Direct network setup.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings from the machine's control panel:
When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi Direct connection request received.Press [OK] to connect.] appears on the LCD. Press [OK] to connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Manual] .
2. The machine will display the SSID (Network Name) and Password (Network Key). Go to your mobile device's wireless network settings screen, select the SSID, and then enter the password.
3. When your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
•
Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
287
> Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
Configure Wi-Fi Direct Network Using the Push Button Method
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
If your mobile device supports Wi-Fi Direct, follow these steps to configure a Wi-Fi Direct network:
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [Wi-Fi Direct] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [Push Button] option, and then press OK .
5. When [Wi-Fi Direct On?] appears, select On.
6. Activate Wi-Fi Direct on your mobile device (see your mobile device's user's guide for instructions) when
[Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device and press OK.] appears on the machine's LCD.
Press OK on your machine.
This will start the Wi-Fi Direct setup.
7. Do one of the following:
• If your mobile device displays a list of machines with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your Brother machine.
• If your Brother machine displays a list of mobile devices with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your mobile device. Press a or b to select the mobile device you want to connect to and press OK . To search for available devices again, select [<Rescan>] , and then press OK .
8. If your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] . You have completed the Wi-Fi Direct network setup.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When the machine receives a Wi-Fi Direct request from your mobile device, the message [Wi-Fi Direct connection request received.Press [OK] to connect.] appears on the LCD. Press [OK] to connect.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Push Button] on your machine's LCD.
If your mobile device does not support Wi-Fi Direct, do the following: a. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Wi-Fi Direct] > [Group
Owner] , and then press [On] .
b. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [Push Button] .
2. When the [Activate Wi-Fi Direct on other device. Then Press [OK].] message appears, turn your mobile device‘s Wi-Fi Direct function on (for more information, see your mobile device’s user‘s guide). Press [OK] on your machine.
3. Do one of the following:
• If your mobile device displays a list of machines with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your Brother machine.
• If your Brother machine displays a list of mobile devices with Wi-Fi Direct enabled, select your mobile device. To search for available devices again press [Rescan] .
4. When your mobile device connects successfully, the machine's LCD displays [Connected] .
288
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
•
Configure Your Wi-Fi Direct Network Manually
289
Wireless Network Settings > Enable/Disable Wireless LAN
Enable/Disable Wireless LAN
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [WLAN Enable] option, and then press OK .
5. Do one of the following:
• To enable Wi-Fi, select [On] .
• To disable Wi-Fi, select [Off] .
6. Press OK .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [WLAN(Wi-Fi)] .
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to select the [WLAN Enable] option. Press [WLAN Enable] .
3. Do one of the following:
• To enable Wi-Fi, select [On] .
• To disable Wi-Fi, select [Off] .
4. Press .
Related Information
•
290
Wireless Network Settings > Print the WLAN Report
Print the WLAN Report
The WLAN Report shows your machine's wireless status. If the wireless connection fails, check the error code on the printed report.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [Print Reports] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [WLAN Report] option, and then press OK .
4. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
The machine will print the WLAN Report.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [WLAN Report] .
2. Press [Yes] .
The machine will print the WLAN Report.
3. Press .
If the WLAN Report does not print, check your machine for errors. If there are no visible errors, wait for one minute and then try to print the report again.
Related Information
•
•
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
Related Topics:
•
My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
•
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
291
Print the WLAN Report > Wireless LAN Report Error
Codes
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
If the Wireless LAN Report shows that the connection failed, check the error code on the printed report and see the corresponding instructions in the table:
Error Code
TS-01
TS-02
TS-03
TS-04
Problem and Recommended Solutions
The WLAN (Wi-Fi) is not enabled.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Enable the WLAN setting on your machine.
• If a network cable is connected to your machine, disconnect it.
The wireless router/access point cannot be detected.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Make sure the wireless router/access point is on.
• Temporarily place your machine closer to the wireless router/access point when you are configuring the wireless settings.
• If your wireless router/access point is using MAC address filtering, confirm that the MAC address of the machine is allowed in the filter. You can find the MAC address by printing the
Network Configuration Report.
• If you manually entered the Network Name (SSID) and security information (authentication method/encryption method), the information may be incorrect. Check the Network Name and security information again and re-enter the correct information.
• Restart your wireless router/access point. If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
The wireless enterprise network and security settings you entered may be incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
Verify the following information:
Network Name (SSID) you selected to configure your machine.
Security information you selected to configure your machine (such as the authentication method, encryption method, or User ID).
If you still cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
Your machine does not support the authentication and encryption methods used by the selected wireless router/access point.
For infrastructure mode (Most common)
Change the authentication and encryption methods of the wireless router/access point. Your machine supports the following authentication and encryption methods:
• WPA-Personal:
TKIP / AES
• WPA2-Personal:
TKIP / AES
• WPA3-Personal:
AES
• OPEN:
WEP / NONE (without encryption)
• Shared key:
WEP
If your issue is not solved, the Network Name (SSID) or security settings you entered may be incorrect. Check that all wireless network settings are correct for your network.
292
Error Code
TS-05
TS-06
TS-07
TS-08
Problem and Recommended Solutions
The Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password) are incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Confirm the Network Name (SSID) and Network Key (Password).
• If your Network Key contains upper-case and lower-case letters, make sure you type them correctly.
• If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
• If your wireless router/access point uses WEP encryption with multiple WEP keys, write down and use only the first WEP key.
The wireless security information (authentication method/encryption method/Network Key
(Password)) is incorrect.
Check the following points and try to set up your wireless connection again:
• Confirm the Network Key. If your Network Key contains upper-case and lower-case letters, make sure you type them correctly.
• Confirm whether the authentication method entered and the authentication method or encryption method supported by the wireless router/access point are the same.
• If the network key, authentication method, and encryption method have been confirmed, restart your wireless router/access point and the machine.
• If your wireless router/access point's Stealth Mode is on, you may need to disable it to connect to the wireless network.
If you cannot find the Network Name (SSID) and security information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
The machine cannot detect a wireless router/access point that has WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup) enabled.
Check the following points and try again:
• To check if your wireless router/access point supports WPS, look for the WPS symbol displayed on the router/access point. For more information, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point.
• To set up your wireless connection using WPS, you must configure both your machine and the wireless router/access point. For more information, see the user's guide.
• If you do not know how to set up your wireless router/access point using WPS, see the documentation provided with your wireless router/access point, or contact the router manufacturer, your system administrator, or Internet service provider.
Two or more wireless routers or access points that have WPS enabled are detected.
Check the following points and try again:
• Make sure that only one wireless router/access point within range has WPS enabled, and then try to connect again.
• Try to connect again after a few minutes to avoid interference from other access points/ routers.
293
How to confirm wireless security information (SSID/authentication method/encryption method/Network Key) of your WLAN access point/router:
1. The default security settings may be provided on a label attached to the WLAN access point/router. Or the manufacturer's name or model number of the WLAN access point/router may be used as the default security settings.
2. See the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router for information on how to find the security settings.
• If the WLAN access point/router is set to not broadcast the SSID, the SSID will not automatically be detected. You will have to manually enter the SSID name.
• The Network Key may also be described as the Password, Security Key, or Encryption Key.
If you do not know the SSID and wireless security settings of your WLAN access point/router or how to change the configuration, see the documentation provided with your WLAN access point/router, ask the manufacturer of your access point/router or ask your Internet provider or network administrator.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
•
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
•
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the One Push Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™
•
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the PIN Method of Wi-Fi Protected Setup ™ (WPS)
•
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network Using the Machine's Control Panel Setup Wizard
•
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
•
Configure Your Machine for an Enterprise Wireless Network
294
Home > Network > Network Features
Network Features
•
Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
•
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
•
Print the Network Configuration Report
•
Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using Web Based Management
•
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
•
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
•
Configure and Operate LDAP Search
•
Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
•
Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
•
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
•
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
295
> Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
Enable/Disable Web Based Management Using the Control Panel
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [Web Based Mgmt] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the option you want, and then press OK .
If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Based Mgmt] .
2. Press to select the option you want.
If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
296
> Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based
Management
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured using Web
Based Management:
• Proxy server address
• Port number
• User Name
• Password
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Windows
Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Mac
Google Chrome ™ for Android ™
Safari and Google Chrome ™ for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the Proxy checkbox is selected, and then click Submit .
6. In the Proxy field, click Advanced Settings .
7. Enter the proxy server information.
8. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
•
297
> Print the Network Configuration Report
Print the Network Configuration Report
The Network Configuration Report lists the network configuration, including the network print server settings.
• The Node Name appears on the Network Configuration Report. The default Node Name is
"BRN123456abcdef" for a wired network or "BRW123456abcdef" for a wireless network (where
"123456abcdef" is your machine's MAC Address / Ethernet Address.)
• If the IP Address on the Network Configuration Report shows 0.0.0.0, wait for one minute and try printing it again.
• You can find your machine's settings, such as the IP address, subnet mask, node name, and MAC
Address on the report, for example:
IP address: 192.168.0.5
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
Node name: BRN000ca0000499
MAC Address: 00-0c-a0-00-04-99
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [Print Reports] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [Network Config] option, and then press OK .
4. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Network Configuration] .
2. Press [Yes] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Check Your Machine's Network Settings
•
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
•
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
•
•
•
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
•
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
298
> Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using Web Based Management
Configure PC-FAX Receiving Using Web Based Management
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use Web Based Management to configure your PC Fax Receiving in a web browser.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the PC Fax Receive checkbox, and then click Submit .
6. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
299
> Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
With Internet Fax (I-Fax), you can send and receive fax documents using the Internet. Documents are transmitted in email messages as attached TIFF-F files. Your computer can send and receive documents as long as it has an application that can create and view TIFF-F files. You can use any TIFF-F viewer application.
Documents sent via the machine will be converted into a TIFF ‑ F format automatically. To send and receive messages to and from your machine, your computer's email application must support Multipurpose Internet Mail
Extensions (MIME).
1
4
2
4
4
3
3
1. Sender
2. Internet
3. Receiver
4. Email server
I-Fax supports sending and receiving documents in Letter or A4 format and in monochrome only.
Related Information
•
•
Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•
Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•
•
•
Related Topics:
•
Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
300
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Important Information about
Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Important Information about Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
I-Fax communication on a LAN is very similar to communication via email; however, it is different from fax communication using standard phone lines. Make sure you read the following information about using I-Fax:
• Factors such as the receiver's location, structure of the LAN and how busy the circuit (such as the Internet) is may cause the system to take longer than usual to send an error mail.
• When sending confidential documents, we recommend using standard phone lines instead of the Internet
(due to its low level of security).
• If the receiver's mail system is not MIME-compatible, you cannot use I-Fax to send documents. If possible, check this in advance, and note that some servers will not send an error reply.
• If a document is too large to send via I-Fax, it may not reach the receiver.
• You cannot change the font or size of the text in any Internet mail you receive.
Related Information
•
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
301
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Before using I-Fax, configure your Brother machine to communicate with your network and mail server. You can configure these items using the machine's control panel or Web Based Management. Make sure the following items are configured on your machine:
• IP address (If you are already using your machine on your network, the machine's IP address has been configured correctly.)
• Email address
• SMTP, POP3, IMAP4 server address/port/Authentication method/Encryption method/Server Certificate
Verification
• Mailbox name and password
If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator.
Related Information
•
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
•
Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•
How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
Related Topics:
•
302
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Before sending your I-Fax, use the control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following optional items:
• E-mail Subject
• E-mail Message
• Size Limit
• Request Delivery Notification (Send)
If you are unsure of any of these items, contact your system administrator.
Related Information
•
Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•
How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
303
Related Topics:
•
Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
304
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) >
Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
> How Your Brother Machine
Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When your Brother machine receives an incoming I-Fax, it will print the I-Fax automatically. To receive an I-
Fax, we recommend using the control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following optional items:
• Auto Polling
• Polling Frequency
• Print Mail Header
• Delete/Read Receive Error Mail
• Send Delivery Notification (Receive)
There are two ways you can receive email messages:
• POP3/IMAP4 receiving at regular intervals
305
• POP3/IMAP4 receiving, manually initiated
When using POP3/IMAP4 receiving, the machine polls your email server to receive data. Polling can occur at set intervals (for example, you can configure the machine to poll the email server every ten minutes) or you can manually poll the server.
• If your machine starts to receive email data, the LCD displays [Receiving] .The email will be printed automatically.
• If your machine is out of paper when receiving data, the received data will be held in the machine's memory. This data will be printed automatically after paper is reloaded in the paper tray.
• When the machine's Temporary Fax Backup Function is turned on, received data will be stored for a certain period of time.
• If the received mail is not in a plain text format, or an attached file is not in the TIFF-F format, the error message " ATTACHED FILE FORMAT NOT SUPPORTED.
" will be printed.
• If the received mail is too large, the error message " E-MAIL FILE TOO LARGE.
" will be printed.
• If Delete/Read Receive Error Mail is On (default), then the error mail will be deleted from the email server automatically.
Related Information
•
Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Topics:
•
How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
•
Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
306
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
Configure the Brother Machine for
Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax) > How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
How Received I-Faxes Appear on a Computer
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When a computer receives an I-Fax document, the document is attached to an email message that notifies you in its Subject field that your email server has received an I-Fax. You can either wait for your Brother machine to poll the email server, or you can manually poll the email server to receive the incoming data.
Related Information
•
Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Topics:
•
How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
307
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Send an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Sending an I-Fax is like sending a normal fax. Make sure that your recipient's information is saved in your email address book, and load the document you want to I-Fax into your Brother machine.
• If the computer to which you want to send a document is not running Windows Server 2012/2012
R2/2016/2019/2022, Windows 10 or Windows 11, ask the computer's owner to install software that can view TIFF files.
• To send multiple pages, use the ADF.
1. Load your document.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off] , press [Fax] .
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [On] , press [Fax] , and then press [Sending Faxes] .
3. To change the fax-sending settings, press [Options] .
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll through the fax settings. When the setting you want appears, press it and select your preference. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK] . (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
5. Do one of the following:
• Press , enter the email address using the touchscreen, and then press [OK] .
• Press [Address Book] , select the email address of your recipient, and then press [Apply] .
6. Press [Fax Start] .
The machine starts scanning. After the document is scanned, it is transmitted to the recipient via your SMTP server. You can cancel the send operation by pressing during scanning.
7. Press .
Related Information
•
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
308
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > Poll the Server Manually
Poll the Server Manually
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Manual Receive] .
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes] to confirm.
3. The LCD displays [Receiving] and your machine will print the data from the email server.
Related Information
•
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
309
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) > I-Fax Options
I-Fax Options
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
•
•
Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
•
Configure the Brother Machine for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
310
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
I-Fax Options > Forward Received
Email and Fax Messages
Forward Received Email and Fax Messages
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use Brother's I-Fax feature to forward email or standard fax messages to another computer, to a fax machine, or to another I-Fax machine. Enable the Forwarding feature using your machine's control panel.
To enable email forwarding using your machine's control panel:
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Setup Receive] > [Memory Receive] >
[Fax Forward] .
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Do one of the following:
• Press [Manual] to enter the recipient's fax number (up to 20 digits) or email address using the LCD.
Press [OK] .
• Press [Address Book] .
Swipe up or down or press a or b to scroll until you find the fax number or email address where you want your faxes to be forwarded.
Press the fax number or email address you want.
3. If you select the email address, select the file type you want.
Press [Backup Print: On] to print received faxes at your machine so you will have a copy.
4. Press .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax)
•
Initial Setup for Email or Internet Fax (I-Fax)
•
How Your Brother Machine Receives an Internet Fax (I-Fax)
311
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
I-Fax Options > Relay Broadcast
Relay Broadcast
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
A Relay Broadcast is when your Brother machine receives a message over the Internet and then relays it to another fax machine using conventional telephone lines. If you must fax a document over a long distance or abroad, use the Relay Broadcast Function to save the communication fee.
3
1
3 2
1. The Internet
2. Telephone line
3. Email server
Use the Brother machine's control panel or Web Based Management to configure the following items:
• Relay Broadcast Function
Set the Relay Broadcast Function to On .
• Relay Domain
Configure your machine's domain name on the machine that will broadcast the document to the conventional fax machine. If you wish to use your machine as a relay broadcast device, you must specify the trusted domain name (the portion of the name after the "@" sign) at the machine. Use care in selecting a trusted domain: any user on a trusted domain will be able to send a relay broadcast. You can register up to ten domain names.
• Relay Broadcast Report
Specify whether or not you want a report to print after the machine completes the relay broadcast.
312
Related Information
•
•
Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine
•
Relay Broadcast from Your Computer
313
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine
Relay Broadcast from Your Brother Machine
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send an email from your machine to a conventional fax machine.
Confirm the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are selected in Web Based
Management. If the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are not selected, select the
POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes. Click Submit , and then restart your machine.
123456789
1
[email protected](fax#123456789)
1. The Internet
In this example, your machine's email address is [email protected] and you want to send a document from your machine to a standard fax machine in England with the email address [email protected], and you want your machine to send the document using a conventional telephone line.
1. Load your document.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off] , press [Fax] .
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [On] , press [Fax] , and then press [Sending Faxes] .
3. Press [Options] .
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the [Broadcasting] option.
5. Press [Broadcasting] .
6. Press [Add Number] .
7. You can add email addresses to the broadcast in the following ways:
• Press [Add Number] and press , enter the email address and press [OK] .
• Press [Add from Address book] . Press the checkbox of the email address you want to add to the broadcast. After you have selected all the email addresses you want, press [OK] .
• Press [Search in Address book] . Enter the name or the first letter of the name and press [OK] .
The search results will be displayed. Press the name and then press the email address you want to add to the broadcast.
The following is an example of how to enter the email address and phone number:
314
[email protected](fax#123456789)
Fax Phone Number email address
The word "fax#" must be included with the phone number inside the parenthesis.
After you have entered all of the fax numbers, press [OK] .
8. Press [Fax Start] .
Related Information
•
315
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
Broadcast > Relay Broadcast from Your Computer
Relay Broadcast from Your Computer
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use the Relay Broadcast Function to send an email from your computer to a conventional fax machine.
• Some email applications do not support sending an email to multiple fax numbers. If your email application cannot support multiple fax numbers, you can relay to only one fax machine at a time.
123456789
1
[email protected](fax#123456789)
1. The Internet
• Confirm the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are selected in Web Based
Management. If the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes are not selected, select the
POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client and SMTP Server checkboxes. Click Submit , and then restart your machine.
If you are sending an email to a conventional fax machine, the method of entering the fax machine's fax number will vary, depending on the mail application you are using.
1. In your email application, create a new email message and type the email address of the relay machine and fax number of the first fax machine in the "TO" box.
The following is an example of how to enter the email address and fax number:
[email protected](fax#123456789)
Fax Phone Number email address
The word "fax#" must be included with the phone number inside the parenthesis.
For Microsoft Outlook, the address information must be entered into the address book as follows:
Name: fax#123456789
Email address: [email protected]
2. Type the email address of the relay machine and fax number of the second fax machine in the "TO" box.
3. Send the email.
Related Information
•
316
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
I-Fax Options > Internet Fax (I-
Fax) Verification Mail
Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
• Verification Mail for sending allows you to request notification from the receiving station where your I-Fax or email was received and processed.
• Verification Mail for receiving allows you to transmit a default report back to the sending station after successfully receiving and processing an I-Fax or email.
To use this feature, set the [Notification] options in the [Setup Mail RX] and [Setup Mail TX] options of your machine's control panel menu.
Related Information
•
•
Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
•
Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
•
317
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
Fax) Verification Mail > Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
Enable Send Notifications for TX Verification Mail
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail TX] >
[Notification] .
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Select [On] or [Off] to enable or disable the Send Notification feature.
When Send Notification is On, the fax includes an additional field, named Message Disposition Notification
(MDN), that contains message delivery information. By default, Send Notification is set to Off.
Your fax recipient's machine must support the MDN field in order to send a notification report.
3. Press .
Related Information
•
Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
318
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
Fax) Verification Mail > Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
Enable Receive Notification for TX Verification Mail
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [E-mail/IFAX] > [Setup Mail RX] >
[Notification] .
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press one of the three possible settings:
Option
Receive
Notification On
Receive
Notification MDN
Receive
Notification Off
Description
When Receive Notification is set to On , a template is sent back to the sender to indicate successful receipt and processing of the message.
These templates depend on the operation requested by the sender.
Example:
SUCCESS : Received From <Mail Address>
When Receive Notification is set to MDN , a report to indicate successful receipt and processing is sent back to the sender if the originating station sent a request confirmation to the MDN (Message Disposition Notification) field.
When Receive Notification is set to Off , all forms of receipt notification are disabled and no message is sent back to the sender regardless of the request.
• To send TX Verification Mail, the Sender must configure these settings:
Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail TX] to [On] .
Switch [Header] in [Setup Mail RX] to [All] or [Subject+From+To] .
• To receive TX Verification Mail, the Receiver must configure these settings:
Switch [Notification] in [Setup Mail RX] to [On] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
319
>
Fax Using the Internet (I-Fax) >
Fax) Verification Mail > I-Fax Error Mail
I-Fax Error Mail
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If there is a delivery error while sending an I-Fax, the mail server will send an error message back to the Brother machine and the error message will be printed.
If there is an error while receiving an I-Fax, an error message will be printed, for example, "The message being sent to the machine was not in a TIFF format."
To receive the error mail and have these printed on your machine, in [Setup Mail RX] , switch the [Header] option to [All] or to [Subject+From+To] .
Related Information
•
Internet Fax (I-Fax) Verification Mail
320
> Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
The Fax to Server feature allows the machine to scan a document and send it over the network to a separate fax server. The document will then be sent from the server as fax data to the destination fax number over standard phone lines. When the Fax to Server feature is set to On, all automatic fax transmissions from the machine will be sent to the fax server for fax transmission.
You can send a fax directly from the machine using the manual fax feature when the Send to Server feature is on.
Related Information
•
•
Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server
•
•
321
>
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Before Sending a Fax to the
Fax Server
Before Sending a Fax to the Fax Server
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To send a document to the fax server, the correct syntax for that server must be used. The destination fax number must be sent with a prefix and a suffix that match the parameters used by the fax server. In most cases, the syntax for the prefix is “fax=” and the syntax for the suffix would be the domain name of the fax server email gateway. The suffix must also include the “@” symbol at the beginning of the suffix. The prefix and the suffix information must be stored in the machine before you can use the Fax to Server function. Destination fax numbers can be saved in the address book or entered using the dial pad (up to 40-digit numbers). For example: if you wanted to send a document to a destination fax number of 123-555-0001, use the following syntax:
Your fax server application must support an email gateway.
Related Information
•
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
322
>
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Enable Fax to Server
Enable Fax to Server
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Store the prefix/suffix address for the fax server in your Brother machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Fax to Server] .
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Fax to Server] .
3. Press [On] .
4. Press [Prefix] .
5. Enter the prefix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK] .
6. Press [Suffix] .
7. Enter the suffix using the touchscreen, and then press [OK] .
8. Press .
Related Information
•
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
323
>
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature > Operate Fax to Server
Operate Fax to Server
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Place the document in the ADF or on the scanner glass.
2. Do one of the following:
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [Off] , press [Fax] .
• If the Fax Preview option is set to [On] , press [Fax] , and then press [Sending Faxes] .
3. Enter the fax number.
4. Press [Fax Start] .
The machine will send the message over a TCP/IP network to the fax server.
Related Information
•
Use the Send Fax to Server Feature
324
> Configure and Operate LDAP Search
Configure and Operate LDAP Search
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
The LDAP feature allows you to search for information, such as fax numbers and email addresses, on your server. When you use the Fax, I-Fax, or Scan to Email server feature, you can use the LDAP search to find fax numbers or email addresses.
• The LDAP feature does not support simplified Chinese, traditional Chinese, or Korean.
• The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3.
Related Information
•
•
Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
•
Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
325
>
Configure and Operate LDAP Search
> Change LDAP
Configuration Using Web Based Management
Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use Web Based Management to configure your LDAP settings in a web browser.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the LDAP checkbox, and then click Submit .
6. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
7. On your computer, in Web Based Management, go to the navigation menu, and then click Address Book >
LDAP .
• LDAP Search
• LDAP Server Address
• SSL/TLS
• Port (The default port number is 389.)
• Authentication
• Username
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
• Password
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
If the LDAP server supports Kerberos authentication, we recommend selecting Kerberos for the
Authentication settings. It provides strong authentication between the LDAP server and your machine.
You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication.
• Kerberos Server Address
This selection will be available depending on the authentication method used.
• Search Root
• Timeout for LDAP
• Attribute of Name (Search Key)
• Attribute of E-mail
• Attribute of Fax Number
8. When finished, click Submit . Make sure the Status field reads OK .
Related Information
•
Configure and Operate LDAP Search
326
Related Topics:
•
•
Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
327
>
Configure and Operate LDAP Search
> Perform an LDAP Search
Using Your Machine's Control Panel
Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When you have configured LDAP settings, you can use the LDAP search feature to find fax numbers or email addresses to use for:
• Sending a Fax (not available for DCP models)
• Sending an Internet Fax (I-Fax) (not available for DCP models)
• Scanning to Email Server
• The LDAP feature supports LDAPv3.
• You may need to use Kerberos Authentication or Simple Authentication to connect to your LDAP server, depending on the security policy set by your network administrator.
• You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel for Kerberos authentication.
1. Press to search.
2. Enter the initial characters for your search using the LCD.
3. Press [OK] .
The LDAP search result will be shown on the LCD; the the email (local) address book search results.
icon appears before the fax number (local) or
If there is no match on the server or in the local address book, the LCD displays [Results cannot be found.] for about 60 seconds.
4. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the name you want.
5. Press the name.
To view the details of the name, press [Detail] .
6. If the result includes more than one fax number or email address, the machine will prompt you to select just one. Press [Apply] . Do one of the following:
• If you are sending a fax or an I-Fax, press [Fax Start] .
• If you are scanning to the Email Server, load your document, press [Next] , and then press [Start] .
Related Information
•
Configure and Operate LDAP Search
Related Topics:
•
Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
328
> Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management
Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
The Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) is used to synchronise the time used by the machine for authentication with the SNTP time server. (This is not the time displayed on the machine's LCD.) You can automatically or manually synchronise the machine's time with the Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) provided by the SNTP time server.
•
Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
•
Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
•
Change LDAP Configuration Using Web Based Management
•
Perform an LDAP Search Using Your Machine's Control Panel
329
>
Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management > Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
Configure date and time to synchronise the time used by the machine with the SNTP time server.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Date&Time .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Verify the Time Zone settings.
Select the time difference between your location and UTC from the Time Zone drop-down list. For example, the time zone for Eastern Time in the USA and Canada is UTC-05:00.
6. Select the Synchronize with SNTP server checkbox.
7. Click Submit .
You can also configure date and time manually.
Related Information
•
Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
•
330
>
Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based
Management > Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
Configure the SNTP Protocol Using Web Based Management
Configure the SNTP protocol to synchronise the time the machine uses for authentication with the time kept by the SNTP time server.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the SNTP checkbox to activate the settings.
6. Click Submit .
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
8. Next to the SNTP checkbox, click Advanced Settings .
9. Configure the settings.
Option
Status
Synchronization Status
SNTP Server Method
Primary SNTP Server Address
Secondary SNTP Server Address
Primary SNTP Server Port
Secondary SNTP Server Port
Synchronization Interval
Description
Displays whether the SNTP protocol is enabled or disabled.
Confirm the latest synchronisation status.
Select AUTO or STATIC .
• AUTO
If you have a DHCP server on your network, the SNTP server will obtain the address from that server automatically.
• STATIC
Type the address you want to use.
Type the server's address (up to 64 characters).
The secondary SNTP server's address is used as a backup to the primary SNTP server's address. If the primary server is unavailable, the machine will contact the secondary SNTP server.
Type the port number (1-65535).
The secondary SNTP server port is used as a backup to the primary
SNTP server port. If the primary port is unavailable, the machine will contact the secondary SNTP port.
Type the number of hours between server synchronisation attempts
(1-168 hours).
10. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Synchronise Time with the SNTP Server Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
•
331
> Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
Forward Incoming Faxes to a Network Destination
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Set up a profile to forward incoming faxes directly to a folder on an FTP, SFTP, CIFS, or SharePoint server.
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Windows
Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Mac
Google Chrome ™ for Android ™
Safari and Google Chrome ™ for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Network Profile .
If the left navigation bar is not visible, start navigating from .
5. Click the protocol option next to the Profile number.
6. Select the FTP , SFTP , Network , or SharePoint option, and then click Submit .
7. Set up the profile for your server, using one of the following tables:
Using the following characters: ?, /, \, ", :, <, >, | or * may cause a sending error.
FTP
Option
Profile Name
Host Address
Port Number
Username
Password
SSL/TLS
Description
Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Change the Port Number setting used to access the FTP server. The default setting is port 21. In most cases this setting does not need to be changed.
Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the FTP server.
Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
Set the SSL/TLS option to forward incoming faxes securely using
SSL/TLS communication. Change the CA Certificate setting, if needed.
332
Option
Store Directory
Passive Mode
SFTP
Option
Profile Name
Host Address
Username
Auth. Method
Password
Client Key Pair
Server Public Key
Store Directory
Port Number
Network
Option
Profile Name
Network Folder Path
Auth. Method
Username
Password
Kerberos Server Address
Description
Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the FTP server where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
Set the Passive Mode option to off or on depending on your FTP server and network firewall configuration. The default setting is on. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed.
Description
Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Type the Host Address (for example: ftp.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example: 192.23.56.189).
Type a user name (up to 32 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the SFTP server.
Select Password or Public Key .
When you select Password for the Auth. Method option, type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you typed in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.
When you select Public Key for the Auth. Method option, select the authentication type.
Select the authentication type.
Type the path (up to 255 characters) to the folder on the SFTP server where you want to forward incoming faxes. Do not type a slash mark at the beginning of the path (correct example: brother/abc).
Change the Port Number setting used to access the SFTP server. The default setting is port 22. In most cases, this setting does not need to be changed.
Description
Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters). The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Type the path to the folder on the CIFS server where you want to forward incoming faxes.
To set your authentication method, select Auto , Kerberos , or
NTLMv2 .
Type a user name (up to 96 characters) that has permission to write data to the folder specified in the Network Folder Path field. If the user name is part of a domain, type the user name in one of the following styles: user@domain domain\user
Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the Retype password field.
When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
333
You must configure the SNTP (network time server) or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel. The time must match the time used by the Kerberos Server and CIFS Server.
SharePoint
Option
Profile Name
SharePoint Site Address
SSL/TLS
Auth. Method
Username
Password
Kerberos Server Address
Description
Type a name for this server profile (up to 15 alphanumeric characters).
The machine will display this name on the LCD.
Copy and paste the full destination address shown in the address bar of your browser (for example: http://SharePointSiteAddress/Shared
%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx) or the IP address (for example: http://192.168.0.1/Shared%20Documents/Forms/AllItems.aspx).
If the address in the SharePoint Site Address field starts with "https://", you can verify the server certificate by selecting the Verify Server
Certificate checkbox.
To set your authentication method, select Auto , NTLMv2 , Kerberos , or
Basic . If you choose Auto , the authentication method will be detected automatically.
Type the user name (up to 96 characters) of a user that has permission to write data to the folder specified in the SharePoint Site Address field. If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the following styles:
• user@domain
• domain\user
Type the password (up to 32 characters) associated with the user name you entered in the Username field. Type the password again in the
Retype password field.
When you select Kerberos for the Auth. Method option, you must type the Kerberos Server Address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters).
8. Click Submit .
9. To set the Fax Forward feature, go to the navigation menu, and then click Fax > Remote Fax Options .
10. Select Forward to Network from the Fwd/Store/Cloud/Network drop-down list.
11. Select the file type you want to use.
12. To print a backup copy of incoming faxes, select On for Backup print .
13. Select the profile you want to use from the Network Profile drop-down list.
14. Type a three-digit Remote Access Code in the Remote Access Code field, if needed.
• You can use the numbers 0 through 9, *, or # for the Remote Access Code.
• The Remote Access Code must be different from the remote codes for the Fax features.
15. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
334
> Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW
Your machine supports 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet. To connect to a 1000BASE-T Gigabit Ethernet Network, you must set the machine’s Ethernet link mode to Auto from the machine’s control panel or Web Based
Management (web browser).
Use a Category 5e (or greater) network cable. The machine can automatically negotiate the highest supported network speed, for example: to achieve 1000BASE-T network speeds, all connecting infrastructure, including network switches and cables must also support 1000BASE-T speeds. Otherwise the machine will communicate at either 10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX.
Related Information
•
•
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
335
>
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only) > Configure the Gigabit
Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
Configure the Gigabit Ethernet Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Wired > Ethernet .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Auto from the Ethernet Mode drop-down list.
6. Click Submit .
7. To activate the settings, click Yes to restart your machine.
You can confirm your settings by printing the Network Configuration Report.
Related Information
•
Gigabit Ethernet (Wired Network Only)
Related Topics:
•
•
Print the Network Configuration Report
336
> Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
You can use your machine's control panel to reset the machine's network settings to its default factory settings.
This resets all information, such as the password and IP address.
• This feature restores all network settings to the factory settings.
• You can also reset the print server to its factory settings using Web Based Management.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [Network] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Network Reset] option, and then press OK .
4. Follow the machine's instruction to reset the network settings.
The machine will restart.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Network Reset] .
2.
[Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.] appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm.
The machine will restart.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
337
Security
•
Before Using Network Security Features
•
Configure Certificates for Device Security
•
•
•
•
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
•
Use Active Directory Authentication
•
•
•
Send or Receive an Email Securely
•
•
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
•
Use Global Network Detection Features
338
Home > Security > Before Using Network Security Features
Before Using Network Security Features
Your machine employs some of the latest network security and encryption protocols available today. These network features can be integrated into your overall network security plan to help protect your data and prevent unauthorised access to the machine.
We recommend disabling the Telnet, FTP server, and TFTP protocols. Accessing the machine using these protocols is not secure.
Related Information
•
•
339
Before Using Network Security Features > Disable Unnecessary Protocols
Disable Unnecessary Protocols
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Clear any unnecessary protocol checkboxes to disable them.
6. Click Submit .
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
•
Before Using Network Security Features
Related Topics:
•
340
Home > Security > Configure Certificates for Device Security
Configure Certificates for Device Security
You must configure a certificate to manage your networked machine securely using SSL/TLS. You must use Web
Based Management to configure a certificate.
•
Supported Security Certificate Features
•
How to Create and Install a Certificate
•
Create a Self-signed Certificate
•
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate
•
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
•
Import and Export a CA Certificate
•
341
Configure Certificates for Device Security > Supported Security Certificate Features
Supported Security Certificate Features
Your machine supports the use of multiple security certificates, which allows secure management, authentication, and communication with the machine. The following security certificate features can be used with the machine:
• SSL/TLS communication
• SSL communication for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 (only available for certain models)
• IEEE 802.1x authentication
• IPsec
Your machine supports the following:
• Pre-installed certificate
Your machine has a pre-installed self-signed certificate. This certificate enables you to use SSL/TLS communication without creating or installing a different certificate.
The pre-installed self-signed certificate protects your communication up to a certain level. We recommend using a certificate that is issued by a trusted organisation for better security.
• Self-signed certificate
This print server issues its own certificate. Using this certificate, you can easily use the SSL/TLS communication without creating or installing a different certificate from a CA.
• Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
There are two methods for installing a certificate from a CA. If you already have a certificate from a CA or if you want to use a certificate from an external trusted CA:
When using a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) from this print server.
When importing a certificate and a private key.
• Certificate Authority (CA) Certificate
To use a CA certificate that identifies the CA and owns its private key, you must import that CA certificate from the CA before configuring the security features of the Network.
• If you are going to use SSL/TLS communication, we recommend contacting your system administrator first.
• When you reset the print server back to its default factory settings, the certificate and the private key that are installed will be deleted. If you want to keep the same certificate and the private key after resetting the print server, export them before resetting, and then reinstall them.
Related Information
•
Configure Certificates for Device Security
342
Configure Certificates for Device Security > How to Create and Install a Certificate
How to Create and Install a Certificate
There are two options when choosing a security certificate: use a self-signed certificate or use a certificate from a
Certificate Authority (CA).
Option 1
Self-Signed Certificate
1. Create a self-signed certificate using Web Based Management.
2. Install the self-signed certificate on your computer.
Option 2
Certificate from a CA
1. Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) using Web Based Management.
2. Install the certificate issued by the CA on your Brother machine using Web Based Management.
3. Install the certificate on your computer.
Related Information
•
Configure Certificates for Device Security
343
Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Self-signed Certificate
Create a Self-signed Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create Self-Signed Certificate .
6. Enter a Common Name and a Valid Date .
• The length of the Common Name is less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP address, node name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS communication. The node name is displayed by default.
• A warning will appear if you use the IPPS or HTTPS protocol and enter a different name in the URL than the Common Name that was used for the self-signed certificate.
7. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit) .
8. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256 .
9. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Configure Certificates for Device Security
Related Topics:
•
344
Configure Certificates for Device Security > Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR) and Install a Certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA)
If you already have a certificate from an external trusted Certificate Authority (CA) , you can store the certificate and private key on the machine and manage them by importing and exporting. If you do not have a certificate from an external trusted CA, create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR), send it to a CA for authentication, and install the returned certificate on your machine.
•
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
•
Install a Certificate on Your Machine
345
Configure Certificates for Device Security >
Create a Certificate Signing Request (CSR)
A Certificate Signing Request (CSR) is a request sent to a Certificate Authority (CA) to authenticate the credentials contained within the certificate.
We recommend installing a Root Certificate from the CA on your computer before creating the CSR.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Create CSR .
6. Type a Common Name (required) and add other information about your Organization (optional).
• Your company details are required so that a CA can confirm your identity and verify it to the outside world.
• The length of the Common Name must be less than 64 bytes. Enter an identifier, such as an IP address, node name, or domain name to use when accessing this machine through SSL/TLS communication. The node name is displayed by default. The Common Name is required.
• A warning will appear if you type a different name in the URL than the Common Name that was used for the certificate.
• The length of the Organization , the Organization Unit , the City/Locality , and the State/Province must be less than 64 bytes.
• The Country/Region should be a two-character ISO 3166 country code.
• If you are configuring an X.509v3 certificate extension, select the Configure extended partition checkbox, and then select Auto (Register IPv4) or Manual .
7. Select your setting from the Public Key Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is RSA(2048bit) .
8. Select your setting from the Digest Algorithm drop-down list. The default setting is SHA256 .
9. Click Submit .
The CSR appears on your screen. Save the CSR as a file or copy and paste it into an online CSR form offered by a Certificate Authority.
10. Click Save .
346
• Follow your CA's policy regarding the method to send a CSR to your CA.
• If you are using the Enterprise root CA of Windows Server 2012/2012 R2/2016/2019/2022, we recommend using the Web Server for the certificate template to securely create the Client Certificate. If you are creating a Client Certificate for an IEEE 802.1x environment with EAP-TLS authentication, we recommend using User for the certificate template.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
347
Configure Certificates for Device Security >
Install a Certificate on Your Machine
When you receive a certificate from a Certificate Authority (CA), follow the steps below to install it on the print server:
Only a certificate issued with your machine's Certificate Signing Request (CSR) can be installed on your machine. When you want to create another CSR, make sure that the certificate is installed before creating the new CSR. Create another CSR only after installing the certificate on the machine, otherwise the CSR created before installing the new CSR will be invalid.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Install Certificate .
6. Browse to the file that contains the certificate issued by the CA, and then click Submit .
The certificate has been created and saved in your machine's memory successfully.
To use SSL/TLS communication, the Root Certificate from the CA must be installed on your computer. Contact your network administrator.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
348
Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export the Certificate and
Private Key
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Store the certificate and private key on your machine and manage them by importing and exporting them.
•
Import a Certificate and Private Key
•
Export the Certificate and Private Key
349
Configure Certificates for Device Security >
Import and Export the Certificate and
> Import a Certificate and Private Key
Import a Certificate and Private Key
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import Certificate and Private Key .
6. Browse to the file you want to import.
7. Type the password if the file is encrypted, and then click Submit .
The certificate and private key are imported to your machine.
Related Information
•
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Related Topics:
•
350
Configure Certificates for Device Security >
Import and Export the Certificate and
> Export the Certificate and Private Key
Export the Certificate and Private Key
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Export shown with Certificate List .
6. Enter the password if you want to encrypt the file.
If a blank password is used, the output is not encrypted.
7. Enter the password again for confirmation, and then click Submit .
8. Click Save .
The certificate and private key are exported to your computer.
You can also import the certificate to your computer.
Related Information
•
Import and Export the Certificate and Private Key
Related Topics:
•
351
Configure Certificates for Device Security > Import and Export a CA Certificate
Import and Export a CA Certificate
You can import, export, and store CA certificates on your Brother machine.
•
•
352
Configure Certificates for Device Security >
Import and Export a CA Certificate > Import
a CA Certificate
Import a CA Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > CA Certificate .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click Import CA Certificate .
6. Browse to the file you want to import.
7. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Import and Export a CA Certificate
Related Topics:
•
353
Configure Certificates for Device Security >
Import and Export a CA Certificate > Export
a CA Certificate
Export a CA Certificate
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > CA Certificate .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select the certificate you want to export and click Export .
6. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Import and Export a CA Certificate
Related Topics:
•
354
Configure Certificates for Device Security > Manage Multiple Certificates
Manage Multiple Certificates
The multiple certificate feature allows you to use Web Based Management to manage each certificate installed on your machine. In Web Based Management, navigate to the Certificate or CA Certificate screen to view certificate content, delete, or export your certificates.
Self-signed Certificate or
Certificate Issued by a CA
CA Certificate
Maximum Number of Certificates Stored on Brother Machine
6
9
We recommend storing fewer certificates than allowed, reserving an empty spot in case of certificate expiration.
When a certificate expires, import a new certificate into the reserved spot, and then delete the expired certificate.
This ensures that you avoid configuration failure.
• When you use HTTPS/IPPS, IEEE 802.1x, or Signed PDF, you must select which certificate you are using.
• When you use SSL for SMTP/POP3/IMAP4 communications (only available for certain models), you do not have to choose the certificate. The necessary certificate will be chosen automatically.
Related Information
•
Configure Certificates for Device Security
355
Use SSL/TLS
•
•
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
•
Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
•
Send or Receive an Email Securely
356
> Introduction to SSL/TLS
Introduction to SSL/TLS
Secure Socket Layer (SSL) or Transport Layer Security (TLS) is an effective method of protecting data sent over a local or wide area network (LAN or WAN). It works by encrypting data, such as a print job, sent over a network, so anyone trying to capture it will not be able to read it.
SSL/TLS can be configured on both wired and wireless networks and will work with other forms of security such as WPA keys and firewalls.
Related Information
•
•
•
357
> Brief History of SSL/TLS
Brief History of SSL/TLS
SSL/TLS was originally created to secure web traffic information, particularly data sent between web browsers and servers. SSL is now used with additional applications, such as Telnet, printer, and FTP software, in order to become a universal solution for online security. Its original design intentions are still being used today by many online retailers and banks to secure sensitive data, such as credit card numbers, customer records, etc.
SSL/TLS uses extremely high levels of encryption and is trusted by banks all over the world.
Related Information
•
358
> Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
Benefits of Using SSL/TLS
The primary benefit of using SSL/TLS is to guarantee secure printing over an IP network by restricting unauthorised users from reading data sent to the machine. SSL's most important benefit is that it can be used to print confidential data securely. For example, a Human Resource (HR) Department in a large company may be printing wage slips on a regular basis. Without encryption, the data contained on these wages slips can be read by other network users. However, with SSL/TLS, anyone trying to capture the data will see a page of code and not the actual wage slip.
Related Information
•
359
> Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
•
Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
•
Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
•
Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
•
Configure Certificates for Device Security
360
> Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
> Configure a
Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
Configure a certificate on your machine using Web Based Management before you use SSL/TLS communication.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click HTTP Server Settings .
6. Select the certificate you want to configure from the Select the Certificate drop-down list.
7. Click Submit .
8. Click Yes to restart your print server.
Related Information
•
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Related Topics:
•
361
> Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
> Access
Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
Access Web Based Management Using SSL/TLS
To manage your network machine securely, use Web Based Management with the HTTPS protocol.
• To use HTTPS protocol, HTTPS must be enabled on your machine. The HTTPS protocol is enabled by default.
• You can change the HTTPS protocol settings using Web Based Management.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name).
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. You can now access the machine using HTTPS.
Related Information
•
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
Related Topics:
•
362
> Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
> Install the
Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
• The following steps are for Microsoft Edge. If you use another web browser, refer to your web browser's documentation or online help for instructions on how to install certificates.
• Make sure you have created your self-signed certificate using Web Based Management.
1. Right-click the Microsoft Edge icon, and then click Run as administrator .
If the User Account Control screen appears, click Yes .
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If your connection is not private, click the Advanced button, and then continue to the web page.
4. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
5. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > Certificate .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
6. Click Export .
7. To encrypt the output file, type a password in the Enter password field. If the Enter password field is blank, your output file will not be encrypted.
8. Type the password again in the Retype password field, and then click Submit .
9. Click the downloaded file to open.
10. When the Certificate Import Wizard appears, click Next .
11. Click Next .
12. If required, type a password, and then click Next .
13. Select Place all certificates in the following store , and then click Browse… .
14. Select the Trusted Root Certification Authorities , and then click OK .
15. Click Next .
16. Click Finish .
17. Click Yes , if the fingerprint (thumbprint) is correct.
18. Click OK .
Related Information
•
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SSL/TLS
363
> Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
•
•
Configure a Certificate for SSL/TLS and Available Protocols
•
Configure Certificates for Device Security
364
> Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
> Print Documents Using
IPPS
Print Documents Using IPPS
To print documents securely with IPP protocol, use the IPPS protocol.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the IPP checkbox is selected.
If the IPP checkbox is not selected, select the IPP checkbox, and then click Submit .
Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
After the machine restarts, return to the machine's web page, type the password, go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
6. Click HTTP Server Settings .
7. Select the HTTPS checkbox in the IPP area, and then click Submit .
8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Communication using IPPS cannot prevent unauthorised access to the print server.
Related Information
•
Print Documents Securely Using SSL/TLS
Related Topics:
•
365
Use SNMPv3
•
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3
366
> Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3
Manage Your Network Machine Securely Using SNMPv3
The Simple Network Management Protocol version 3 (SNMPv3) provides user authentication and data encryption to manage network devices securely.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://Common Name" in your browser's address bar (where "Common Name" is the Common Name that you assigned to the certificate; this could be your IP address, node name, or domain name).
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Make sure the SNMP setting is enabled, and then click Advanced Settings .
6. Configure the SNMP settings.
Option
SNMP v1/v2c read-write access
Description
The print server uses version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol. You can use all of your machine's applications in this mode. However, it is not secure since it will not authenticate the user and data will not be encrypted.
SNMPv3 readwrite access and v1/v2c readonly access
The print server uses the read-write access of version 3 and the read-only access of version 1 and version 2c of the SNMP protocol.
When you use the SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access mode, some of your machine's applications that access the print server do not work correctly since they authorise the read-only access of version 1 and version 2c. If you want to use all applications, we recommend using the SNMP v1/v2c read-write access mode.
SNMPv3 readwrite access
The print server uses version 3 of the SNMP protocol. If you want to manage the print server securely, use this mode.
When you use the SNMPv3 read-write access mode, note the following:
Except for BRAdmin Professional, all applications that use SNMPv1/v2c will be restricted. To allow the use of SNMPv1/v2c applications, use the SNMPv3 read-write access and v1/v2c read-only access or SNMP v1/v2c readwrite access mode.
7. Click Submit .
If your machine displays the protocol setting options, select the options you want.
8. Restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
367
Use IPsec
•
•
Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
•
Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
•
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
368
Use IPsec > Introduction to IPsec
Introduction to IPsec
IPsec (Internet Protocol Security) is a security protocol that uses an optional Internet Protocol function to prevent data manipulation and ensure the confidentiality of data transmitted as IP packets. IPsec encrypts data carried over a network, such as print data sent from computers to a printer. Because the data is encrypted at the network layer, applications that employ a higher-level protocol use IPsec even if the user is not aware of its use.
IPsec supports the following functions:
• IPsec transmissions
According to the IPsec setting conditions, a network-connected computer sends data to and receives data from a specified device using IPsec. When devices start communicating using IPsec, keys are exchanged using Internet Key Exchange (IKE) first, and then the encrypted data is transmitted using the keys.
In addition, IPsec has two operation modes: the Transport mode and Tunnel mode. The Transport mode is used mainly for communication between devices and the Tunnel mode is used in environments such as a
Virtual Private Network (VPN).
For IPsec transmissions, the following conditions are necessary:
A computer that can communicate using IPsec is connected to the network.
Your machine is configured for IPsec communication.
The computer connected to your machine is configured for IPsec connections.
• IPsec settings
The settings that are necessary for connections using IPsec. These settings can be configured using Web
Based Management.
To configure the IPsec settings, you must use the browser on a computer that is connected to the network.
Related Information
•
369
Use IPsec > Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
Configure IPsec Using Web Based Management
The IPsec connection conditions comprise two Template types: Address and IPsec . You can configure up to 10 connection conditions.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Configure the settings.
Option
Status
Negotiation Mode
All Non-IPsec Traffic
Broadcast/Multicast Bypass
Protocol Bypass
Rules
Description
Enable or disable IPsec.
Select Negotiation Mode for IKE Phase 1. IKE is a protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec.
In the Main mode, the processing speed is slow, but the security is high. In the Aggressive mode, the processing speed is faster than in the Main mode, but the security is lower.
Select the action to be taken for non-IPsec packets.
When using Web Services, you must select Allow for All Non-IPsec
Traffic . If you select Drop , Web Services cannot be used.
Select Enabled or Disabled .
Select the checkboxes for the option or options you want.
Select the Enabled checkbox to activate the template. When you select multiple checkboxes, the lower numbered checkboxes have priority if the settings for the selected checkboxes conflict.
Click the corresponding drop-down list to select the Address
Template that is used for the IPsec connection conditions. To add an
Address Template , click Add Template .
Click the corresponding drop-down list to select the IPsec Template that is used for the IPsec connection conditions. To add an IPsec
Template , click Add Template .
6. Click Submit .
If the machine must be restarted to activate the new settings, the restart confirmation screen will appear.
If there is a blank item in the template you enabled in the Rules table, an error message appears. Confirm your choices and click Submit again.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Configure Certificates for Device Security
370
•
371
Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
Configure an IPsec Address Template Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec Address Template .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Delete button to delete an Address Template . When an Address Template is in use, it cannot be deleted.
6. Click the Address Template that you want to create. The IPsec Address Template appears.
7. Configure the settings.
Option
Template Name
Local IP Address
Remote IP Address
Description
Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
• IP Address
Specify the IP address. Select ALL IPv4 Address , ALL IPv6
Address , ALL Link Local IPv6 , or Custom from the drop-down list.
If you select Custom from the drop-down list, type the IP address
(IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.
• IP Address Range
Type the starting and ending IP addresses for the IP address range in the text boxes. If the starting and ending IP addresses are not standardised to IPv4 or IPv6, or the ending IP address is smaller than the starting address, an error will occur.
• IP Address / Prefix
Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.
For example: 192.168.1.1/24
Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask
(255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the addresses 192.168.1.### are valid.
• Any
If you select Any , all IP addresses are enabled.
• IP Address
Type the specified IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) in the text box.
• IP Address Range
Type the first and last IP addresses for the IP address range. If the first and last IP addresses are not standardised to IPv4 or
IPv6, or the last IP address is smaller than the first address, an error will occur.
• IP Address / Prefix
Specify the IP address using CIDR notation.
For example: 192.168.1.1/24
372
Option Description
Because the prefix is specified in the form of a 24-bit subnet mask
(255.255.255.0) for 192.168.1.1, the addresses 192.168.1.### are valid.
8. Click Submit .
When you change the settings for the template currently in use, restart your machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
373
Use IPsec > Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Security > IPsec Template .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the Delete button to delete an IPsec Template . When an IPsec Template is in use, it cannot be deleted.
6. Click the IPsec Template that you want to create. The IPsec Template screen appears. The configuration fields differ based on the Use Prefixed Template and Internet Key Exchange (IKE) settings you select.
7. In the Template Name field, type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
8. If you selected Custom in the Use Prefixed Template drop-down list, select the Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) options, and then change the settings if needed.
9. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
•
IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
•
IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
•
Manual Settings for an IPsec Template
Related Topics:
•
374
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
> IKEv1
Settings for an IPsec Template
IKEv1 Settings for an IPsec Template
Option
Template Name
Use Prefixed Template
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
Authentication Type
Encapsulating Security
Description
Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Select Custom , IKEv1 High Security or IKEv1 Medium Security . The setting items are different depending on the selected template.
IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to IKE is carried out.
If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template , select IKEv1 .
• Diffie-Hellman Group
This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely exchanged over an unprotected network. The Diffie-Hellman key exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the secret key, to send and receive open information that was generated using a random number and the secret key.
Select Group1 , Group2 , Group5 , or Group14 .
• Encryption
Select DES , 3DES , AES-CBC 128 , or AES-CBC 256 .
• Hash
Select MD5 , SHA1 , SHA256 , SHA384 or SHA512 .
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Protocol
Select ESP , AH , or AH+ESP .
ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so on.
AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the sender and prevents manipulation (ensures the completeness) of the data. In the IP packet, the data is inserted immediately after the header. In addition, the packets include hash values, which are calculated using an equation from the communicated contents, secret key, and so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated contents are not encrypted, and the data is sent and received as plain text.
• Encryption (Not available for the AH option.)
Select DES , 3DES , AES-CBC 128 , or AES-CBC 256 .
• Hash
Select None , MD5 , SHA1 , SHA256 , SHA384 , or SHA512 .
None can be selected only when ESP is selected for Protocol .
375
Option
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
Authentication Method
Pre-Shared Key
Certificate
Description
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel .
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically.
PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt messages. In addition, if a key that is used to encrypt a message was derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other keys. Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be limited only to the messages that were encrypted using that key.
Select Enabled or Disabled .
Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key or
Certificates .
When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and shared beforehand using another channel.
If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method , type the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32 characters).
• Local/ID Type/ID
Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address , IPv6 Address , FQDN , E-mail Address , or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate , type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.
• Remote/ID Type/ID
Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address , IPv6 Address , FQDN , E-mail Address , or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate , type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.
If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method , select the certificate.
You can select only the certificates that were created using the
Certificate page of Web Based Management's Security configuration screen.
Related Information
•
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
376
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
> IKEv2
Settings for an IPsec Template
IKEv2 Settings for an IPsec Template
Option
Template Name
Use Prefixed Template
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
Authentication Type
Encapsulating Security
Description
Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Select Custom , IKEv2 High Security , or IKEv2 Medium Security .
The setting items are different depending on the selected template.
IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to IKE is carried out.
If you selected Custom in Use Prefixed Template , select IKEv2 .
• Diffie-Hellman Group
This key exchange method allows secret keys to be securely exchanged over an unprotected network. The Diffie-Hellman key exchange method uses a discrete logarithm problem, not the secret key, to send and receive open information that was generated using a random number and the secret key.
Select Group1 , Group2 , Group5 , or Group14 .
• Encryption
Select DES , 3DES , AES-CBC 128 , or AES-CBC 256 .
• Hash
Select MD5 , SHA1 , SHA256 , SHA384 or SHA512 .
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Protocol
Select ESP .
ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so on.
• Encryption
Select DES , 3DES , AES-CBC 128 , or AES-CBC 256 .
• Hash
Select MD5 , SHA1 , SHA256 , SHA384 , or SHA512 .
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel .
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
377
Option
Perfect Forward Secrecy (PFS)
Authentication Method
Pre-Shared Key
Certificate
Description
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically.
PFS does not derive keys from previous keys that were used to encrypt messages. In addition, if a key that is used to encrypt a message was derived from a parent key, that parent key is not used to derive other keys. Therefore, even if a key is compromised, the damage will be limited only to the messages that were encrypted using that key.
Select Enabled or Disabled .
Select the authentication method. Select Pre-Shared Key ,
Certificates , EAP - MD5 , or EAP - MS-CHAPv2 .
EAP is an authentication protocol that is an extension of PPP.
By using EAP with IEEE802.1x, a different key is used for user authentication during each session.
The following settings are necessary only when EAP - MD5 or
EAP - MS-CHAPv2 is selected in Authentication Method :
• Mode
Select Server-Mode or Client-Mode .
• Certificate
Select the certificate.
• User Name
Type the user name (up to 32 characters).
• Password
Type the password (up to 32 characters). The password must be entered two times for confirmation.
When encrypting communication, the encryption key is exchanged and shared beforehand using another channel.
If you selected Pre-Shared Key for the Authentication Method , type the Pre-Shared Key (up to 32 characters).
• Local/ID Type/ID
Select the sender's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address , IPv6 Address , FQDN , E-mail Address , or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate , type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.
• Remote/ID Type/ID
Select the recipient's ID type, and then type the ID.
Select IPv4 Address , IPv6 Address , FQDN , E-mail Address , or
Certificate for the type.
If you select Certificate , type the common name of the certificate in the ID field.
If you selected Certificates for Authentication Method , select the certificate.
378
Option Description
You can select only the certificates that were created using the
Certificate page of Web Based Management's Security configuration screen.
Related Information
•
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
379
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
> Manual
Settings for an IPsec Template
Manual Settings for an IPsec Template
Option
Template Name
Use Prefixed Template
Internet Key Exchange (IKE)
Authentication Key (ESP, AH)
Code key (ESP)
SPI
Description
Type a name for the template (up to 16 characters).
Select Custom .
IKE is a communication protocol that is used to exchange encryption keys in order to carry out encrypted communication using IPsec. To carry out encrypted communication for that time only, the encryption algorithm that is necessary for IPsec is determined and the encryption keys are shared. For IKE, the encryption keys are exchanged using the
Diffie-Hellman key exchange method, and encrypted communication that is limited to IKE is carried out.
Select Manual .
Type the In/Out values.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template , Manual is selected for Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) , and a setting other than None is selected for Hash for
Encapsulating Security section.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the setting you chose for Hash in the Encapsulating Security section.
If the length of the specified authentication key is different than the selected hash algorithm, an error will occur.
• MD5 : 128 bits (16 bytes)
• SHA1 : 160 bits (20 bytes)
• SHA256 : 256 bits (32 bytes)
• SHA384 : 384 bits (48 bytes)
• SHA512 : 512 bits (64 bytes)
When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the characters in double quotation marks (").
Type the In/Out values.
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template , Manual is selected for Internet Key Exchange
(IKE) , and ESP is selected for Protocol in Encapsulating Security .
The number of characters you can set differs depending on the setting you chose for Encryption in the Encapsulating
Security section.
If the length of the specified code key is different than the selected encryption algorithm, an error will occur.
• DES : 64 bits (8 bytes)
• 3DES : 192 bits (24 bytes)
• AES-CBC 128 : 128 bits (16 bytes)
• AES-CBC 256 : 256 bits (32 bytes)
When you specify the key in ASCII Code, enclose the characters in double quotation marks (").
These parameters are used to identify security information. Generally, a host has multiple Security Associations (SAs) for several types of IPsec communication. Therefore, it is necessary to identify the applicable SA when an IPsec packet is received. The SPI parameter, which identifies the SA, is included in the Authentication Header (AH) and
Encapsulating Security Payload (ESP) header.
380
Option
Encapsulating Security
Description
These settings are necessary when Custom is selected for Use
Prefixed Template , and Manual is selected for Internet Key
Exchange (IKE) .
Enter the In/Out values. (3-10 characters)
• Protocol
Select ESP or AH .
ESP is a protocol for carrying out encrypted communication using IPsec. ESP encrypts the payload (communicated contents) and adds additional information. The IP packet comprises the header and the encrypted payload, which follows the header. In addition to the encrypted data, the IP packet also includes information regarding the encryption method and encryption key, the authentication data, and so on.
AH is part of the IPsec protocol that authenticates the sender and prevents manipulation of the data (ensures the completeness of the data). In the IP packet, the data is inserted immediately after the header. In addition, the packets include hash values, which are calculated using an equation from the communicated contents, secret key, and so on, in order to prevent the falsification of the sender and manipulation of the data. Unlike ESP, the communicated contents are not encrypted, and the data is sent and received as plain text.
• Encryption (Not available for the AH option.)
Select DES , 3DES , AES-CBC 128 , or AES-CBC 256 .
• Hash
Select None , MD5 , SHA1 , SHA256 , SHA384 , or SHA512 .
None can be selected only when ESP is selected for Protocol .
• SA Lifetime
Specify the IKE SA lifetime.
Type the time (seconds) and number of kilobytes (KByte).
• Encapsulation Mode
Select Transport or Tunnel .
• Remote Router IP-Address
Type the IP address (IPv4 or IPv6) of the remote router. Enter this information only when the Tunnel mode is selected.
SA (Security Association) is an encrypted communication method using IPsec or IPv6 that exchanges and shares information, such as the encryption method and encryption key, in order to establish a secure communication channel before communication begins. SA may also refer to a virtual encrypted communication channel that has been established. The SA used for IPsec establishes the encryption method, exchanges the keys, and carries out mutual authentication according to the
IKE (Internet Key Exchange) standard procedure. In addition, the SA is updated periodically.
Related Information
•
Configure an IPsec Template Using Web Based Management
381
Home > Security > Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
•
What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
•
Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based
•
IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
382
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > What Is IEEE
802.1x Authentication?
What Is IEEE 802.1x Authentication?
IEEE 802.1x is an IEEE standard that limits access from unauthorised network devices. Your Brother machine sends an authentication request to a RADIUS server (Authentication server) through your access point or hub.
After your request has been verified by the RADIUS server, your machine can access the network.
Related Information
•
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
383
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > Configure IEEE
802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)
Configure IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or Wireless Network
Using Web Based Management (Web Browser)
• If you configure your machine using EAP-TLS authentication, you must install the client certificate issued by a CA before you start configuration. Contact your network administrator about the client certificate. If you have installed more than one certificate, we recommend writing down the certificate name you want to use.
• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to confirm whether a CA certificate import is necessary.
You can also configure IEEE 802.1x authentication using the Wireless Setup Wizard from the control panel
(Wireless network).
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Do one of the following:
• For the wired network
Click Wired > Wired 802.1x Authentication .
• For the wireless network
Click Wireless > Wireless (Enterprise) .
6. Configure the IEEE 802.1x authentication settings.
• To enable IEEE 802.1x authentication for wired networks, select Enabled for Wired 802.1x status on the Wired 802.1x Authentication page.
• If you are using EAP-TLS authentication, you must select the client certificate installed (shown with certificate name) for verification from the Client Certificate drop-down list.
• If you select EAP-FAST , PEAP , EAP-TTLS , or EAP-TLS authentication, select the verification method from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list. Verify the server certificate using the CA certificate, imported to the machine in advance, issued by the CA that signed the server certificate.
384
Select one of the following verification methods from the Server Certificate Verification drop-down list:
Option
No Verification
Description
The server certificate can always be trusted. The verification is not performed.
CA Cert.
The verification method to check the CA reliability of the server certificate, using the
CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the server certificate.
CA Cert. + ServerID
The verification method to check the common name
value of the server certificate, in addition to the CA reliability of the server certificate.
7. When finished with configuration, click Submit .
For wired networks: After configuring, connect your machine to the IEEE 802.1x supported network. After a few minutes, print the Network Configuration Report to check the < Wired IEEE 802.1x
> status.
Option Description
Success The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled and the authentication was successful.
Failed The wired IEEE 802.1x function is enabled; however, the authentication failed.
Off The wired IEEE 802.1x function is not available.
Related Information
•
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
Related Topics:
•
Configure Certificates for Device Security
•
1 The common name verification compares the common name of the server certificate to the character string configured for the Server ID .
Before you use this method, contact your system administrator about the server certificate's common name and then configure Server ID .
385
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network > IEEE 802.1x
Authentication Methods
IEEE 802.1x Authentication Methods
EAP-FAST
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Flexible Authentication via Secured Tunneling (EAP-FAST) has been developed by Cisco Systems, Inc., which uses a user ID and password for authentication, and symmetric key algorithms to achieve a tunnelled authentication process.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentication methods:
• EAP-FAST/NONE
• EAP-FAST/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-FAST/GTC
EAP-MD5 (Wired network)
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Message Digest Algorithm 5 (EAP-MD5) uses a user ID and password for challenge-response authentication.
PEAP
Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol (PEAP) is a version of EAP method developed by Cisco
Systems, Inc., Microsoft Corporation and RSA Security. PEAP creates an encrypted Secure Sockets Layer
(SSL)/Transport Layer Security (TLS) tunnel between a client and an authentication server, for sending a user
ID and password. PEAP provides mutual authentication between the server and the client.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• PEAP/MS-CHAPv2
• PEAP/GTC
EAP-TTLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Tunneled Transport Layer Security (EAP-TTLS) has been developed by
Funk Software and Certicom. EAP-TTLS creates a similar encrypted SSL tunnel to PEAP, between a client and an authentication server, for sending a user ID and password. EAP-TTLS provides mutual authentication between the server and the client.
Your Brother machine supports the following inner authentications:
• EAP-TTLS/CHAP
• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAP
• EAP-TTLS/MS-CHAPv2
• EAP-TTLS/PAP
EAP-TLS
Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Layer Security (EAP-TLS) requires digital certificate authentication both at a client and an authentication server.
Related Information
•
Use IEEE 802.1x Authentication for a Wired or a Wireless Network
386
Home > Security > Use Active Directory Authentication
Use Active Directory Authentication
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
•
Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based Management
•
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (Active
387
Use Active Directory Authentication > Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
Introduction to Active Directory Authentication
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Active Directory Authentication restricts the use of your machine. If Active Directory Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID and password.
Active Directory Authentication offers the following features:
• Stores incoming print data
• Stores incoming fax data (For MFC models)
• (MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW) Obtains the email address from the Active Directory server based on your User ID, when sending scanned data to an email server.
To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting and LDAP + kerberos or LDAP +
NTLMv2 authentication method. Your email address will be set as the sender when the machine sends scanned data to an email server, or as the recipient if you want to send the scanned data to your email address.
When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the machine prints the stored fax data. (For MFC models)
You can change the Active Directory Authentication settings using Web Based Management.
Related Information
•
Use Active Directory Authentication
388
Use Active Directory Authentication > Configure Active Directory Authentication Using
Web Based Management
Configure Active Directory Authentication Using Web Based
Management
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Active Directory authentication supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication. You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server) and DNS server configuration for authentication.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Active Directory Authentication .
6. Click Submit .
7. Click Active Directory Authentication .
8. Configure the following settings:
Option
Storage Fax RX Data
(MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Description
Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax data after you log on to the machine.
Remember User ID
Protocol & Authentication
Method
Select this option to save your User ID.
Active Directory Server
Address
Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ad.example.com) of the Active Directory Server.
Active Directory Domain Name Type the Active Directory domain name.
Select the protocol and authentication method.
SSL/TLS
LDAP Server Port
Select the SSL/TLS option.
Type the port number to connect the Active Directory server via LDAP
(available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2 authentication method).
389
Option
LDAP Search Root
Get Mail Address
(MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Get User's Home Directory
Description
Type the LDAP search root (available only for LDAP + kerberos or
LDAP + NTLMv2 authentication method).
Select this option to obtain logged on user's email address from the
Active Directory server. (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP
+ NTLMv2 authentication method)
9. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Use Active Directory Authentication
Related Topics:
•
Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to Network destination. (available only for LDAP + kerberos or LDAP + NTLMv2 authentication method)
390
Use Active Directory Authentication > Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the
Machine's Control Panel (Active Directory Authentication)
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control
Panel (Active Directory Authentication)
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When Active Directory Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter your User ID and password on the machine's control panel.
1. On the machine's control panel, enter your User ID.
2. Press [OK] .
3. Enter your password.
4. Press [OK] .
5. Press [OK] again.
6. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel unlocks, and the LCD displays the Home screen.
Related Information
•
Use Active Directory Authentication
391
Home > Security > Use LDAP Authentication
Use LDAP Authentication
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
Introduction to LDAP Authentication
•
Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management
•
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel (LDAP
392
Use LDAP Authentication > Introduction to LDAP Authentication
Introduction to LDAP Authentication
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
LDAP Authentication restricts the use of your machine. If LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked. You cannot change the machine's settings until you enter a User ID and password.
LDAP Authentication offers the following features:
• Stores incoming print data
• Stores incoming fax data (For MFC models)
• (MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW) Obtains the email address from the LDAP server based on your User ID, when sending scanned data to an email server.
To use this feature, select the On option for the Get Mail Address setting. Your email address will be set as the sender when the machine sends scanned data to an email server, or as the recipient if you want to send the scanned data to your email address.
When LDAP Authentication is enabled, your machine stores all incoming fax data. After you log on, the machine prints the stored fax data. (For MFC models)
You can change the LDAP Authentication settings using Web Based Management.
Related Information
•
393
Use LDAP Authentication > Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based
Management
Configure LDAP Authentication Using Web Based Management
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select LDAP Authentication .
6. Click Submit .
7. Click the LDAP Authentication menu.
8. Configure the following settings:
Option
Storage Fax RX Data
(MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Description
Select this option to store incoming fax data. You can print all incoming fax data after you log on to the machine.
Remember User ID
LDAP Server Address
Select this option to save your User ID.
Type the IP address or the server name (for example: ldap.example.com) of the LDAP server.
SSL/TLS
LDAP Server Port
LDAP Search Root
Attribute of Name (Search Key)
Get Mail Address (MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Get User's Home Directory
Select the SSL/TLS option to use LDAP over SSL/TLS.
Type the LDAP server port number.
Type the LDAP search root directory.
Type the attribute you want to use as a search key.
Select this option to obtain the logged user's email address from the LDAP server.
Select this option to obtain your home directory as the Scan to
Network destination.
9. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
394
Related Topics:
•
395
Use LDAP Authentication > Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the
Machine's Control Panel (LDAP Authentication)
Log On to Change the Machine Settings Using the Machine's Control
Panel (LDAP Authentication)
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When LDAP Authentication is enabled, the machine's control panel will be locked until you enter your User ID and password on the machine's control panel.
1. On the machine's control panel, enter your User ID and Password.
2. Press [OK] .
3. Enter your password.
4. Press [OK] .
5. Press [OK] again.
6. When authentication is successful, the machine's control panel unlocks, and the LCD displays the Home screen.
Related Information
•
396
Home > Security > Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use Secure Function Lock 3.0
Secure Function Lock 3.0 increases security by restricting the functions available on your machine.
•
Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
•
Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
•
Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
•
Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
•
Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
•
Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel
397
> Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Before Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use Secure Function Lock to configure passwords, set specific user page limits, and grant access to some or all of the functions listed here.
You can configure and change the following Secure Function Lock 3.0 settings using Web Based Management:
Print includes print jobs sent via AirPrint, Brother iPrint&Scan, and Brother Mobile Connect.
If you register user login names in advance, the users do not need to enter their passwords when they use the print function.
• Colour Print
• Copy
• Scan
Scan includes scan jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan and Brother Mobile Connect.
• Send (supported models only)
• Receive (supported models only)
• USB Direct Print (supported models only)
• Scan to USB (supported models only)
• Web Connect (supported models only)
• Apps (supported models only)
• Page Limits (*)
• Page Counters
• Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)
If you register user Card IDs in advance, registered users can activate the machine by touching their registered cards to the machine's NFC symbol.
Touchscreen LCD models:
When Secure Function Lock is enabled, the machine automatically enters Public Mode and some of the machine's functions become restricted to authorised users only. To access the restricted machine functions, press , select your user name, and enter your password.
Related Information
•
398
> Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based
Management
Configure Secure Function Lock 3.0 Using Web Based Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Secure Function Lock .
6. Click Submit .
7. Click the Restricted Functions menu.
8. In the User List / Restricted Functions field, type a group name or user name.
9. In the Print and the other columns, select a checkbox to allow, or clear a checkbox to restrict, the function listed.
10. To configure the maximum page count, select the On checkbox in the Page Limits column, and then type the maximum number in the Max. Pages field.
11. Click Submit .
12. Click the User List menu.
13. In the User List field, type the user name.
14. In the Password field, type a password.
The number of characters you can set differs depending on your model.
15. (MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW) In the E-mail
Address field, type the user's email address.
16. To register the user's Card ID, type the card number in the Card ID (NFC ID) field (available for certain models).
17. Select User List / Restricted Functions from the drop-down list for each user.
18. Click Submit .
You can also change the user list lockout settings in the Secure Function Lock menu.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
399
> Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Scan Using Secure Function Lock 3.0
Setting Scan restrictions (for administrators)
Secure Function Lock 3.0 allows an administrator to restrict which users are allowed to scan. When the Scan feature is set to Off for the public user setting, only users who have the Scan checkbox selected will be able to scan.
Using the Scan feature (for restricted users)
• To scan using the machine's control panel:
Restricted users must enter their passwords on the machine's control panel to access Scan mode.
• To scan from a computer:
Restricted users must enter their passwords on the machine's control panel before scanning from their computers. If the password is not entered on the machine's control panel, an error message will appear on the user's computer.
Related Information
•
400
> Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
Configure Public Mode for Secure Function Lock 3.0
Use the Secure Function Lock screen to set up Public Mode, which limits the functions available to public users.
Public users will not need to enter a password to access the features made available through Public Mode settings.
Public Mode includes print jobs sent via Brother iPrint&Scan and Brother Mobile Connect.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > User Restriction Function or Restriction
Management .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Select Secure Function Lock .
6. Click Submit .
7. Click the Restricted Functions menu.
8. In the Public Mode row, select a checkbox to allow, or clear a checkbox to restrict, the function listed.
9. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
401
> Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
Additional Secure Function Lock 3.0 Features
Configure the following features in the Secure Function Lock screen:
All Counter Reset
Click All Counter Reset , in the Page Counters column, to reset the page counter.
Export to CSV file
Click Export to CSV file , to export the current and last page counter including User List / Restricted
Functions information as a CSV file.
Card ID (NFC ID) (supported models only)
Click the User List menu, and then type a user's Card ID in the Card ID (NFC ID) field. You can use your IC card for authentication.
Last Counter Record
Click Last Counter Record if you want the machine to retain the page count after the counter has been reset.
Related Information
•
402
> Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control
Panel
Register a new ID Card Using the Machine's Control Panel
Related Models : MFC-L8390CDW
1. Touch the Near-Field Communication (NFC) symbol on the machine with a registered Integrated Circuit Card
(IC Card).
2. Touch your user ID on the machine.
3. Press [Register Card] .
4. Touch a new IC Card to the NFC symbol.
The new IC Card's number is registered to the machine.
5. Press [OK] .
Related Information
•
403
Home > Security > Send or Receive an Email Securely
Send or Receive an Email Securely
•
Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management
•
Send an Email with User Authentication
•
Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS
404
Send or Receive an Email Securely > Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web
Based Management
Configure Email Sending or Receiving Using Web Based Management
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure secured email sending with user authentication, or email sending and receiving using SSL/TLS.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Network > Network > Protocol .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client field, click Advanced Settings and make sure the status of POP3/IMAP4/
SMTP Client is Enabled .
6. Configure the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client settings.
• Confirm that the email settings are correct after configuration by sending a test email.
• If you do not know the POP3/IMAP4/SMTP server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet
Service Provider (ISP).
7. When finished, click Submit .
The Test Send/Receive E-mail Configuration dialog box appears.
8. Follow the instructions in the dialog box to test the current settings.
Related Information
•
Send or Receive an Email Securely
Related Topics:
•
405
Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send an Email with User Authentication
Send an Email with User Authentication
Your machine supports the SMTP-AUTH method to send email via an email server that requires user authentication. This method prevents unauthorised users from accessing the email server.
You can use the SMTP-AUTH method for email notification, email reports and I-Fax. (For MFC models)
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure the SMTP authentication.
Email Server Settings
You must configure your machine's SMTP authentication method to match the method used by your email server.
For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or Internet Service Provider
(ISP).
To enable SMTP server authentication: in the Web Based Management POP3/IMAP4/SMTP Client screen, under Server Authentication Method , you must select SMTP-AUTH .
Related Information
•
Send or Receive an Email Securely
406
Send or Receive an Email Securely > Send or Receive an Email Securely Using
SSL/TLS
Send or Receive an Email Securely Using SSL/TLS
Your machine supports SSL/TLS communication methods. To use an email server that is using SSL/TLS communication, you must configure the following settings.
We recommend using Web Based Management to configure SSL/TLS.
Verify Server Certificate
Under SSL/TLS , if you choose SSL or TLS , the Verify Server Certificate checkbox will be selected automatically.
• Before you verify the server certificate, you must import the CA certificate issued by the CA that signed the server certificate. Contact your network administrator or your Internet Service Provider (ISP) to confirm if importing a CA certificate is necessary.
• If you do not need to verify the server certificate, clear the Verify Server Certificate checkbox.
Port Number
If you select SSL , or TLS , the Port value will be changed to match the protocol. To change the port number manually, type the port number after you select SSL/TLS settings.
You must configure your machine's communication method to match the method used by your email server. For details about your email server settings, contact your network administrator or your ISP.
In most cases, the secured webmail services require the following settings:
SMTP
POP3
IMAP4
Port
Server Authentication Method
SSL/TLS
Port
SSL/TLS
Port
SSL/TLS
587
SMTP-AUTH
TLS
995
SSL
993
SSL
Related Information
•
Send or Receive an Email Securely
Related Topics:
•
Configure Certificates for Device Security
407
Home > Security > Store Print Log to Network
Store Print Log to Network
•
Store Print Log to Network Overview
•
Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based Management
•
Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting
•
Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0
408
Store Print Log to Network > Store Print Log to Network Overview
Store Print Log to Network Overview
The Store Print Log to Network feature allows you to save the print log file from your machine to a network server using the Common Internet File System (CIFS) protocol. You can record the ID, type of print job, job name, user name, date, time and the number of printed pages for every print job. CIFS is a protocol that runs over TCP/IP, allowing computers on a network to share files over an intranet or the Internet.
The following print functions are recorded in the print log:
• Print jobs from your computer
• USB Direct Print (supported models only)
• Copy
• Received Fax (supported models only)
• Web Connect Print (supported models only)
• The Store Print Log to Network feature supports Kerberos authentication and NTLMv2 authentication.
You must configure the SNTP protocol (network time server), or you must set the date, time and time zone correctly on the control panel for authentication.
• You can set the file type to TXT or CSV when storing a file to the server.
Related Information
•
409
Store Print Log to Network > Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using
Web Based Management
Configure the Store Print Log to Network Settings Using Web Based
Management
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Store Print Log to Network .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Print Log field, click On .
6. Configure the following settings:
Option
Network Folder
Path
File Name
File Type
Time Source for Log
Auth. Method
Description
Type the destination folder where your print log will be stored on the CIFS server (for example: \\ComputerName\SharedFolder).
Type the file name you want to use for the print log (up to 32 characters).
Select the TXT or CSV option for the print log file type.
Select the time source for the print log.
Select the authentication method required for access to the CIFS server: Auto ,
Kerberos , or NTLMv2 . Kerberos is an authentication protocol which allows devices or individuals to securely prove their identity to network servers using a single sign-on.
NTLMv2 is the authentication method used by Windows to log into servers.
• Auto : If you select Auto , NTLMv2 will be used to the authentication method.
• Kerberos : Select the Kerberos option to use Kerberos authentication only.
• NTLMv2 : Select the NTLMv2 option to use NTLMv2 authentication only.
Username
Password
• For the Kerberos and NTLMv2 authentication, you must also configure the Date&Time settings or the SNTP protocol (network time server) and
DNS server.
• You can also configure the Date & Time settings from the machine's control panel.
Type the user name for the authentication (up to 96 characters).
If the user name is part of a domain, enter the user name in one of the following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
Type the password for the authentication (up to 32 characters).
410
Option
Kerberos
Server Address
(if needed)
Error Detection
Setting
Description
Type the Key Distribution Center (KDC) host address (for example: kerberos.example.com; up to 64 characters) or the IP address (for example:
192.168.56.189).
Choose what action should be taken when the print log cannot be stored to the server due to a network error.
7. In the Connection Status field, confirm the last log status.
You can also confirm the error status on the LCD of your machine.
8. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.
To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.
To skip the test, click No . Your settings will be submitted automatically.
9. The machine will test your settings.
10. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.
If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
411
Store Print Log to Network > Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection
Setting
Use the Store Print Log to Network's Error Detection Setting
Use Error Detection Settings to determine the action that is taken when the print log cannot be stored to the server due to a network error.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > Store Print Log to Network .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. In the Error Detection Setting section, select the Cancel Print or Ignore Log & Print option.
Option
Cancel
Description
If you select the Cancel Print option, the print jobs are cancelled when the print log cannot be stored to the server.
Ignore
Log &
Even if you select the Cancel Print option, your machine will print a received fax.
(For MFC models)
If you select the Ignore Log & Print option, the machine prints the documentation even if the print log cannot be stored to the server.
When the Store Print Log function has recovered, the print log is recorded as follows: a. If the log cannot be stored at the end of printing, the number of printed pages will not be recorded.
b. If the print log cannot be stored at the beginning and the end of printing, the print log of the job will not be recorded. When the function has recovered, the error is reflected in the log.
6. Click Submit to display the Test Print Log to Network page.
To test your settings, click Yes and then go to the next step.
To skip the test, click No . Your settings will be submitted automatically.
7. The machine will test your settings.
8. If your settings are accepted, Test OK appears on the screen.
If Test Error appears, check all settings, and then click Submit to display the Test page again.
412
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
413
Store Print Log to Network > Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock
3.0
Use Store Print Log to Network with Secure Function Lock 3.0
When Secure Function Lock 3.0 is active, the names of the registered users for copy, Fax RX (for MFC models),
Web Connect Print and USB Direct Print (if available) are recorded in the Store Print Log to Network report.
When the Active Directory Authentication is enabled, user name will be recorded in the Store Print Log to
Network report:
Related Information
•
414
Home > Security > Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Before turning the machine's Setting Lock on, write down and save your password. If you forget the password, you must reset all passwords stored in the machine by contacting your administrator or Brother customer service.
•
415
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel > Setting Lock Overview
Setting Lock Overview
Use the Setting Lock feature to block unauthorised access to machine settings.
When Setting Lock is set to On, you cannot access the machine settings without entering the password.
•
•
Change the Setting Lock Password
•
416
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel >
> Set the
Setting Lock Password
Set the Setting Lock Password
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Setting Lock] option, and then press OK .
4. Enter a four-digit number for the password.
To enter each digit, press a or b to select a number, and then press OK .
5. Press OK .
6. When the LCD displays [Verify:] , re-enter the password.
7. Press OK .
8. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] .
2. Enter a four-digit number for the password.
3. Press [OK] .
4. When the LCD displays [Verify:] , re-enter the password.
5. Press [OK] .
6. Press .
Related Information
•
417
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel >
> Change the Setting Lock Password
Change the Setting Lock Password
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Setting Lock] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [Set Password] option, and then press OK .
5. Enter the current four-digit password.
6. Press OK .
7. Enter a new four-digit password.
8. Press OK .
9. When the LCD displays [Verify:] , re-enter the password.
10. Press OK .
11. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press
Password] .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Set
2. Enter the current four-digit password.
3. Press [OK] .
4. Enter a new four-digit password.
5. Press [OK] .
6. When the LCD displays [Verify:] , re-enter the password.
7. Press [OK] .
8. Press .
Related Information
•
418
Lock the Machine Settings from the Control Panel >
> Turn
Setting Lock On
Turn Setting Lock On
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Setting Lock] option, and then press OK .
4. Press OK when the LCD displays [On] .
5. Enter the current four-digit password.
6. Press OK .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press
Off ⇒ On] .
[Settings] > [All Settings]
2. Enter the current four-digit password.
> [General Setup] > [Setting Lock] > [Lock
3. Press [OK] .
To turn Setting Lock off, press on the LCD, enter the current four-digit password, and then press [OK] .
Related Information
•
419
Home > Security > Use Global Network Detection Features
Use Global Network Detection Features
When you use your machine on a private network, use the Global Network Detection feature to avoid a risk from unexpected attacks from the global network.
•
Enable Global IP Address Detection
•
Block Communications from the Global Network
420
Use Global Network Detection Features
> Enable Global IP Address Detection
Enable Global IP Address Detection
Use this feature to check your machine's IP address. When your machine is assigned to a global IP address, an alert is displayed on the machine.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [Global Detect] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [Allow Detect] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to select [On] , and then press OK .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press
[On] .
2. Press .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Global Detect] > [Allow Detect] >
Related Information
•
Use Global Network Detection Features
421
Use Global Network Detection Features
> Block Communications from the Global
Network
Block Communications from the Global Network
When you enable this feature, it limits receiving jobs from devices with global IP addresses
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Network] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [Global Detect] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [Reject Access] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to select [On] , and then press OK .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press
> [On] .
2. Press .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Global Detect] > [Reject Access]
Related Information
•
Use Global Network Detection Features
422
Mobile/Web Connect
•
•
•
Mopria ™ Print Service and Mopria ™ Scan
•
•
Register an External IC Card Reader
423
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Web Connect
Brother Web Connect
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
•
•
Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect
•
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
•
424
> Brother Web Connect Overview
Brother Web Connect Overview
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Certain websites provide services that allow users to upload and view images and files on the websites. Your
Brother machine can scan images and upload them to these services, and also download and print images that are already uploaded to these services.
1. Printing
2. Scanning
3. Photos, images, documents, and other files
4. Web Service
To use Brother Web Connect, your Brother machine must be connected to a network that has access to the
Internet, through either a wired or wireless connection.
For network setups that use a proxy server, the machine must also be configured to use a proxy server. If you are unsure of your network configuration, check with your network administrator.
A proxy server is a computer that serves as an intermediary between computers without a direct Internet connection, and the Internet.
Related Information
•
•
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
425
>
> Configure the
Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using the Machine's Control Panel
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If your network uses a proxy server, the following proxy server information must be configured on the machine:
• Proxy server address
• Port number
• User Name
• Password
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Network] > [Web Connect Settings] > [Proxy
Settings] > [Proxy Connection] > [On] .
2. Press the option that you want to set, and then enter the proxy server information.
3. Press [OK] .
4. Press .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Configure the Proxy Server Settings Using Web Based Management
426
> Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
Online Services Used with Brother Web Connect
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Use Brother Web Connect to access services from your Brother machine:
To use Brother Web Connect, you must have an account with the online service you want to use. If you do not already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account.
If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.
Google Drive ™
An online document storage, editing, sharing, and file synchronisation service.
URL: drive.google.com
Evernote ®
An online file storage and management service.
URL: www.evernote.com
Dropbox
An online file storage, sharing, and synchronisation service.
URL: www.dropbox.com
OneDrive
An online file storage, sharing, and managing service.
URL: onedrive.live.com
Box
An online document editing and sharing service.
URL: www.box.com
OneNote
An online document editing and sharing service.
URL: www.onenote.com
SharePoint Online
An online content storage, sharing, and managing service.
For more information about any of these services, refer to the respective service's website.
The following table describes which file types can be used with each Brother Web Connect feature:
Accessible Services
Download and print images
Upload scanned images
Google Drive ™
Evernote ®
Dropbox
OneDrive
Box
OneNote
SharePoint Online
JPEG
DOCX
XLSX
PPTX
JPEG
427
Accessible Services
FaxForward to the online services
(available only for certain models)
Google Drive ™
Evernote ®
Dropbox
OneDrive
Box
OneNote
SharePoint Online
DOCX
XLSX
PPTX
TIFF
XPS
JPEG
TIFF
1
2
DOC/XLS/PPT formats are also available for downloading and printing images.
For uploading scanned images, PDF includes Searchable PDF, Signed PDF, Secure PDF, PDF/A and High Compression PDF.
(For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea)
Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not be downloaded.
Related Information
•
428
> Set Up Brother Web Connect
Set Up Brother Web Connect
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
Brother Web Connect Setup Overview
•
Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect
•
Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
•
Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
429
>
Set Up Brother Web Connect > Brother Web
Connect Setup Overview
Brother Web Connect Setup Overview
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Configure the Brother Web Connect settings using the following procedure:
Step 1: Create an account with the service you want to use.
Access the service's website using a computer and create an account. (If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.)
1. User registration
2. Web Service
3. Obtain account
Step 2: Apply for Brother Web Connect access.
Start Brother Web Connect access using a computer and obtain a temporary ID.
1. Enter account information
2. Brother Web Connect application page
3. Obtain temporary ID
Step 3: Register your account information on your machine so you can access the service you want to use.
Enter the temporary ID to enable the service on your machine. Specify the account name as you would like it to be displayed on the machine, and enter a PIN if you would like to use one.
1. Enter temporary ID
430
2. Web Service
Your Brother machine can now use the service.
Related Information
•
431
>
Set Up Brother Web Connect > Create an Account
for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web Connect
Create an Account for Each Online Service Before Using Brother Web
Connect
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To use Brother Web Connect to access an online service, you must have an account with that online service. If you do not already have an account, use a computer to access the service's website and create an account.
After creating an account, log on and use the account once with a computer before using the Brother Web
Connect feature. Otherwise, you may not be able to access the service using Brother Web Connect.
If you already have an account, there is no need to create an additional account.
When you have created an account with the online service you want to use, apply for Brother Web Connect access.
Related Information
•
432
>
Set Up Brother Web Connect > Apply for Brother
Web Connect Access
Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To use Brother Web Connect to access online services, you must first apply for Brother Web Connect access using a computer that has the Brother Software installed.
1. Access the Brother Web Connect application website:
Option Description
Windows Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name
(if not already selected).
Click Do More in the left navigation bar, and then click Brother Web Connect .
You can also access the website directly:
Type bwc.brother.com
into your web browser's address bar.
Mac Type bwc.brother.com
into your web browser's address bar.
The Brother Web Connect page launches.
2. Select the service you want to use.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions and apply for access.
When using SharePoint Online, follow the on-screen instructions to register a document library.
When finished, your temporary ID appears.
4. Make a note of your temporary ID as you will need it to register accounts to the machine. The temporary ID is valid for 24 hours.
5. Close the web browser.
Now that you have a Brother Web Connect access ID, you must register this ID on your machine, and then use your machine to access the web service you want to use.
433
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
434
>
Set Up Brother Web Connect > Register an
Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
Register an Account on Your Brother Machine for Brother Web Connect
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You must enter your Brother Web Connect account information and configure your machine so that it can use
Brother Web Connect to access the service you want.
• You must apply for Brother Web Connect access to register an account on your machine.
• Before you register an account, confirm that the correct date and time are set on the machine.
1. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
2. Press [Web] .
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information and press [OK] . If you want to display this information again, press [Yes] .
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK] .
3. If the information regarding licence agreement appears, make your selection and follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Select the service with which you want to register.
5. Press the service name.
6. If information regarding Brother Web Connect appears, press [OK] .
7. Press [Register/Delete] .
8. Press [Register Account] .
The machine will prompt you to enter the temporary ID you received when you applied for Brother Web
Connect access.
9. Press [OK] .
10. Enter the temporary ID using the LCD.
11. Press [OK] .
An error message will appear on the LCD if the information you entered does not match the temporary ID you received when you applied for access, or if the temporary ID has expired. Enter the temporary ID correctly, or apply for access again to receive a new temporary ID.
The machine will prompt you to enter the account name that you want to be displayed on the LCD.
12. Press [OK] .
13. Enter the name using the LCD.
14. Press [OK] .
15. Do one of the following:
• To set a PIN for the account, press [Yes] . (A PIN prevents unauthorised access to the account.) Enter a four-digit number, and then press [OK] .
• If you do not want to set a PIN, press [No] .
16. When the account information you entered appears, confirm that it is correct.
17. Press [Yes] to register your information as entered.
18. Press [OK] .
19. Press .
435
Registration is complete and your machine can now access the service.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
How to Enter Text on Your Machine
•
Apply for Brother Web Connect Access
436
> Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web
Connect
Scan and Upload Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Upload your scanned photos and documents directly to a web service without using a computer.
Uploaded documents are saved in an album named From_BrotherDevice .
For information regarding restrictions, such as the size or number of documents that can be uploaded, refer to the respective service's website.
If you are a restricted Web Connect user, due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature (available for certain models), you cannot upload the scanned data.
1. Load your document.
2. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
3. Press [Web] .
• You can also press [Scan] > [to Web] .
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information and press [OK] . If you want to display this information again, press [Yes] .
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK] .
4. Select the service that hosts the account to which you want to upload.
5. Select your account name.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
•
437
> Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Documents that have been uploaded to your account can be downloaded directly to your machine and printed.
Documents that other users have uploaded to their own accounts for sharing can also be downloaded to your machine and printed, as long as you have viewing privileges for those documents.
If you are a restricted user for Brother Web Connect due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature (available for certain models), you cannot download the data.
The Secure Function Lock Page Limit feature also applies to print jobs sent using Brother Web Connect.
For Hong Kong, Taiwan and Korea:
Brother Web Connect supports only file names written in English. Files named in the local language will not be downloaded.
Related Information
•
•
Download and Print Using Web Services
438
>
Download and Print Documents Using Brother
Web Connect > Download and Print Using Web Services
Download and Print Using Web Services
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Swipe to display the [Web] option.
2. Press [Web] .
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information and press [OK] . If you want to display this information again, press [Yes] .
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK] .
3. Select the service that hosts the document you want to download and print.
4. If the PIN entry screen appears, enter the four-digit PIN and press [OK] .
Depending on the service, you may have to select the account name from a list.
5. Press [Download: Print] .
6. Select the album you want. Some services do not require documents to be saved in albums. For documents not saved in albums, select [See Unsorted Files] to select documents.
An album is a collection of images. The actual term may differ depending on the service you use. When using Evernote ® , you must select the notebook, and then select the note.
7. Select the thumbnail of the document you want to print. Confirm the document on the LCD and then press
[OK] . Select additional documents to print (you can select up to 10 documents).
8. When finished, press [OK] .
9. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
•
Download and Print Documents Using Brother Web Connect
Related Topics:
•
How to Enter Text on Your Machine
439
> FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
FaxForward to Cloud or E-mail
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
• Use the FaxForward to Cloud feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to your accounts with the available online services.
1
1. Web Service
• Use the FaxForward to E-mail feature to automatically forward incoming faxes to an inbox as email attachments.
Related Information
•
•
Use FaxForward to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email
•
Stop Using FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud location
440
>
> Use FaxForward to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email
Use FaxForward to Forward a Fax to the Cloud or an Email
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Turn the FaxForward feature on to automatically forward incoming faxes to either an online service or an inbox as email attachments.
• If you are a restricted Apps or Fax Receive user, due to the enabled Secure Function Lock feature
(available for certain models), you cannot upload the incoming faxes.
• This feature is available only for monochrome faxes.
• If you turn the FaxForward to Cloud feature on, you cannot use the following options:
[Fax Forward]
[Fax Storage]
[PC Fax Receive]
[Forward to Network]
1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
2. Press [Apps] .
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information and press [OK] . If you want to display this information again, press [Yes] .
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK] .
3. Select [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] .
If the information regarding [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] appears, read it, and then press [OK] .
4. Press [On] .
5. Press [Forward to Cloud] or [Forward to E-mail] .
• If you selected [Forward to Cloud] , choose the online service you want to receive the faxes, and then specify your account name.
• If you selected [Forward to E-mail] , enter the email address you want to receive the faxes as email attachments.
6. Follow the on-screen instructions to complete this operation.
Related Information
•
441
>
> Stop Using
FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud location
Stop Using FaxForward to Forward a Fax to an Email or a Cloud location
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Turn the FaxForward feature off when you want to stop incoming faxes from automatically going to either an online service or an inbox as email attachments.
If there are received faxes still in your machine's memory, you cannot turn the FaxForward feature off.
1. Swipe to display the [Apps] option.
2. Press [Apps] .
• If the information regarding the Internet connection appears on the machine’s LCD, read the information and press [OK] . If you want to display this information again, press [Yes] .
• Occasionally, updates or announcements about Brother Web Connect's features will appear on the
LCD. Read the information, and then press [OK] .
3. Select [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] .
If the information regarding [FaxForward to Cloud/E-mail] appears, read it, and then press [OK] .
4. Press [Off] .
5. Press [OK] .
Related Information
•
442
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > AirPrint
AirPrint
•
•
•
•
•
Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
443
AirPrint Overview
AirPrint is a printing solution for Apple operating systems that allows you to wirelessly print photos, email, web pages, and documents from your iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, and Mac computer without the need to install a driver.
(MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
AirPrint also allows you to send faxes directly from your Mac computer without having to print them and allows you to scan documents to your
Mac computer.
(DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW/DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW)
AirPrint also allows you to scan documents to your Mac computer.
For more information, visit Apple’s website.
Use of the Works with Apple badge means that an accessory has been designed to work specifically with the technology identified in the badge and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
444
AirPrint > Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before printing using macOS, add your machine to the printer list on your Mac computer.
1. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu.
2. Click Printers & Scanners .
3. Click the + icon below the Printers pane on the left.
The Add Printer screen appears.
4. Do one of the following:
• macOS v12
Select your machine, and then select your model's name from the Use pop-up menu.
• macOS v11
Select your machine, and then select AirPrint from the Use pop-up menu.
5. Click Add .
Related Information
•
445
AirPrint > Print Using AirPrint
Print Using AirPrint
•
Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
•
446
> Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
Print from iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch
The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. Load the paper in the paper tray and change the paper tray settings on your machine.
3. Use Safari to open the page that you want to print.
4. Tap or .
5. Tap Print .
6. Make sure your machine is selected.
7. If a different machine (or no machine) is selected, tap Printer .
A list of available machines appears.
8. Tap your machine's name in the list.
9. Select the options you want, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your machine).
10. Tap Print .
Related Information
•
447
> Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
Print Using AirPrint (macOS)
The procedure used to print may vary by application. Safari is used in the example below. Before printing, make sure your machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. Load the paper in the paper tray and change the paper tray settings on your machine.
3. On your Mac computer, use Safari to open the page that you want to print.
4. Click the File menu, and then select Print .
5. Make sure your machine is selected. If a different machine (or no machine) is selected, click the Printer popup menu, and then select your machine.
6. Select the desired options, such as the number of pages to print and 2-sided printing (if supported by your machine).
7. Click Print .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
448
AirPrint > Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)
Scan Using AirPrint (macOS)
Before scanning, make sure your machine is in the scanner list on your Mac computer.
1. Load your document.
2. Select System Preferences from the Apple menu.
3. Click Printers & Scanners .
4. Select your machine from the scanner list.
5. Click the Scan tab, and then click the Open Scanner… button.
The Scanner screen appears.
6. If you place the document in the ADF, select Use Document Feeder checkbox, and then select the size of your document from the scan size setting pop-up menu.
7. Select the destination folder or destination application from the destination setting pop-up menu.
8. Click Show Details to change the scanning settings if needed.
You can crop the image manually by dragging the mouse pointer over the portion you want to scan when scanning from the scanner glass.
9. Click Scan .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
449
AirPrint > Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
Send a Fax Using AirPrint (macOS)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Make sure your machine is in the printer list on your Mac computer. Apple TextEdit is used in the example below.
AirPrint supports only monochrome fax documents.
1. Make sure your machine is turned on.
2. On your Mac computer, open the file that you want to send as a fax.
3. Click the File menu, and then select Print .
4. Click the Printer pop-up menu, and then select your model with Fax in the name.
5. Type the fax recipient information.
6. Click Fax .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
450
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Mopria
™ Print Service and Mopria ™ Scan
Mopria ™ Print Service and Mopria ™ Scan
Mopria
™
Print Service is a print feature and Mopria
™
Scan is a scan feature on
Android ™ mobile devices developed by the Mopria Alliance ™ . With this service, you can connect to the same network as your machine to print and scan without additional setup.
2
1 3
1. Android ™ Mobile Device
2. Wi-Fi ® Connection
3. Your Machine
You must download the Mopria ™ Print Service or Mopria ™ Scan from Google Play ™ and install it on your
Android ™ device. Before using these Mopria ™ features, make sure you enable them on your mobile device.
Related Information
•
451
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Brother Mobile Connect
Brother Mobile Connect
Use Brother Mobile Connect to print and scan from your mobile device.
• For Android ™ devices:
Brother Mobile Connect allows you to use your Brother machine's features directly from your Android ™ device.
Download and install Brother Mobile Connect from Google Play ™ .
• For all iOS or iPadOS supported devices including iPhone, iPad, and iPod touch:
Brother Mobile Connect allows you to use your Brother machine's features directly from your iOS or iPadOS device.
Download and install Brother Mobile Connect from the App Store.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
•
Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
452
Home > Mobile/Web Connect > Register an External IC Card Reader
Register an External IC Card Reader
Related Models : MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
When you connect an external IC card reader, use Web Based Management to register the card reader. Your machine supports HID class driver supported external IC card readers.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Administrator > External Card Reader .
If the left navigation bar is not visible, start navigating from .
5. Enter the necessary information.
6. Click Submit .
7. Restart your Brother machine to activate the configuration.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
453
Brother iPrint&Scan
•
Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
•
Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
454
> Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Access Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
Use Brother iPrint&Scan for Windows and Mac to print and scan from your computer.
The following screen shows an example of Brother iPrint&Scan for Windows. The actual screen may differ depending on the version of the application.
• For Windows
Go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads to download the latest application.
• For Mac
Download and install Brother iPrint&Scan from the App Store.
If prompted, install the driver and software necessary to use your machine. Download the installer from your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
•
Scan Using Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
455
Troubleshooting
Use this section to resolve typical problems you may encounter when using your machine. You can correct most problems yourself.
IMPORTANT
For technical help, you must call Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
If you need additional help, visit support.brother.com
.
First, check the following:
• The machine's power cord is connected correctly and the machine's power is on. See the Quick Setup Guide .
• All of the protective materials have been removed. See the Quick Setup Guide .
• Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.
• The interface cables are securely connected to the machine and the computer, or the wireless connection is set up on both the machine and your computer.
• Error and maintenance messages
If you did not solve the problem with the checks, identify the problem and then see Related Information .
Related Information
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
•
Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
456
> Error and Maintenance Messages
Error and Maintenance Messages
As with any sophisticated office product, errors may occur and supply items may have to be replaced. If this happens, your machine identifies the error or required routine maintenance and shows the appropriate message.
The most common error and maintenance messages are shown in the table.
Follow the instructions in the Action column to solve the error and remove the message.
You can correct most errors and perform routine maintenance by yourself. If you need more tips: Visit support.brother.com/faqs .
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
Error Message
2-sided Disabled
Access Denied
Belt End Soon
Calibrate
Cannot Detect
Cannot Print ##
Cannot Scan ##
Cause Action
The back cover of the machine is not closed completely.
The 2-sided tray is not installed completely.
Close the back cover of the machine until it locks in the closed position.
Install the 2-sided tray firmly in the machine.
The function you want to use is restricted by Secure Function Lock
3.0.
Ask your administrator to check your
Secure Function Lock Settings.
The belt unit is near the end of its life. Order a new belt unit before the LCD displays Replace Belt .
Calibration failed.
Your machine cannot detect the toner cartridge.
• Press and hold down to turn the machine off. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again.
Perform the colour calibration again using the LCD.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact
Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the colour that is indicated on the LCD. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it back into the drum unit again. Re-install the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the machine.
See Related Information : Replace the
Toner Cartridge.
The machine has a mechanical problem.
• Press and hold to turn the machine off, wait a few minutes, and then turn it on again.
• If the problem continues, contact
Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
The machine has a mechanical problem.
• Press and hold to turn the machine off, and then turn it on again.
457
Error Message
Cartridge Error
Condensation
Cooling Down
Cover is Open
Drum !
Cause
The toner cartridge is not installed correctly.
Condensation may have formed inside the machine after a room temperature change.
The temperature inside the machine is too high. The machine pauses its current print job and goes into cooling down mode.
The top cover is not completely closed.
The fuser cover is not completely closed.
The corona wire on the drum unit must be cleaned.
Action
• If the problem continues, contact
Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the colour that is indicated on the LCD. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it back into the drum unit again. Re-install the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the machine.
If the problem continues, contact
Brother customer service or your local
Brother dealer.
Leave the machine turned on. Wait for 30 minutes with the top cover in the open position. Then turn off the machine and close the cover. Turn it on again.
Wait until the machine has finished cooling down. Make sure all vents on the machine are clear of obstructions.
When the machine has cooled down, it will resume printing.
Open and then firmly close the top cover of the machine.
Close the fuser cover located under the back cover of the machine.
Clean the corona wire on the drum unit.
Drum End Soon
Drum Stop
Jam 2-sided
Jam Inside
Jam Manual Feed
The drum unit is near the end of its life.
It is time to replace the drum unit.
The paper is jammed in the 2-sided tray or inside the back cover.
The paper is jammed inside the machine.
The paper is jammed in the manual feed slot of the machine.
See Related Information : Clean the
Corona Wires .
If the problem continues, replace the drum unit with a new one.
Order a new drum unit before you get the Replace Drum message.
Replace the drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the
Drum Unit .
Remove the 2-sided tray and open the back cover to pull out all jammed paper.
Open the top cover, remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies, and gently remove the jammed paper.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies into the machine.
Close the top cover.
Gently remove the jammed paper from in and around the manual feed slot. Reload the paper into the
458
Error Message
Jam Rear
Jam Tray 1
Limit Exceeded
Manual Feed
Media Mismatch
No Belt Unit
No Drum Unit
No Paper T1
No Toner
No Tray T1
No Waste Toner
Out of Memory
Cause
The paper is jammed in the back of the machine.
Action manual feed slot, and then press
Mono Start or Colour Start .
Open the fuser cover and gently remove the jammed paper. Close the fuser cover. If the error message remains, press Mono Start or Colour
Start .
The paper is jammed in the indicated paper tray.
The print limit set in Secure Function
Lock 3.0 was reached.
Pull the paper tray out completely and gently remove all jammed paper. Put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
Ask your administrator to check your
Secure Function Lock Settings.
Manual was selected as the paper source in the printer driver, but there is no paper in the manual feed slot.
The media type specified in the printer driver differs from the paper type specified in the machine's menu.
Place paper in the manual feed slot.
Load the correct type of paper in the tray, and then select the correct media type in the Paper Type setting on the machine.
Reinstall the belt unit.
The belt unit is not installed or not installed correctly.
The drum unit is not installed correctly.
The machine is out of paper, or paper is not loaded correctly in the paper tray.
The toner cartridge is not installed or not installed correctly.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the colour indicated on the LCD.
• Refill paper in the paper tray.
Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it again. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size.
• Do not overfill the paper tray.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly. Remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit, and reinstall the toner cartridge back into the drum unit. Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the machine. If the problem continues, replace the toner cartridge.
Reinstall the paper tray indicated on the LCD.
The paper tray is not installed or not installed correctly.
The waste toner box is not installed or not installed correctly.
The machine's memory is full.
Reinstall the waste toner box.
If a copy operation is in progress, do one of the following:
• Press Mono Start or Colour Start to copy the scanned pages.
• Press Stop/Exit and wait until the other operations in progress finish, and then try again.
If a scan operation is in progress, do one of the following:
• Split the document into multiple parts.
459
Replace Belt
Replace Drum
Replace Toner
Replace WT Box
Self-Diagnostic
Size Error
Size Error DX
Error Message
Print Data Full
Registration
Cause
The machine’s memory is full.
Action
• Reduce the Resolution.
• Reduce the File Size.
• Select the high compression PDF file type.
If a print operation is in progress, press Stop/Exit , and then reduce the print resolution.
Press Stop/Exit and delete the previously stored secure print data.
Registration failed.
It is time to replace the belt unit.
It is time to replace the drum unit.
• Press and hold down to turn the machine off. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again.
Perform the colour registration again using the LCD.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact
Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Replace the belt unit with a new one.
See Related Information : Replace the
Belt Unit.
Replace the drum unit for the colour indicated on the LCD.
Reset the drum unit counter.
See Related Information : Replace the
Drum Unit.
If this message is displayed even after replacing the drum unit with new one, the drum unit counter was not reset.
The toner cartridge is at the end of its life. The machine stops all print operations.
Replace the toner cartridge for the colour indicated on the LCD.
See Related Information : Replace the
Toner Cartridge .
It is time to replace the waste toner box.
Replace the waste toner box with a new one.
See Related Information : Replace the
Waste Toner Box.
The fuser unit does not work correctly. Press and hold
The fuser unit is too hot.
to turn the machine off, wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the machine idle for 15 minutes with the power on.
Choose a paper size supported by the defined tray.
The paper size defined in the printer driver is not supported by the defined tray.
The paper size specified in the machine's paper size setting is not available for automatic 2-sided printing.
The paper in the tray is not the correct size and is not available for automatic 2-sided printing.
Press size.
Stop/Exit (if required).
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set the tray for that paper
Choose a paper size supported by 2sided printing.
Paper size available for automatic 2sided printing is A4.
460
Error Message
Size Mismatch
Toner Error
Toner Low
WT Box End Soon
Cause
The paper in the tray is not the correct size.
One or more toner cartridges are not installed or not installed correctly.
If the LCD displays this message, you can still print. The toner cartridge is near the end of its life.
The waste toner box is almost full.
Action
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set the size of paper for the tray.
Pull out the drum units. Remove all of the toner cartridges, and then put them back into the drum units.
Order a new toner cartridge before the LCD displays Replace Toner .
Order a new waste toner box before the LCD displays Replace WT Box .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Error Message
2-sided Disabled
Access Denied
BT Call Sign On
(For U.K.)
Calibration
Cannot Detect
Cannot Print ##
Cannot Scan
Cause
The back cover of the machine is not closed completely.
The 2-sided tray is not installed completely.
The function you want to use is restricted by Secure Function
Lock 3.0.
The BT Call Sign setting is on.
You cannot change the Receive
Mode from Manual to another mode.
Calibration failed.
Your machine cannot detect the toner cartridge.
Action
Close the back cover of the machine until it locks in the closed position.
Install the 2-sided tray firmly in the machine.
Ask your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
Set the BT Call Sign setting to off.
• Press and hold down to turn the machine off. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again. Perform the colour correction again using the LCD.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the colour that is indicated on the
LCD. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it back into the drum unit again. Re-install the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the machine.
See Related Information : Replace the Toner
Cartridge.
The machine has a mechanical problem.
• Press and hold to turn the machine off, wait a few minutes, and then turn it on again.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
The document is too long for
2 ‑ sided scanning.
Press . For 2-sided scanning, use A4 size paper. Other paper must be within the following size:
Length: 147.3 to 355.6 mm
Width: 105 mm to 215.9 mm
461
Error Message
Cannot Scan ##
Cartridge Error
Comm.Error
Condensation
Cooling Down
Cover is Open
Cover is Open.
Disconnected
Document Jam
Drum !
Cause
The machine has a mechanical problem.
The toner cartridge is not installed correctly.
Action
• Press and hold to turn the machine off, and then turn it on again.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the colour that is indicated on the
LCD. Take out the toner cartridge, and put it back into the drum unit again. Install the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the machine.
If the problem continues, contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Poor telephone line quality caused a communication error.
Condensation may have formed inside the machine after a room temperature change.
The temperature inside the machine is too high. The machine pauses its current print job and goes into cooling down mode.
The top cover is not completely closed.
The fuser cover is not completely closed.
The ADF cover is not completely closed.
The other person or other person's fax machine stopped the call.
The document was not inserted or fed correctly, or the document scanned from the
ADF was too long.
Send the fax again or connect the machine to another telephone line. If the problem continues, contact the telephone company and ask them to check your telephone line.
Leave the machine turned on. Wait for 30 minutes with the top cover in the open position. Then turn off the machine and close the cover. Turn it on again.
Wait until the machine has finished cooling down.
Make sure all vents on the machine are clear of obstructions.
When the machine has cooled down, it will resume printing.
Open and then firmly close the top cover of the machine.
Close the fuser cover located under the back cover of the machine.
Close the ADF cover.
Try to send or receive again.
If calls are stopped repeatedly and you are using a VoIP (Voice over IP) system, try changing the
Compatibility to Basic (for VoIP).
Remove the jammed paper from the ADF unit.
Clear any debris or scraps of paper from the ADF unit paper path.
Press .
The corona wires on the drum unit must be cleaned.
Clean the corona wires on the drum unit.
Drum Stop It is time to replace the drum unit.
See Related Information : Clean the Corona
Wires .
If the problem continues, replace the drum unit with a new one.
Replace the drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
462
Error Message
Jam 2-sided
Jam Inside
Jam Manual Feed
Jam MP Tray
Jam Rear
Jam Tray 1
Jam Tray 2
Limit Exceeded
Manual Feed
Media Type Mismatch
No Belt Unit
No Drum Unit
No HUB Support
No Paper
No Paper MP Tray
Cause
The paper is jammed in the 2sided tray or inside the back cover.
The paper is jammed inside the machine.
Action
Remove the 2-sided tray and open the back cover to pull out all jammed paper.
The paper is jammed in the manual feed slot of the machine.
The paper is jammed in the MP tray.
The paper is jammed in the back of the machine.
The paper is jammed in the indicated paper tray.
A USB hub device is connected to the USB host connector.
The machine is out of paper, or paper is not loaded correctly in the paper tray.
The MP tray is out of paper, or paper is not loaded correctly in the MP tray.
Open the top cover, remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies, and gently remove the jammed paper. Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies into the machine. Close the top cover.
Gently remove the jammed paper from in and around the manual feed slot. Reload the paper into the manual feed slot, and then press Retry .
Gently remove the jammed paper from in and around the MP tray. Reload the paper and press
Retry .
Open the fuser cover and gently remove the jammed paper. Close the fuser cover. If the error message remains, press Retry .
Pull out the paper tray and gently remove all jammed paper as shown in the animation on the
LCD.
Ask your administrator to check your Secure
Function Lock Settings.
Place paper in the manual feed slot.
The print limit set in Secure
Function Lock 3.0 was reached.
Manual was selected as the paper source in the printer driver, but there is no paper in the manual feed slot.
The media type specified in the printer driver differs from the paper type specified in the machine's menu.
The belt unit is not installed or not installed correctly.
The drum unit is not installed correctly.
Load the correct type of paper in the tray indicated on the LCD, and then select the correct media type in the Paper Type setting on the machine.
Reinstall the belt unit.
Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
Disconnect the USB hub device from the USB host connector.
• Refill paper in the paper tray. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it again. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size.
• Do not overfill the paper tray.
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the MP tray. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the MP tray, remove it and load it again. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size.
463
Error Message
No Paper Tray1
No Paper Tray2
No Toner
No Tray T1
No Tray T2
No Waste Toner
Out of Fax Memory
Out of Memory
Print Data Full
Cause
The machine failed to feed paper from the indicated paper tray.
The toner cartridge is not installed or not installed correctly.
Action
Do one of the following:
• Refill paper in the paper tray indicated on the
LCD. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size.
• If paper is in the tray, remove it and load it again. Make sure the paper guides are set to the correct size.
• Do not overfill the paper tray.
Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly. Remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit, and reinstall the toner cartridge back into the drum unit. Reinstall the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly back in the machine. If the problem continues, replace the toner cartridge.
Reinstall the paper tray indicated on the LCD.
The paper tray is not installed or not installed correctly.
The waste toner box is not installed or not installed correctly.
The machine's fax memory is full.
Reinstall the waste toner box.
If you are using the Fax Preview function, delete unwanted received fax data.
If you are using the Memory Receive function and are not using the Fax Preview function, print received fax data.
See Related Information : Print a Fax Stored in the
Machine's Memory .
The machine's memory is full.
If a fax-sending or copy operation is in progress, do one of the following:
• Press Send Now to send the pages scanned so far.
• Press Partial Print to copy the pages scanned so far.
• Press Quit or and wait until the other operations that are in progress finish, and then try again.
If a scan operation is in progress, do one of the following:
• Split the document into multiple parts.
• Reduce the Resolution.
• Reduce the File Size.
• Select the high compression PDF file type.
• Clear faxes from the memory.
If a print operation is in progress, press and reduce the print resolution.
The machine’s memory is full.
Press and delete the previously stored secure print data.
464
Error Message
Registration
Replace Toner
Replace WT Box
Self-Diagnostic
Size Error
Size Error 2-sided
Size Mismatch
Storage Full
Supplies
Belt End Soon
Supplies
Drum End Soon
Supplies
Replace Belt
Supplies
Replace Drum
Cause
Registration failed.
Action
The toner cartridge is at the end of its life. The machine stops all print operations.
While memory is available, faxes are stored in the memory.
It is time to replace the waste toner box.
• Press and hold down to turn the machine off. Wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again. Perform the colour correction again using the LCD.
• Install a new belt unit.
• If the problem continues, contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer.
Replace the toner cartridge for the colour indicated on the LCD.
See Related Information
Cartridge .
: Replace the Toner
Replace the waste toner box with a new one.
See Related Information : Replace the Waste
Toner Box.
The temperature of the fuser unit does not rise to a specified temperature within the specified time.
The fuser unit is too hot.
The paper size defined in the printer driver is not supported by the defined tray.
The paper size specified in the machine's paper size setting is not available for automatic 2sided printing.
The paper in the tray is not the correct size and is not available for automatic 2-sided printing.
Press and hold tray.
Press
to turn the machine off, wait a few seconds, and then turn it on again. Leave the machine idle for 15 minutes with the power on.
Choose a paper size supported by the defined
(if required).
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set the tray for that paper size.
Choose a paper size supported by 2-sided printing.
Paper size available for automatic 2-sided printing is A4.
Load the correct size of paper in the tray and set the size of paper for the tray.
The paper in the tray is not the correct size.
The machine's memory does not have enough free space to store secure print data.
The belt unit is near the end of its life.
Press and delete the previously stored secure print data.
Order a new belt unit before the LCD displays
Replace Belt .
The drum unit is near the end of its life.
Order a new drum unit before the LCD displays
Replace Drum .
It is time to replace the belt unit. Replace the belt unit with a new one.
See Related Information : Replace the Belt Unit.
It is time to replace the drum unit.
If this message is displayed even after replacing the drum unit with new one, the drum unit counter was not reset.
Replace the drum unit for the colour indicated on the LCD.
Reset the drum unit counter.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit.
465
Error Message
Supplies
Toner Low X
(X indicates the toner cartridge or drum unit colour that is near the end of its life. BK=Black,
C=Cyan, M=Magenta,
Y=Yellow.)
Supplies
WT Box End Soon
Toner Error
Cause
If the LCD displays this message, you can still print.
The toner cartridge is near the end of its life.
Action
Order a new toner cartridge before the LCD displays Replace Toner .
Too Many Trays
Touchscreen
Initialisation Failed
Unusable Device
Unusable Device
Remove the Device. Turn the power off and back on again.
Wrong Paper Size MP
Wrong Paper Size T1
Wrong Paper Size T2
The waste toner box is almost full.
Order a new waste toner box before the LCD displays Replace WT Box .
One or more toner cartridges are not installed or not installed correctly.
The number of installed
Optional Trays exceeds the maximum number.
The touchscreen was pressed before the power on initialisation was completed.
Debris may be stuck between the lower part of the touchscreen and its frame.
An unsupported USB device has been connected to the USB host connector.
A defective USB device or a high power consumption USB device has been connected to the USB direct interface.
Pull out the drum units. Remove all the toner cartridges, and then put them back into the drum units.
Reduce the number of Optional Trays.
Make sure nothing is touching the touchscreen.
Insert a piece of stiff paper between the lower part of the touchscreen and its frame and slide it back and forth to push out any debris.
Unplug the device from the USB host connector.
• Unplug the device from the USB direct interface.
• Press and hold to turn the machine off, and then turn it on again.
Refill the paper in the paper tray.
The specified tray ran out of paper during copying and the machine could not feed the same size paper from the next priority tray.
Related Information
•
•
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
•
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
•
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Print a Fax Stored in the Machine's Memory
466
> Error and Maintenance Messages > Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If the LCD displays:
• [Cannot Print] ##
• [Cannot Scan] ##
We recommend transferring your faxes to another fax machine or to your computer.
You can also transfer the Fax Journal report to see if there are any faxes you must transfer.
If there is an error message on the LCD after you transfer the faxes, disconnect your Brother machine from the power source for several minutes, and then reconnect it.
Related Information
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
•
Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
•
Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
•
Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
467
> Error and Maintenance Messages >
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes > Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
Transfer Faxes to Another Fax Machine
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You must set up your Station ID before transferring faxes to another fax machine.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Fax Transfer] .
2. Do one of the following:
• If the LCD displays [No Data] , there are no faxes left in the machine’s memory. Press [Close] . Press
.
• Enter the fax number to which faxes will be forwarded.
3. Press [Fax Start] .
Related Information
•
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
•
468
> Error and Maintenance Messages >
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes > Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
Transfer Faxes to Your Computer
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Make sure you have installed the software and drivers on your computer.
2. Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected). Click PC-FAX in the left navigation bar, and then click Receive .
The PC-FAX Receive window appears.
3. Make sure you have set [PC Fax Receive] on the machine.
If faxes are in the machine’s memory when you set up PC-Fax Receive, the LCD displays [Send Fax to
PC?] .
4. Do one of the following:
• To transfer all faxes to your computer, press [Yes] .
• To exit and leave the faxes in the memory, press [No] .
5. Press .
Related Information
•
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
•
Run the Brother PC-FAX Receive on Your Computer (Windows)
•
Use PC-Fax Receive to Transfer Received Faxes to Your Computer (Windows only)
469
> Error and Maintenance Messages >
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your
Faxes > Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
Transfer the Fax Journal Report to Another Fax Machine
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You must set up your Station ID before transferring the Fax Journal report to another fax machine.
1. Press
Transfer] .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Service] > [Data Transfer] > [Report
2. Enter the fax number to which the Fax Journal report will be forwarded.
3. Press [Fax Start] .
Related Information
•
Unable to Print or Scan -Transfer Your Faxes
Related Topics:
•
470
> Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
Error Messages When Using the Brother Web Connect Feature
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Your machine displays an error message if an error occurs. The most common error messages are shown in the table.
You can correct most errors yourself. If, after reading this table, you still need help, see the latest troubleshooting tips at support.brother.com/faqs .
Connection Error
Error Messages
Connection Error 02
Network connection failed.
Verify that the network connection is good.
Connection Error 03
Connection failed to server.
Check network settings.
Connection Error 07
Connection failed to server.
Wrong Date & Time.
Cause
The machine is not connected to a network.
Action
• Make sure the eligible IP address is assigned to your machine.
• Check your access point/router is active and the Internet connection is established.
• Make sure the wireless router/ access point is on.
• If the Web button was pressed soon after the machine was turned on, the network connection may not have been established yet.
Wait and try again.
•
•
Network or server settings are incorrect.
There is a problem with the network or server.
• Confirm that network settings are correct, or wait and try again later.
• If the Web button was pressed soon after the machine was turned on, the network connection may not have been established yet.
Wait and try again.
See Related Information : Configure
Date and Time Using Web Based
Management .
Date and time settings are incorrect.
Set the date and time correctly. Note that if the machine's power cord is disconnected, the date and time settings may have reset to factory settings.
Authentication Error
Error Messages
Authentication Error 01
Incorrect PIN code. Enter
PIN correctly.
Authentication Error 02
Incorrect or expired ID, or this temporary ID is already used. Enter correctly or reissue temporary ID.
Temporary ID is valid for 24 hours after it is issued.
Cause
The PIN you entered to access the account is incorrect. The PIN is the four-digit number that was entered when registering the account to the machine.
The temporary ID that was entered is incorrect.
The temporary ID that was entered has expired. A temporary ID is valid for 24 hours.
Action
Enter the correct PIN.
Enter the correct temporary ID.
Apply for Brother Web Connect access again and receive a new temporary ID, and then use the new
ID to register the account to the machine.
471
Error Messages
Authentication Error 03
Display name has already been registered. Enter another display name.
Cause
The name you entered as the display name has already been registered to another service user.
Action
Enter a different display name.
Server Error
Error Messages
Server Error 01
Authentication failed. Do the following: 1. Go to http://bwc.brother.com to get a new temporary ID. 2.
Press OK and enter your new temporary ID in the next screen.
Server Error 03
Failed to upload.
Unsupported file or corrupt data. Confirm data of file.
Server Error 13
Service temporarily unavailable. Try again later.
Cause
The machine's authentication information (needed to access the service) has expired or is invalid.
The file you are trying to upload may have one of the following problems:
• The file exceeds the service's limit on number of pixels, file size, etc.
• The file type is not supported.
• The file is corrupted.
There is a problem with the service and it cannot be used now.
Action
Apply for Brother Web Connect access again to receive a new temporary ID, and then use the new
ID to register the account to the machine.
• Check the service's size or format restrictions.
• Save the file as a different type.
• If possible, get a new, uncorrupted version of the file.
Wait and try again. If you get the message again, access the service from a computer to confirm if it is unavailable.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Configure Date and Time Using Web Based Management
472
> Document Jams
Document Jams
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit
•
Document is Jammed under the Document Cover
•
Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF
473
> Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit
Document is Jammed in the Top of the ADF Unit
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
2. Open the ADF cover.
3. Pull the jammed document out to the left. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or scraps to prevent future jams.
4. Close the ADF cover.
5. Press .
Related Information
•
474
> Document is Jammed under the Document Cover
Document is Jammed under the Document Cover
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Remove any paper from the ADF that is not jammed.
2. Lift the document cover.
3. Pull the jammed document out to the right. If the document rips or tears, be sure you remove any debris or scraps to prevent future jams.
4. Close the document cover.
5. Press .
Related Information
•
475
> Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF
Remove Small Scraps of Paper Jammed in the ADF
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Lift the document cover.
2. Insert a piece of stiff paper, such as cardstock, into the ADF to push any small paper scraps through.
(DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW)
(MFC-L8390CDW)
3. Close the document cover.
4. Press .
Related Information
•
476
> Paper Jams
Paper Jams
Always remove the remaining paper from the paper tray, fan and straighten the stack when you are adding new paper. This helps prevent paper jams.
•
•
Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
•
Paper is Jammed in the Manual Feed Slot
•
Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
•
Paper is Jammed in the Output Paper Tray
•
Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
•
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
•
Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
477
> Clear Paper Jams
Clear Paper Jams
If paper is jammed or multiple sheets of paper are fed together frequently, do the following:
• Clean the paper pick-up rollers and the separator pad of paper trays.
See Related Information : Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers .
• Load paper correctly in the tray.
See Related Information : Load Paper .
• Set the correct paper size and paper type on your machine.
See Related Information : Paper Settings .
• Set the correct paper size and paper type on your computer.
See Related Information : Print a Document (Windows) .
See Related Information : Print Using AirPrint .
• Use the recommended paper.
See Related Information : Using Special Paper .
See Related Information : Recommended Print Media .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
•
•
•
•
•
•
478
> Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
Paper is Jammed in the MP tray
Related Models : MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the machine's MP tray, follow these steps:
1. Remove the paper from the MP tray.
2. Remove any jammed paper from in and around the MP tray.
3. Fan the paper stack, and then put it back in the MP tray.
4. Reload paper in the MP tray and make sure the paper stays under the maximum paper height guides (1) on both sides of the tray.
1
5. Follow the instructions on the machine's LCD.
Related Information
•
479
> Paper is Jammed in the Manual Feed Slot
Paper is Jammed in the Manual Feed Slot
Related Models : DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW/DCP-L3555CDW/
DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the machine's manual feed slot, follow these steps:
1. Gently remove any paper that is jammed in or around the manual feed slot.
2. Reload the paper into the manual feed slot.
3. Do one of the following:
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
Press Mono Start or Colour Start to resume printing.
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW
Press [Retry] to resume printing.
Related Information
•
480
> Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
Paper is Jammed in the Paper Tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the paper tray, follow these steps:
1. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
2. Slowly pull out the jammed paper.
Pulling the jammed paper downwards using both hands allows you to remove the paper more easily.
3. Fan the stack of paper to prevent further jams, and slide the paper guides to fit the paper size. Load paper in the paper tray.
4. Make sure the paper is below the maximum paper mark ( b b b ).
481
5. Put the paper tray firmly back into the machine.
Related Information
•
482
> Paper is Jammed in the Output Paper Tray
Paper is Jammed in the Output Paper Tray
When the paper is jammed in the output paper tray, follow these steps:
1. Use both hands to open the scanner.
2. Remove the paper.
3. Push the scanner down with both hands to close it.
Related Information
•
483
> Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
Paper is Jammed in the Back of the Machine
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the back of the machine (Jam
Rear), do the following:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the machine.
2. Open the back cover.
3. Pull the green tabs at the left and right sides towards you to release the fuser cover.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them.
If the grey envelope levers inside the back cover are pulled down to the envelope position, lift these levers to the original position before pulling the green tabs down.
484
4. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the fuser unit.
5. Close the fuser cover.
If you print on envelopes, pull down the grey envelope levers to the envelope position again before printing.
6. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.
Related Information
•
485
> Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
Paper is Jammed Inside the Machine
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam inside the machine, follow these steps:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the machine.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them.
3. Remove all of the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
486
4. Gently remove the jammed paper slowly.
5. Reinsert each toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the machine for all four toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
BK
C
M
Y
6. Close the machine's top cover.
Related Information
•
487
> Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
Paper is Jammed in the 2-sided Tray
If the machine's control panel or the Status Monitor indicates that there is a jam in the 2-sided paper tray, follow these steps:
1. Leave the machine turned on for 10 minutes for the internal fan to cool the extremely hot parts inside the machine.
2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
3. At the back of the machine, pull the 2 ‑ sided tray completely out of the machine.
4. Pull the jammed paper out of the machine or out of the 2 ‑ sided tray.
488
5. Remove paper that may have jammed under the machine due to static electricity.
6. If paper is not caught inside the 2-sided tray, open the back cover.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them.
7. Use both hands to gently pull the jammed paper out of the back of the machine.
8. Close the back cover until it locks in the closed position.
9. Put the 2-sided tray firmly back in the rear of the machine.
10. Put the paper tray firmly back in the front of the machine.
Related Information
•
489
> Printing Problems
Printing Problems
If, after reading the information in this table, you still need help, see the latest troubleshooting tips at support.brother.com/faqs .
Difficulties
No printout
The machine is not printing or has stopped printing.
The headers or footers appear when the document displays on the screen but they do not show up when it is printed.
Suggestions
Check the machine is not in Power Off mode.
If the machine is in Power Off mode, press , and then send the print data again.
Check that the correct printer driver has been installed and selected.
Check to see if the Status Monitor or the machine's control panel displays an error.
Check that the machine is online:
• Windows 11
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control
Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers . Right-click your model's icon, and click See what’s printing . If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make sure Use Printer Offline is not selected.
• Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server
2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click > Windows System > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers . Right-click your model's name. Click See what’s printing . If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make sure that Use Printer
Offline is not selected.
• Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the
Hardware group, click View devices and printers .
Right-click your model's name. Click See what’s printing . If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make sure Use Printer Offline is not selected.
• Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings
> Control Panel . In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers . Right-click your model's name.
Click See what's printing . If printer driver options appear, select your printer driver. Click Printer in the menu bar and make sure that Use Printer Offline is not selected.
Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print data again.
See Related Information : Cancel a Print Job.
There is an unprintable area on the top and bottom of the page. Adjust the top and bottom margins in your document to allow for this.
490
Difficulties
The machine prints unexpectedly or it prints garbage.
The machine prints the first couple of pages correctly, then some pages have missing text.
The machine does not print on both sides of the paper even though the printer driver setting is 2-sided and the machine supports automatic 2-sided printing.
Print speed is too slow.
The machine does not feed paper.
The machine does not feed paper from the MP tray.
(For models with MP Tray)
The machine does not feed paper from the Manual feed slot.
(For models with Manual Feed Slot)
The machine does not feed envelopes.
Suggestions
Cancel the print job and clear it from the machine's memory. The printout may be incomplete. Send the print data again.
See Related Information : Cancel a Print Job.
Check the settings in your application to make sure they are set up to work with your machine.
Confirm that the Brother printer driver is selected in your application's Print window.
Check the settings in your application to make sure they are set up to work with your machine.
Your machine is not receiving all of the data sent from the computer. Make sure you connected the interface cable correctly.
Check the paper size setting in the printer driver. You must select A4 paper. Supported paper weight is 60 to
105 g/m².
Reduce the resolution in the printer driver.
If you have enabled Quiet Mode, disable it in the printer driver or the machine's menu.
When printing continuously, the printing speed may be automatically reduced to lower the temperature inside the machine.
If there is paper in the paper tray, make sure it is straight.
If the paper is curled, straighten it. Sometimes it is helpful to remove the paper, turn the stack over and place it back in the paper tray.
Fan the stack of paper well and place it back to the paper tray.
Reduce the amount of paper in the paper tray, and then try again.
(For models with MP Tray) Make sure MP Tray is not selected for Paper Source in the printer driver.
(For models with Manual Feed Slot) Make sure Manual is not selected for Paper Source in the printer driver.
Clean the paper pick-up rollers.
Fan the paper well and place it back in the MP tray.
Make sure MP Tray is selected as the Paper Source in the printer driver.
Use both hands to push one sheet of paper firmly into the manual feed slot until the top edge of the paper presses against the paper feed rollers. Continue pressing the paper against the rollers until the machine grabs the paper and pulls it in further.
Put only one sheet of paper in the manual feed slot.
Make sure Manual is selected as Paper Source in the printer driver.
(For models with Manual Feed Slot)Load one envelope at a time in the manual feed slot. Your application must be set to print the envelope size you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup or Document Setup menu of your application.
(For models with MP Tray)Load envelopes in the MP tray.
Your application must be set to print the envelope size
491
Difficulties
Print position is misaligned with the preprinted objects.
Suggestions you are using. This is usually done in the Page Setup or
Document Setup menu of your application.
Adjust the print position using the Print Position setting for each paper tray.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Monitor the Status of the Machine from Your Computer (Windows)
•
Load and Print Using the Paper Tray
•
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
•
Load and Print Using the Multi ‑ purpose Tray (MP Tray)
•
492
> Improve the Print Quality
Improve the Print Quality
If you have a print quality problem, print a test page first. If the printout looks good, the problem is probably not the machine. Check the interface cable connections and try printing a different document. If the printout or test page printed from the machine has a quality problem, check the examples of poor print quality and follow the recommendations in the table.
1. To get the best print quality, we suggest using recommended print media. Make sure you use paper that meets our specifications.
2. Check that the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies are installed correctly.
Examples of poor print quality
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGH abcdefghijk
ABCD abcde
01234
Printed pages are compressed, horizontal stripes appear, or characters in the top, bottom, left, or right margins are cut off
Recommendation
Adjust the print margins in your document's application and reprint the job.
• Choose Text or Receipt in the copy quality setting.
• Adjust the copy density and contrast.
Coloured letters and thin letters in the original document are light or faint in the copy
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Colours are light or faint on the whole page
• Use the machine's LCD to perform calibration.See
Related Information : Correct Colour Printing .
• Adjust the copy density and contrast if you are copying.
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off on the LCD or in the printer driver.
See Related Information : Reduce Toner Consumption .
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver matches the type of paper you are using.
• Shake all four toner cartridges gently.
• Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry, soft lint-free cloth.
See Related Information : Clean the LED Heads .
493
Examples of poor print quality
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Recommendation
• Wipe the windows of all four LED heads with a dry, soft lint-free cloth.
• Wipe the scanner glass strip with a dry lint free soft cloth.
• Make sure foreign material such as a torn piece of paper, sticky notes, or dust is not inside the machine or around the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Vertical white streaks or bands appear on the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
• Wipe the scanner glass strip with a dry lint free soft cloth.
• Clean all four corona wires (one for each colour) inside the drum unit by sliding the green tab. Make sure the green tab of the corona wire is in the home position (1).
1
Vertical coloured streaks or bands appear on the page
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Horizontal coloured lines appear on the page
• Replace the toner cartridge that matches the colour of the streak or band.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit support.brother.com/faqs and view the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page for your model.
See Related Information : Replace the Toner Cartridge .
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
• Identify the colour causing the problem and replace the toner cartridge that matches the colour of the line.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information : Replace the Toner Cartridge .
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
494
Examples of poor print quality
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
White spots
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Blank page or some missing colours
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Recommendation
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver matches the type of paper you are using.
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity and high temperatures may cause this print quality problem.
• If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages, the drum may have foreign material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean the drum unit.
See Related Information : Clean the Drum Unit .
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
• Identify the colour causing the problem and install a new toner cartridge.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information : Replace the Toner Cartridge .
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
• If the problem is not solved after printing a few pages, the drum may have foreign material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface. Clean the drum unit.
See Related Information : Clean the Drum Unit.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
Coloured spots at 75 mm
Identify the colour causing the problem and install a new toner cartridge.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information : Replace the Toner Cartridge .
Coloured spots at 29 mm
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Toner scatter or toner stain
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as high humidity and high temperatures may cause this print quality problem.
• Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner cartridge.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information : Replace the Toner Cartridge .
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
The colour of your printouts is not what you expected • To improve the colour density, perform the colour correction using the LCD.
• To adjust the print position of colours for sharper edges, perform the colour registration using the LCD.
495
Examples of poor print quality
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Colour offset
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Uneven colour density across the page
A
B
C
D
E
W X Y Z
Missing thin lines in images
Recommendation
• Adjust the copy density and contrast if you are copying.
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off on the LCD or in the printer driver.
• If the print quality of the black portion is not what you expected, select the Enhance Black Printing checkbox in the printer driver.
• Clear the Improve Grey Colour checkbox in the printer driver.
• Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner cartridge.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information : Replace the Toner Cartridge .
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
• Make sure the machine is on a solid level surface.
• Perform the colour correction using the LCD.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
• Install a new belt unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Belt Unit .
• Perform the colour correction using the LCD.
• Adjust the copy density and contrast if you are copying.
• Clear the Improve Grey Colour checkbox in the printer driver.
• Identify the colour causing the problem and put in a new toner cartridge.
To identify the colour of the toner cartridge, visit support.brother.com/faqs to see the FAQs &
Troubleshooting page.
See Related Information : Replace the Toner Cartridge .
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
• Make sure Toner Save mode is off on the LCD or in the printer driver.
• Change the print resolution.
• If you use a Windows printer driver, select Improve
Pattern Printing in Print Setting of the Basic tab.
496
Examples of poor print quality
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Wrinkled printout
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Ghosting images
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ. 0123456789. abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz.
Toner smears easily
Curled or wavy image
Envelope creases
Recommendation
• Check the paper type and quality.
• Make sure the back cover is closed correctly.
• Make sure the two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up position.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver matches the type of paper you are using.
• Check the machine’s environment. Conditions such as low humidity and low temperatures may cause this print quality problem.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver matches the type of paper you are using.
• Make sure the two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up position.
• Install a new drum unit.
See Related Information : Replace the Drum Unit .
• Make sure the two grey levers inside the back cover are in the up position.
• Make sure the media type setting in the printer driver matches the type of paper you are using.
• Select Improve Toner Fixing mode in the printer driver.
If this selection does not provide enough improvement, change the printer driver setting in
Media Type to a thick setting. If you are printing an envelope, select Env. Thick in the media type setting.
• Select Reduce Paper Curl mode in the printer driver.
If the problem is not solved, select Plain Paper in the media type setting.
• If you are printing an envelope, select Env. Thin in the
Media Type Setting of the printer driver.
• If you do not use the machine often, the paper may have been in the paper tray too long. Turn over the stack of paper in the paper tray. Also, fan the paper stack and then rotate the paper 180° in the paper tray.
• Store the paper where it will not be exposed to high temperatures and high humidity.
• Open the back cover (Face up output tray) to let the printed paper exit onto the Face up output tray.
• Make sure the envelope levers inside the back cover are pulled down to the envelope position when you print envelopes.
NOTE
When you have finished printing, open the back cover and reset the two grey levers back to their original position (1) by lifting them up until they stop.
497
Examples of poor print quality Recommendation
1
1
• (For models with MP Tray) If creases occur with the envelope levers in the envelope position, print with the back cover open and feed one envelope at a time from the MP tray.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
498
> Telephone and Fax Problems
Telephone and Fax Problems
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Telephone Line or Connections
Difficulties
Dialling does not work.
(No dial tone)
The machine does not answer when called.
Handling Incoming Calls
Suggestions
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or
VoIP services, contact your service provider for connection instructions.
(Available only for some countries.)
Change the Tone/Pulse setting.
If an external phone is connected to the machine, send a manual fax by lifting the handset of the external telephone and dialling the number using the external telephone. Wait to hear the fax receiving tones before sending a fax.
If there is no dial tone, connect a known working telephone and telephone line cord to the socket. Then lift the external telephone’s handset and listen for a dial tone. If there is still no dial tone, ask your telephone company to check the line and/or wall socket.
Make sure the machine is in the correct receive mode for your setup.
Check for a dial tone. If possible, call your machine to hear it answer. If there is still no answer, check that the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If there is no ringing when you call your machine, ask your telephone company to check the line.
Difficulties
Sending a Fax
Call to the machine.
Custom features on a single line.
Suggestions
If you answered on an extension or external telephone, press your Remote Activation Code (the factory setting is *51). If you answered on the external telephone, press the Start button to receive the fax.
When your machine answers, hang up.
If you have Call Waiting, Voice Mail, an answering machine, an alarm system or other custom feature on a single telephone line with your machine, it may create a problem sending or receiving faxes.
For Example: If you subscribe to Call Waiting or some other custom service and its signal comes through the line while your machine is sending or receiving a fax, the signal can temporarily interrupt or disrupt the faxes. Brother’s ECM (Error Correction Mode) feature should help overcome this problem. This condition is related to the telephone system industry and is common to all devices that send and receive information on a single, shared line with custom features. If avoiding a slight interruption is crucial to your business, we recommend using a separate telephone line with no custom features.
Receiving Faxes
Difficulties
Cannot receive a fax.
Suggestions
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or VoIP services, contact your service provider for connection instructions. If you are using a VoIP system, try changing the
VoIP setting to Basic (for VoIP) . This will lower modem speed and turn off Error Correction Mode
(ECM).
499
Difficulties
Cannot receive a fax.
Suggestions
Make sure the machine is in the correct Receive Mode. This is determined by the external devices and telephone subscriber services you have on the same line as the Brother machine.
• If you have a dedicated fax line and want your Brother machine to automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select Fax Only mode.
• If your Brother machine shares a line with an external answering machine, you should select the
External TAD mode. In External TAD mode, your Brother machine will receive incoming faxes automatically and voice callers will be able to leave a message on your answering machine.
• If your Brother machine shares a line with other telephones and you want it to automatically answer all incoming faxes, you should select the Fax/Tel mode. In Fax/Tel mode, your Brother machine will receive faxes automatically and produce a pseudo/double-ring to alert you to answer voice calls.
• If you do not want your Brother machine to answer any incoming faxes automatically, you should select the Manual mode. In Manual mode, you must answer every incoming call and activate the machine to receive faxes.
Another device or service at your location may be answering the call before your Brother machine answers. To test this, lower the Ring Delay setting:
• If the Receive Mode is set to Fax Only or Fax/Tel, reduce the Ring Delay to the minimum value
(excluding “0”).
See Related Information : Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay) .
• If the Receive Mode is set to External TAD, reduce the number of rings programmed on your answering machine to two.
• If the Receive Mode is set to Manual, DO NOT adjust the Ring Delay setting.
Have someone send you a test fax:
• If you received the test fax successfully, your machine is operating correctly. Remember to reset your Ring Delay or answering machine setting back to your original setting. If receiving problems recur after resetting the Ring Delay, then a person, device, or subscriber service is answering the fax call before the machine has a chance to answer.
• If you were not able to receive the fax, then another device or subscriber service may be interfering with your fax reception or there may be a problem with your fax line.
If you are using a telephone answering machine (External TAD mode) on the same line as the
Brother machine, make sure your answering machine is set up correctly.
1. Set your answering machine to answer in one or two rings.
2. Record the outgoing message on your answering machine.
• Record five seconds of silence at the beginning of your outgoing message.
• Limit your speaking to 20 seconds.
• End your outgoing message with your Remote Activation Code for people sending manual faxes. For example: “After the beep, leave a message or press *51 and Start to send a fax.”
3. Set your answering machine to answer calls.
4. Set your Brother machine’s Receive Mode to External TAD.
See Related Information : Choose the Correct Receive Mode .
Make sure your Brother machine’s Fax Detect feature is turned On. Fax Detect is a feature that allows you to receive a fax even if you answered the call on an external or extension telephone.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line or if you are using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic (for VoIP) .
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.
Sending Faxes
Difficulties
Cannot send a fax.
Suggestions
Check all line cord connections. Make sure the telephone line cord is plugged into the telephone wall socket and the LINE socket of the machine. If you subscribe to DSL or
VoIP services, contact your service provider for connection instructions.
Make sure you pressed Fax and the machine is in Fax mode.
Print the Transmission Verification Report and check for an error.
500
Difficulties
Cannot send a fax.
Poor quality of sent faxes.
Transmission Verification
Report says
RESULT:ERROR.
Sent faxes are blank.
Suggestions
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function Lock settings.
Ask the other party to check that the receiving machine has paper.
Try changing your resolution to Fine or S.Fine. Make a copy to check your machine’s scanner operation. If the copy quality is poor, clean the scanner.
There is probably temporary noise or static on the line. Try sending the fax again. If you are sending a PC-Fax message and get RESULT:ERROR on the Transmission
Verification Report, your machine may be out of memory. To free up extra memory, you can turn Fax Storage off, print fax messages in memory or cancel a delayed fax.
If the problem continues, ask the telephone company to check your telephone line.
If you often get transmission errors due to possible interference on the telephone line or if you are using a VoIP system, try changing the Compatibility setting to Basic (for
VoIP).
Make sure you are loading the document correctly. When using the ADF, the document should be face up. When using the scanner glass, the document should be face down.
Black vertical lines on faxes you send are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the glass strip. Clean the glass strip.
Vertical black lines when sending a fax.
Printing received faxes
Difficulties
• Condensed print
• Horizontal streaks
• Top and bottom sentences are cut off
• Missing lines
Suggestions
This is usually caused by a poor telephone connection. Do a test copy; if your copy looks good, you probably had a bad connection, with static or interference on the telephone line. Ask the other party to send the fax again.
Vertical black lines when receiving The corona wires for printing may be dirty.Clean the corona wires in the drum unit.
The sender’s scanner may be dirty. Ask the sender to make a copy to see if the problem is with the sending machine. Try receiving from another fax machine.
Received faxes appear as split or blank pages.
Left and right margins are cut off or a single page is printed on two pages.
If the received faxes are divided and printed on two pages or if you get an extra blank page, your paper size setting may not be correct for the paper you are using.
Turn Auto Reduction on.
Related Information
•
•
•
Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems
Related Topics:
•
Set the Number of Rings Before the Machine Answers (Ring Delay)
•
Choose the Correct Receive Mode
501
> Set Dial Tone Detection
Set Dial Tone Detection
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Setting the Dial Tone to [Detection] shortens the Dial Tone detect pause.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Dial Tone] .
2. Press [Detection] or [No Detection] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
502
> Set Telephone Line Compatibility for
Interference and VoIP Systems
Set Telephone Line Compatibility for Interference and VoIP Systems
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Problems sending and receiving faxes due to possible interference on the telephone line may be solved by reducing the modem speed to minimise errors in fax transmission. If you are using a Voice over IP (VoIP) service, we recommend changing the compatibility to Basic (for VoIP).
• VoIP is a type of phone system that uses an Internet connection, rather than a traditional phone line.
• Telephone providers frequently bundle VoIP together with Internet and cable services.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Compatibility] .
2. Press the option you want.
• Select [High] to set the modem speed to 33600 bps.
• Select [Normal] to set the modem speed to 14400 bps.
• Select [Basic(for VoIP)] to reduce the modem speed to 9600 bps and turn off Error Correction
Mode (ECM). Unless interference is a recurring problem on your telephone line, you may prefer to use this option only when needed.
3. Press .
Related Information
•
503
> Network Problems
Network Problems
•
•
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
•
Check Your Machine's Network Settings
•
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
504
> Network Problems > Error Messages
Error Messages
The most common error messages are shown in the table.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
Error Messages
Cannot Connect
Maximum limit of connected devices has been reached.
Authentication
Error, contact your administrator.
Connection Error Other devices are trying to connect to the Wi-Fi Direct network at the same time.
Connection Fail The Brother machine and your mobile device cannot communicate during the Wi-Fi
Direct network configuration.
File Access
Error, contact your administrator.
Cause
The maximum number of mobile devices are already connected to the Wi-Fi Direct network when the Brother machine is the Group Owner.
Your authentication setting for the Store Print Log to Network feature is not correct.
The Brother machine cannot access the destination folder for the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
Log Access Error In Web Based Management, you have selected the Cancel
Print option in the Error
Detection Setting section of the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
No Device When configuring the Wi-Fi
Direct network, the Brother machine cannot find your mobile device.
Action
After the current connection between your Brother machine and another mobile device has shut down, try to configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again. You can confirm the connection status by printing the Network Configuration
Report.
• Make sure the Username and Password in
Authentication Setting are correct. If the username is part of a domain, enter the username in one of the following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
• Make sure the time of the log file server matches the time from the SNTP server, or the Date&Time settings.
• Make sure the SNTP time server settings are configured correctly so the time matches the time used for authentication by Kerberos or NTLMv2. If there is no
SNTP server, make sure the Date&Time and Time
Zone settings are set correctly using Web Based
Management or the control panel so the machine matches the time being used by the server providing the authentication.
Make sure there are no other devices trying to connect to the Wi-Fi Direct network, and then try to configure the Wi-Fi
Direct settings again.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to an obstruction-free area.
• If you are using the PIN Method of WPS, make sure you have entered the correct PIN.
• Make sure the destination folder name is correct.
• Make sure the destination folder is write-enabled.
• Make sure the print log file is not locked. If it is, contact your network administrator.
Wait for about 60 seconds until this message disappears from the LCD.
•
•
Make sure your machine and mobile device are in the
Wi-Fi Direct mode.
Move the mobile device closer to your Brother machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to an obstruction-free area.
• If you are manually configuring the Wi-Fi Direct network, make sure you have entered the correct password.
505
Error Messages
Server Timeout, contact your administrator.
Wrong Date &
Time, contact your administrator.
Cause
The Brother machine cannot connect to the server for the
Store Print Log to Network feature.
The Brother machine does not obtain the time from the SNTP time server or you have not configured the Date&Time for the machine.
Action
• If your mobile device has a configuration page for obtaining an IP address, make sure your mobile device's
IP address has been configured via DHCP.
•
•
•
Make sure your server address is correct.
Make sure your server is connected to the network.
Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
• Make sure the settings to access the SNTP time server are configured correctly in Web Based Management.
• Confirm the Date&Time settings of your machine are correct in Web Based Management.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Error Messages
The maximum number of devices are already connected using
Wi-Fi Direct.
Cause
The maximum number of mobile devices are already connected to the Wi-Fi Direct network when the Brother machine is the Group Owner.
Action
After the current connection between your Brother machine and another mobile device has shut down, try to configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again. You can confirm the connection status by printing the Network
Configuration Report.
Authentication
Error, contact your administrator.
Check User ID and
Password.
Your authentication setting for the Store Print Log to Network feature is not correct.
The Kerberos Authentication error.
• Make sure the Username and Password in
Authentication Setting are correct. If the username is part of a domain, enter the username in one of the following styles: user@domain or domain\user.
• Make sure the time of the log file server matches the time from the SNTP server, or the Date&Time settings.
• Make sure the SNTP time server settings are configured correctly so the time matches the time used for authentication by Kerberos or NTLMv2. If there is no SNTP server, make sure the Date&Time and Time
Zone settings are set correctly using Web Based
Management or the control panel so the machine matches the time being used by the server providing the authentication.
Make sure you have entered a correct user name and a password for the Kerberos server. For more information on the Kerberos server settings, contact your network administrator.
The date, time and time zone settings of the Brother machine are not correct.
Confirm your machine's date, time, and time zone settings.
The DNS server configuration is not correct.
The Brother machine cannot connect to the Kerberos server.
Connection Error Other devices are trying to connect to the Wi-Fi Direct network at the same time.
Connection Failed The Brother machine and your mobile device cannot communicate during the Wi-Fi
Direct network configuration.
Contact your network administrator for the information on the DNS server settings.
Contact your network administrator for the information on the Kerberos server settings.
Make sure there are no other devices trying to connect to the Wi-Fi Direct network, and then try to configure the Wi-
Fi Direct settings again.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to an obstruction-free area.
506
Error Messages
File Access
Error, contact your administrator.
Cause
The Brother machine cannot access the destination folder for the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
Action
• If you are using the PIN Method of WPS, make sure you have entered the correct PIN.
• Make sure the destination folder name is correct.
• Make sure the destination folder is write-enabled.
• Make sure the print log file is not locked. If it is, contact your network administrator.
Wait for about 60 seconds until this message disappears from the LCD.
Log Access Error In Web Based Management, you have selected the Cancel
Print option in the Error
Detection Setting section of the Store Print Log to
Network feature.
No Device
Server Timeout, contact your administrator.
Server Timeout
Wrong Date &
Time, contact your administrator.
Internal Error
When configuring the Wi-Fi
Direct network, the Brother machine cannot find your mobile device.
• Make sure your machine and mobile device are in the
Wi-Fi Direct mode.
• Move the mobile device closer to your Brother machine.
• Move your Brother machine and the mobile device to an obstruction-free area.
• If you are manually configuring the Wi-Fi Direct network, make sure you have entered the correct password.
• If your mobile device has a configuration page for obtaining an IP address, make sure your mobile device's IP address has been configured via DHCP.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
The Brother machine cannot connect to the server for the
Store Print Log to Network feature.
The Brother machine cannot connect to the LDAP server.
The Brother machine cannot connect to the Active Directory server.
The Brother machine does not obtain the time from the SNTP time server or you have not configured the Date&Time for the machine.
The Brother machine's LDAP protocol is disabled.
The Brother machine's CIFS protocol is disabled.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
• Make sure your server address is correct.
• Make sure your server is connected to the network.
• Make sure the machine is connected to the network.
• Make sure the settings to access the SNTP time server are configured correctly in Web Based Management.
• Confirm the Date&Time settings of your machine are correct in Web Based Management.
Confirm your authentication method, and then enable the necessary protocol setting in Web Based Management.
Related Information
•
507
> Network Problems > Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool to fix the Brother machine's network settings. It will assign the correct
IP address and Subnet Mask.
Make sure your machine is turned on and is connected to the same network as your computer.
1. Launch ( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already selected).
2. Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Network Connection Repair Tool .
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.
4. Check the diagnosis by printing the Network Configuration Report or the Printer Settings page.
The Network Connection Repair Tool will start automatically if you select the Enable Connection Repair
Tool option in the Status Monitor. Right-click the Status Monitor screen, and then click Other Settings >
Enable Connection Repair Tool . This is not recommended when your network administrator has set the
IP address to Static, since it will automatically change the IP address.
If the correct IP address and the Subnet Mask are still not assigned even after using the Network Connection
Repair Tool, ask your network administrator for this information.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Print the Network Configuration Report
•
My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
•
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
508
> Network Problems > Check Your Machine's Network Settings
Check Your Machine's Network Settings
•
Print the Network Configuration Report
•
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
509
> Network Problems > If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
If you think there is a problem with your machine's network environment, check the following topics. You can correct most problems yourself.
If you need additional help, visit support.brother.com/faqs .
•
I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
•
My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
•
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
510
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
> I
Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
I Cannot Complete the Wireless Network Setup Configuration
Turn your wireless router off and back on. Then, try to configure the wireless settings again. If you are unable to resolve the problem, follow the instructions below:
Investigate the problem using the WLAN Report.
Cause
Your security settings (SSID/
Network Key) are not correct.
Action
Confirm the security settings using Wireless Setup Helper
(Windows). For more information and to download the utility, go to your model's Downloads page at support.brother.com/downloads .
Select and confirm that you are using the correct security settings.
See the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router for information on how to find the security settings.
The manufacturer's name or model number of the wireless LAN access point/router may be used as the default security settings.
Consult with the access point/router manufacturer, your Internet provider, or network administrator.
Your Brother machine's MAC address is not allowed.
Confirm that the Brother machine's MAC Address is allowed in the filter.
You can find the MAC Address on your Brother machine's control panel.
Your wireless LAN access point/router is in Stealth mode (not broadcasting the
SSID).
Your machine is trying to connect to a 5 GHz Wi-Fi network. The current channel set on your wireless
LAN access point/router is not supported.
Your security settings (SSID/ password) are not correct.
• Enter the correct SSID or Network Key manually.
• Check the SSID or the Network Key in the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router and reconfigure the wireless network setup.
Change the channel on your wireless LAN access point/router to a channel supported by your machine.
1. Confirm the channels supported by your machine. Go to support.brother.com/g/d/a5m6/ , select your model, and then click
Download for more information.
2. Check your wireless LAN access point/router‘s channel setting.
Make sure it is set to one of the channels supported by your machine, and not set to "Auto" or "Automatic". For more information about changing the channel setting, see the instructions supplied with your wireless LAN access point/router.
3. Try to connect your machine to your Wi-Fi network again.
Confirm the SSID and password.
When you are configuring the network manually, the SSID and password are displayed on your Brother machine. If your mobile device supports the manual configuration, the SSID and password will be displayed on your mobile device’s screen.
You are using Android ™ 4.0. If your mobile device disconnects (approximately six minutes after using Wi-Fi Direct), try the one-push configuration using WPS
(recommended) and set the Brother machine as a Group Owner.
Your Brother machine is placed too far from your mobile device.
Move your Brother machine within about 3.3 feet (1 metre) of the mobile device when you configure the Wi-Fi Direct network settings.
There are some obstructions
(walls or furniture, for example) between your machine and the mobile device.
Move your Brother machine to an obstruction-free area.
Interface
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wireless
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct
511
Cause
There is a wireless computer, Bluetooth ® supported device, microwave oven, or digital cordless phone near the
Brother machine or your mobile device.
You have checked and tried all of the above, but your
Brother machine still cannot complete the Wi-Fi Direct configuration.
Action
Move other devices away from the Brother machine or your mobile device.
• Turn your Brother machine off and back on. Then, try to configure the Wi-Fi Direct settings again.
• If you are using your Brother machine as a client, confirm how many devices are allowed on the current Wi-Fi Direct network, and then check how many devices are connected.
Interface
Wi-Fi Direct
Wi-Fi Direct
For Windows
If your wireless connection has been interrupted, and you have checked and tried all of the above, we recommend using the Network Connection Repair Tool.
Related Information
•
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
Related Topics:
•
Configure Your Machine for a Wireless Network When the SSID Is Not Broadcast
•
512
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's
Network > My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
Cause
Your security software blocks your machine's access to the network.
(The network scanning feature does not work. )
Your security software blocks your machine's access to the network.
(The network PC-Fax
Receive feature does not work.)
(Windows)
Your security software blocks your machine's access to the network.
Your Brother machine was not assigned an available
IP address.
A failed print job is still in your computer's print queue.
Action
• Windows
Configure the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow network scanning. To add port 54925 for network scanning, type the information below:
In Name :
Type any description, for example Brother NetScan.
In Port number :
Type 54925.
In Protocol :
UDP is selected.
See the instruction manual that came with your third-party
Security/Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
• Mac
(Brother iPrint&Scan)
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications , and then doubleclick the Brother iPrint&Scan icon. The Brother iPrint&Scan window appears. Click the Select your Machine button, and then follow the on-screen instructions to reselect your network machine.
Set the third-party Security/Firewall Software to allow PC-FAX Rx. To add port 54926 for Network PC-FAX Rx, type the information below:
• In Name :
Type any description, for example Brother PC-FAX Rx.
• In Port number :
Type 54926.
• In Protocol :
UDP is selected.
See the instruction manual that came with your third-party Security/
Firewall Software or contact the software manufacturer.
Some security software might block access without showing a security alert dialog box even after successful installation.
To allow access, see the instructions for your security software or ask the software manufacturer.
• Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask.
Verify that both the IP addresses and Subnet Masks of your computer and the Brother machine are correct and located on the same network.
For more information about how to verify the IP address and the
Subnet Mask, ask your network administrator.
• Windows
Confirm the IP address and the Subnet Mask using the Network
Connection Repair Tool.
Interface
Wired/Wireless
Wired/Wireless
Wired/Wireless
Wired/Wireless
• If a failed print job is still in your computer's print queue, delete it.
• Otherwise, double-click the printer icon in the following folder and cancel all documents:
Windows 11
Wired/Wireless
513
Cause Action Interface
Your machine is not connected to the wireless network.
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers .
Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022
Click > Windows System > Control Panel . In the
Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click View devices and printers .
Windows Server 2012 R2
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers .
Windows Server 2012
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop.
When the menu bar appears, click Settings > Control Panel .
In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers >
Printers .
Mac
Click System Preferences > Printers & Scanners .
Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report.
See Related Information : Print the WLAN Report .
Wireless
If you have checked and tried all of the above, but you are still having problems, uninstall the drivers (Windows) and the software and reinstall the latest ones.
Related Information
•
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
Related Topics:
•
•
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
•
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
•
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
514
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
> I
Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
I Want to Check that My Network Devices are Working Correctly
Check
Check that your Brother machine, access point/ router, or network hub is turned on.
Action
Check the following:
• The power cord is connected correctly and the Brother machine is turned on.
• The access point/router or hub is turned on and its link LED is blinking.
• All protective packaging has been removed from the machine.
• The toner cartridge and drum unit assembly is installed correctly.
• The machine's cover is fully closed.
• Paper is loaded correctly in the paper tray.
• (For wired networks) A network cable is securely connected to the
Brother machine and to the router or hub.
Print the Network Configuration Report and check that Ethernet Link
Status or Wireless Link Status is Link OK .
Check the Link Status on the Network
Configuration Report or the Printer Settings page.
Check that you can
"ping" the Brother machine from your computer.
Ping the Brother machine from your computer using the IP address or the node name in the Windows command prompt or Mac Terminal application: ping <ipaddress> or <nodename> .
• Successful: Your Brother machine is working correctly and connected to the same network as your computer.
• Unsuccessful: Your Brother machine is not connected to the same network as your computer.
Windows:
Ask your administrator about the IP address and the subnet mask, and then use the Network Connection Repair Tool.
Mac:
Confirm that the IP address and the Subnet Mask are set correctly.
Check that your Brother machine is connected to the wireless network.
Print the WLAN Report to check the error code on the printed report.
See Related Information : Print the WLAN Report .
Interface
Wired/Wireless
Wired/Wireless
Wired/Wireless
Wireless
If you have checked and tried all of the above but you are still having problems, see the instructions supplied with your wireless access point/router to find the SSID (Network Name) and the Network Key (Password) information and set them correctly.
Related Information
•
If You Are Having Difficulty with Your Machine's Network
Related Topics:
•
Print the Network Configuration Report
•
•
Wireless LAN Report Error Codes
•
Use the Network Connection Repair Tool (Windows)
•
My Machine Cannot Print, Scan, or Use the PC-FAX Receive Function over the Network
515
> AirPrint Problems
AirPrint Problems
Difficulties
My machine is not displayed in the printer list.
I cannot print.
I am trying to print a multi-page document from an iOS device, but ONLY the first page is printing.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Suggestions
Make sure your machine is turned on.
Make sure your machine and your mobile device or Mac are connected to the same network.
Move your mobile device closer to the wireless access point/router, or to your machine.
Make sure your machine is turned on.
Make sure your machine and your mobile device or Mac are connected to the same network.
Make sure you are running the latest OS version.
516
> Other Problems
Other Problems
Difficulties
The machine will not turn on.
The machine cannot print EPS data that includes binary with the BR-Script3 printer driver.
Suggestions
Adverse conditions on the power connection (such as lightning or a power surge) may have triggered the machine’s internal safety mechanisms. Unplug the power cord. Wait for ten minutes, then plug in the power cord and press to turn the machine on.
If the problem is not solved and you are using a power breaker, disconnect it to make sure it is not the problem.
Plug the machine's power cord directly into a different known working wall electrical socket. If there is still no power, try a different power cable.
(Windows)
To print EPS data, do the following:
1. Windows 11:
Click > All apps > Windows Tools > Control
Panel . In the Hardware and Sound group, click View devices and printers .
For Windows 10, Windows Server 2016, Windows
Server 2019, and Windows Server 2022:
Click > Windows System > Control Panel . In the Hardware and Sound (Hardware) group, click
View devices and printers .
For Windows Server 2012:
Move your mouse to the lower right corner of your desktop. When the menu bar appears, click Settings
> Control Panel . In the Hardware group, click View devices and printers .
For Windows Server 2012 R2:
Click Control Panel on the Start screen. In the
Hardware group, click View devices and printers .
2. Right-click your model's icon with BR-Script3 in the name, select Printer properties .
The Brother software cannot be installed.
If your model with BR-Script3 in the name does not appear, right-click your model's icon, select
Printer properties , and then select your model with BR-Script3 in the name.
3. From the Device Settings tab, choose TBCP (Tagged
Binary Communication Protocol) in Output Protocol .
(Windows)
If the Security Software warning appears on the computer screen during the installation, change the Security
Software settings to permit the Brother product setup program or other program to run.
(Mac)
If you are using a firewall function of anti-spyware or antivirus security software, temporarily disable it and then install the Brother software.
Copying difficulties
517
Difficulties
Cannot make a copy.
Vertical black line appears in copies.
Copies are blank.
Scanning difficulties
Difficulties
TWAIN or WIA errors appear when starting to scan.
(Windows)
OCR does not work.
Cannot scan.
Software difficulties
Difficulties
Cannot install software or print.
Suggestions
Make sure you pressed Copy and the machine is in Copy mode.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function
Lock settings.
Black vertical lines on copies are typically caused by dirt or correction fluid on the glass strip, or the corona wires are dirty. Clean the glass strip and scanner glass and the white bar and white plastic above them.
Make sure you are loading the document correctly.
Suggestions
Make sure the Brother TWAIN or WIA driver is selected as the primary source in your scanning application. For example, in Nuance ™ PaperPort ™ 14SE, click Desktop >
Scan Settings > Select to select the Brother TWAIN/WIA driver.
Try increasing the scanning resolution.
Contact your administrator to check your Secure Function
Lock settings.
Suggestions
(Windows)
Run the install program again. This program will repair and reinstall the software.
Related Information
•
518
> Check the Machine Information
Check the Machine Information
Follow these instructions to check your machine's serial number and firmware version.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [Machine Info.] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select one of the following options:
Option
Serial No.
Description
Check your machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Check your machine's firmware version.
Page Counter Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Parts Life Check the supplies' life that remains available.
4. Press OK .
5. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Info.] .
2. Press one of the following options:
Option
Serial No.
Description
Check your machine's serial number.
Check your machine's firmware version.
Firmware Version
Firmware Update
Parts Life
Update your machine to the latest firmware.
Firmware Auto Check View firmware information on the Main Home screen.
Page Counter Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Check the percentage of the supplies' life that remains available.
3. Press .
Related Information
•
519
> Reset Your Machine
Reset Your Machine
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [Initial Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Reset] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to choose the type of reset you want to perform, and then press OK .
Subdivided reset functions are not available for some models.
5. Press the option in the table to reset the machine or to exit the process.
Option Description a Reset the machine.
b The machine will exit and cancel the reset menu.
The LCD displays [Reboot OK?] .
6. Press the option in the table to reboot the machine or to exit the process.
Option Description a Reboot the machine. The machine will begin the reset.
b The machine will exit without rebooting.
If you exit without rebooting, your machine will not reset and your settings will remain unchanged.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Reset] .
2. Press the reset function you want to use.
• The network settings, the security settings and address book data will not be reset by the [Machine
Reset] .
• If you discard or dispose the machine, we recommend performing a [Factory Reset] to erase the personal data in the machine.
3.
[Machine will reboot after resetting. Press [OK] for 2 seconds to confirm.] appears. Press [OK] for two seconds to confirm.
You can also reset the network settings by pressing
[Network] > [Network Reset] .
The machine will restart.
[Settings] > [All Settings] >
520
Related Information
•
•
Related Topics:
•
Reset the Network Settings to the Factory Settings
521
> Reset Your Machine > Reset Functions Overview
Reset Functions Overview
The following reset functions are available:
Unplug the interface cable before you choose Network Settings Reset function, All Settings Reset function or Factory Reset function.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
Subdivided reset functions are not available for some models.
1. Machine Reset
This function resets the following settings:
• Programmed fax jobs in the memory (For MFC Models)
(Delayed Fax, Batch TX)
• Coverpage Message (For MFC Models)
• Remote Fax Options (For MFC Models)
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage, Fax Forwarding, PC-Fax Send, and PC-Fax Receive (Windows only))
• Setting Lock (For MFC Models)
• Language Setting
2. Network Settings Reset (For Network Models)
Reset the print server back to its default factory settings (includes Password and IP Address information).
3. Address Book and Fax Settings Reset (For MFC Models)
This function resets the following settings:
• Address Book
(One Touch Dial / Speed Dial / Setup Groups)
• Programmed fax jobs in the memory
• Station ID
(name and number)
• Coverpage Message
• Remote Fax Options
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage, Fax Forwarding, and PC-Fax Receive (Windows only))
• Report
(Transmission Verification Report/ Tel Index List/Fax Journal)
• Setting Lock password
4. All Settings Reset
You can reset all the machine's settings back to the settings that were set at the factory.
All Settings Reset takes less time than Factory Reset.
5. Factory Reset
Use the Settings Reset function to reset all of the machine's settings to the settings originally set at the factory.
Factory Reset takes more time than All Settings Reset.
We strongly recommend you perform this operation when you dispose of the machine.
522
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Machine Reset
Reset all the machine’s settings that you have changed, such as Date and Time and Ring Delay.
The Address Book, fax reports, and Call history will remain. (For models with facsimile function)
2. Network Settings Reset (For Network Models)
Reset the print server back to its default factory settings (includes Password and IP Address information).
3. Address Book and Fax Settings Reset
This function resets the following settings:
The following settings, with the exception of the Address Book and the Setting Lock password, apply to models with facsimile function.
• Address Book
(Addresses and Groups)
• Programmed fax jobs in the memory
(Delayed Fax)
• Station ID
(name and number)
• Coverpage Message
• Fax receive settings
(Remote Access Code, Fax Storage, Fax Forwarding, and PC-Fax Receive (Windows only))
• Report
(Transmission Verification Report / Tel Index List / Fax Journal)
• Setting Lock password
4. All Settings Reset
Reset all the machine's settings back to the settings that were set at the factory.
All Settings Reset takes less time than Factory Reset.
5. Factory Reset
Use the Settings Reset function to reset all of the machine's settings to the settings originally set at the factory.
Factory Reset takes more time than All Settings Reset.
We strongly recommend you perform this operation when you dispose of the machine.
Related Information
•
523
Routine Maintenance
•
•
•
•
•
•
Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
524
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Supplies
Replace Supplies
You must replace supplies when the machine indicates that the life of the supply is over.
The toner cartridge and drum unit are two separate supplies. Make sure both are installed as an assembly. The product code of supplies may vary depending on the country.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Toner Cartridge
Drum Unit
Belt Unit
525
Waste Toner Box
NOTE
• Be sure to seal the used supplies tightly in a bag so that toner powder does not spill out of the cartridge.
• Visit www.brother.com/original for instructions on how to return your used supplies to the Brother collection and recycling program. If your local Brother office does not have the collection program yet, or you choose not to return your used supply, discard the used supply according to local regulations, keeping it separate from domestic waste. If you have questions, contact your local waste disposal office.
• We recommend placing both the new and the used supplies on a piece of paper to prevent accidentally spilling or scattering the contents.
• Using paper that is not a direct equivalent for a recommended print media may reduce the life of supplies and machine parts.
• The projected life for each of the toner cartridges is based on ISO/IEC 19798. Frequency of replacement will vary depending on the print volume, percentage of coverage, types of media used, and powering on/off the machine.
• Frequency of replacing supplies except toner cartridges will vary depending on the print volume, types of media used, and powering on/off the machine.
• Handle the toner cartridge carefully. If toner scatters on your hands or clothes, immediately wipe or wash it off with cold water.
Related Information
•
•
•
•
•
Related Topics:
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
526
> Replace the Toner Cartridge
Replace the Toner Cartridge
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information : Replace Supplies .
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them.
527
3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the colour shown on the LCD.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
528
4. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
5. Unpack the new toner cartridge.
6. Remove the protective materials.
2
3
1
The shape of the toner cartridge will vary depending on your country and region.
7. Insert the new toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
1
2
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
529
8. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left several times.
Be sure to return the green tab to the Home position ( a ). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
9. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
10. Close the machine's top cover.
• After replacing a toner cartridge, DO NOT turn the machine off or open the top cover until the machine's display returns to Ready Mode.
• The toner cartridge that comes with your Brother machine is an Inbox toner cartridge.
• We recommend keeping a new toner cartridge ready for use when you see the Toner Low warning.
• DO NOT unpack the new toner cartridge until you are ready to install it.
• If a toner cartridge is left unpacked for a long time, the toner life will be shortened.
• We recommend using genuine Brother supplies to ensure stable print quality and performance.
Although not all non-genuine supplies may cause quality issues, it is possible that some may adversely affect print quality or cause machine malfunction. Brother may charge for repairing your machine if it is proven that non-genuine supplies caused the damage, even if the machine is still covered by the warranty.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
•
530
> Replace the Drum Unit
Replace the Drum Unit
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information : Replace Supplies .
>> Reset the Drum Counter (DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW)
>> Reset the Drum Counter (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Replace the Drum Unit
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them.
531
3. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly for the colour shown on the LCD.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
532
4. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
5. Unpack the new drum unit.
6. Remove the protective cover.
2
3
1
7. Reinsert the toner cartridge firmly into the new drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
1
2
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
8. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left several times.
533
Be sure to return the green tab to the Home position ( a ). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
9. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
10. Close the machine's top cover.
11. Reset the drum counter by following the next section.
NOTE
• Drum wear and tear occurs due to use and rotation of the drum and interaction with paper, toner and other materials in the paper path. When a drum reaches the factory-established rotation limit corresponding to the rated page yield, the product’s LCD will advise you to replace the drum. The product will continue to function; however, print quality may not be optimal.
• If an unpacked drum unit is placed in direct sunlight (or artificial light for long periods of time), the unit may be damaged.
• There are many factors that determine the actual drum life, such as the temperature, humidity, type of paper, type of toner used and so on. Under ideal conditions, the average drum life is estimated at approximately 20,000 pages based on one page per job (A4/Letter single-sided pages). The number of pages may be affected due to a variety of factors including but not limited to media type and media size.
Because we have no control over the many factors that determine the actual drum life, we cannot guarantee a minimum number of pages that will be printed by your drum.
• The machine should be used only in a clean, dust-free environment with adequate ventilation.
• We recommend using genuine Brother supplies to ensure stable print quality and performance. Although not all non-genuine supplies may cause quality issues, it is possible that some may adversely affect print quality or cause machine malfunction. Brother may charge for repairing your machine if it is proven that non-genuine supplies caused the damage, even if the machine is still covered by the warranty.
IMPORTANT
• To avoid print quality issues or damage to the machine, DO NOT reset the drum counter unless you are replacing the drum unit.
• If you reset the drum counter without replacing the drum unit, the machine will not be able to correctly calculate the remaining drum life.
Reset the Drum Counter (DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW)
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Make sure the machine's cover is closed.
3. Hold down OK as you press a .
534
4. Press OK to select [Drum] .
5. Press a or b to display the toner colour for the drum unit you just replaced, and then press OK .
6. Press a to reset the drum counter.
Reset the Drum Counter (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Press and hold for about five seconds.
3. Press [Drum] .
4. Select the toner colour for the drum unit you just replaced.
5. Press [Yes] .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
•
535
> Replace the Belt Unit
Replace the Belt Unit
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information : Replace Supplies .
>> Reset the Belt Unit Counter (DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW)
>> Reset the Belt Unit Counter (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Replace the Belt Unit
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them.
536
3. Remove all of the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
537
4. Hold the green handle of the belt unit and lift the belt unit up, and then pull it out without letting it touch the machine.
5. Unpack the new belt unit and insert it into the machine.
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
538
6. Reinsert each toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the machine for all four toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
BK
C
M
Y
7. Close the machine's top cover.
8. Reset the belt unit counter by following the next section.
IMPORTANT
To avoid print quality issues or damage to the machine, DO NOT reset the belt unit counter unless you are replacing the belt unit.
Reset the Belt Unit Counter (DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW)
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Make sure the machine's cover is closed.
3. Hold down OK as you press a .
4. Press a or b to display the [Belt] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a to reset the belt counter.
Reset the Belt Unit Counter (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Press and hold for about five seconds.
3. Press [Belt] .
4. Press [Yes] .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
•
539
> Replace the Waste Toner Box
Replace the Waste Toner Box
Before starting the replacement procedure, see Related Information : Replace Supplies .
1. Make sure the machine is turned on.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them.
540
3. Remove all of the toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
541
4. Hold the green handle of the belt unit and lift the belt unit up, and then pull it out without letting it touch the machine.
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
5. Remove the orange packing material and discard it.
This step is only necessary when you are replacing the waste toner box for the first time, and is not required for the replacement waste toner box. The orange packing pieces are installed at the factory to protect your machine during shipment.
542
6. Hold the green handle of the waste toner box and remove the waste toner box from the machine.
DO NOT reuse the waste toner box.
7. Unpack the new waste toner box and install the new waste toner box in the machine. Make sure the waste toner box is level and fits firmly into place.
NOTE
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
543
8. Reinsert the belt unit into the machine.
9. Reinsert each toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the machine for all four toner cartridge and drum unit assemblies.
BK
C
M
Y
10. Close the machine's top cover.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
544
Home > Routine Maintenance > Clean the Machine
Clean the Machine
Clean the outside and inside of the machine regularly with a dry, lint-free cloth.
When you replace the toner cartridge or the drum unit, make sure you clean the inside of the machine. If printed pages are stained with toner, clean the inside of the machine with a dry, lint-free cloth.
WARNING
DO NOT use flammable substances, any type of spray, or an organic solvent/liquid containing alcohol or ammonia to clean the inside or outside of the product. Doing so could cause a fire. Instead, use only a dry, lint-free cloth.
IMPORTANT
• DO NOT use isopropyl alcohol to remove dirt from the control panel. It may crack the panel.
• To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch the shaded parts shown in the illustrations.
Toner Cartridge
Drum Unit
545
Belt Unit
Waste Toner Box
DO NOT turn the waste toner box upside down, otherwise the toner may spill out.
Related Information
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
546
> Clean the Scanner
Clean the Scanner
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information : Clean the Machine .
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Lift the document cover (1). Clean the white plastic surface (2) and scanner glass (3) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
1
2
3
3. In the ADF unit, clean the white bar (1) and the scanner glass strip (2) underneath it with a soft lint-free cloth moistened with water.
2
1
4. Open the scanner glass cover (1), and then clean the other white bar (2) and scanner glass strip (3)
(supported models only).
3
1
2
5. Close the document cover.
6. Press to turn the machine on.
547
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
548
> Clean the LED Heads
Clean the LED Heads
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information : Clean the Machine .
If there is a problem with the print quality, such as light or faded colours, white streaks, or bands that run down the page, clean the LED heads as follows:
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
3. Wipe each LED head window (1) with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth. Do not touch the windows with your fingers.
1
1
4. Close the machine's top cover.
5. Press to turn the machine on.
Related Information
•
549
> Clean the Touchscreen LCD
Clean the Touchscreen LCD
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information : Clean the Machine .
IMPORTANT
DO NOT use any type of liquid cleaners (including ethanol).
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Clean the touchscreen with a dry, soft lint-free cloth.
3. Press to turn the machine on.
Related Information
•
550
> Clean the Corona Wires
Clean the Corona Wires
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information : Clean the Machine .
1. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them.
2. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly.
551
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
3. Clean the corona wire inside the drum unit by gently sliding the green tab from left to right and right to left several times.
Be sure to return the green tab to the Home position ( a ). The arrow on the tab must be aligned with the arrow on the drum unit. If it is not, printed pages may have a vertical stripe.
552
4. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
5. Close the machine's top cover.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
Error and Maintenance Messages
553
> Clean the Drum Unit
Clean the Drum Unit
• If your printout has black or white dots or other repeating marks at 75 mm intervals, the drum may have foreign material, such as glue from a label, stuck on the drum surface.
• Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information : Clean the Machine .
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Make sure the machine is in Ready Mode.
2. Press Menu .
3. Press a or b to select the following: a. Select [Print Reports] . Press OK .
b. Select [Drum Dot Print] . Press OK .
The machine prints the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
4. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
5. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them.
554
6. The colour of printed dots on the Drum Dot Check Sheet is the colour of the drum you should clean. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly that matches the colour causing the problem.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
555
7. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch any surface of the drum unit except the drum unit gear.
8. Lift the drum unit frame by the handle and rotate it counterclockwise, as shown.
9. Loosen your grip so the frame drops forward, and then use your right hand to locate the drum unit gear inside the right side of the frame.
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch any surface of the drum unit except the drum unit gear.
556
10. Tilt your left hand up to lift the frame so the numbered grid is visible, as shown. Use your right hand to rotate the drum while you look for marks or debris on the drum surface.
Use the column numbers next to the drum roller to find the mark. For example, a dot in column 2 on the
Drum Dot Check Sheet would mean that there is a mark in the “2” region of the drum.
11. Wipe the surface of the drum gently with a dry cotton swab until the mark on the surface comes off.
NOTE
DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object or any liquids.
557
12. Reinsert the toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
1
2
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
13. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
14. Close the machine's top cover.
15. Press to turn the machine on.
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Make sure the machine is in Ready Mode.
2. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] > [Drum Dot Print] .
3. Press [Yes] .
The machine prints the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
4. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
5. Open the top cover until it locks in the open position.
558
WARNING
HOT SURFACE
The machine's internal parts will be extremely hot. Wait for the machine to cool down before touching them.
6. The colour of printed dots on the Drum Dot Check Sheet is the colour of the drum you should clean. Remove the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly that matches the colour causing the problem.
CAUTION
We recommend placing the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly on a clean, flat surface with disposable paper underneath it in case you accidentally spill or scatter toner.
IMPORTANT
To prevent damage to the machine from static electricity, DO NOT touch the electrodes shown in the illustration.
559
7. Push down the green lock lever and remove the toner cartridge from the drum unit.
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch any surface of the drum unit except the drum unit gear.
8. Lift the drum unit frame by the handle and rotate it counterclockwise, as shown.
560
9. Loosen your grip so the frame drops forward, and then use your right hand to locate the drum unit gear inside the right side of the frame.
To avoid print quality problems, DO NOT touch any surface of the drum unit except the drum unit gear.
10. Tilt your left hand up to lift the frame so the numbered grid is visible, as shown. Use your right hand to rotate the drum while you look for marks or debris on the drum surface.
561
Use the column numbers next to the drum roller to find the mark. For example, a dot in column 2 on the
Drum Dot Check Sheet would mean that there is a mark in the “2” region of the drum.
11. Wipe the surface of the drum gently with a dry cotton swab until the mark on the surface comes off.
NOTE
DO NOT clean the surface of the photosensitive drum with a sharp object or any liquids.
12. Reinsert the toner cartridge firmly into the drum unit until you hear it lock into place.
1
2
Make sure you put the toner cartridge in correctly or it may separate from the drum unit.
562
13. Slide the toner cartridge and drum unit assembly into the machine. Make sure that you match the toner cartridge colour to the same colour label on the machine.
BK
C
M
Y
14. Close the machine's top cover.
15. Press to turn the machine on.
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
563
> Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
Clean the Paper Pick-up Rollers
Cleaning the paper pick-up rollers periodically may prevent paper jams by ensuring that paper feeds correctly.
Before starting the cleaning procedure, see Related Information : Clean the Machine .
If you have paper feed problems, clean the pick-up rollers as follows:
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off.
2. Pull the paper tray completely out of the machine.
3. If paper is loaded or something is stuck inside in the paper tray, remove it.
4. Tightly wring out a lint-free cloth soaked in lukewarm water, and then wipe the separator pad on the paper tray to remove dust.
5. Wipe the two pick-up rollers inside the machine to remove dust.
6. Reload the paper and put the paper tray firmly back in the machine.
7. Press to turn the machine on.
Related Information
•
564
Related Topics:
•
565
Home > Routine Maintenance > Correct Colour Printing
Correct Colour Printing
If the colour print quality is poor, calibrate the output density of each colour, and then perform the colour alignment.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Printer] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [ClrCorrection] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [Correction] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a to select [Yes] .
The colour correction starts automatically and will take a few minutes.
6. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
To perform the calibrations of each colour's output density and colour alignment in sequence, set the Auto
Correction function to On.
1. Press
Start] .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Colour Correction] > [Correction
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes] .
The Colour correction starts automatically, and will take a few minutes.
3. Press .
Related Information
•
•
Set the Auto Correction Function
•
Reset the Machine's Colour Correction Settings
Related Topics:
•
566
Correct Colour Printing > Set the Auto Correction Function
Set the Auto Correction Function
If you want your machine to automatically perform colour alignment after calibrating colours, turn on the Auto
Correction function.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Printer] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [ClrCorrection] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [Auto Correct] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a to display the [On] option, and then press OK .
6. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Colour Correction] > [Auto
Correction] > [On] .
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press .
Related Information
•
567
Correct Colour Printing > Reset the Machine's Colour Correction Settings
Reset the Machine's Colour Correction Settings
If the output colour differs from what you see on your screen, try resetting your machine's colour correction settings.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the [Printer] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the [ClrCorrection] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to select the [Reset] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a to select [Reset] .
6. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Printer] > [Colour Correction] > [Reset] .
If your machine displays the [All Settings] menu on the Home screen, skip the [Settings] menu.
2. Press [Yes] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
568
Home > Routine Maintenance > Check the Remaining Part Life
Check the Remaining Part Life
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the following: a. Select [Machine Info.] . Press OK .
b. Select [Parts Life] . Press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the machine part you want to check, and then press OK .
The LCD displays the approximate remaining part life.
4. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Machine Info.] > [Parts Life] .
2. Press the machine part you want to check.
The LCD displays the approximate remaining part life.
3. Press .
on the LCD.
To display the approximate remaining life of the toner cartridge, press
Related Information
•
569
Home > Routine Maintenance > Pack and Ship Your Machine
Pack and Ship Your Machine
WARNING
• To prevent possible injuries, at least two people should lift the product by holding it at the front and back.
• If the machine has Optional Tray(s) installed, remove the Optional Tray(s) BEFORE moving the machine.
Attempting to move the machine without removing the Optional Tray(s) may cause injury to you or damage to the machine.
• Pack the Optional Tray(s) separately in the original carton with original packing material.
• If for any reason you must ship your machine, carefully repack the machine in the original packaging to avoid any damage during transit. The machine should be adequately insured with the carrier.
• The components included in the box may differ depending on your country.
1. Press and hold to turn the machine off. Leave the machine off for at least 10 minutes to cool down.
2. Disconnect all the cables, and then unplug the power cord from the electrical socket.
3. Put the machine into the bag it originally came in.
4. Pack the machine, the printed materials, and the AC power cord (if applicable) in the original carton with the original packing material as shown. (The original packing material may differ depending on your country.)
570
5. Close the carton and tape it shut.
6. If you have a Lower Tray, repack it as shown.
Related Information
•
571
Home > Routine Maintenance > Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
Replace Periodic Maintenance Parts
Replace the following parts regularly to maintain print quality. The parts listed below must be replaced after printing approximately 50,000 pages
based on two pages per job and 100,000
pages based on five pages per job for the Fuser Unit and approximately 50,000 pages
for the PF Kit MP.
Contact Brother customer service or your local Brother dealer when the following messages appear on the LCD:
LCD Message
Maintenance
Replace Fuser
Description
Replace the Fuser Unit.
Replace the Paper Feeding Kit for the Multi-purpose Tray.
Maintenance
Related Information
•
1
2
3
4
5
Letter or A4 size single-sided pages
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
The replacement frequency depends on the complexity of printed pages, percentage of coverage, and the type of media used.
The kit includes the roller holder assembly, separation pad, and separation pad spring for the MP Tray.
572
Machine Settings
Customise settings and features to make your machine a more efficient work tool.
•
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
•
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
573
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
•
In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage)
•
•
Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
•
•
574
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> In the Event of Power
Failure (Memory Storage)
In the Event of Power Failure (Memory Storage)
Your menu settings are stored permanently, and in the event of a power failure will not be lost.Temporary settings
(for example, Contrast, Overseas Mode) are lost.
During a power failure, the machine will retain the date and time and programmed fax timer jobs (for example,
Delayed Fax) for approximately 55 hours. Other fax jobs in the machine's memory will not be lost.
Related Information
•
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
575
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> General Settings
General Settings
•
•
Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
•
•
•
•
•
•
Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
•
Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
•
•
Set Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode
•
•
Prevent Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
•
•
Change the Language on the LCD
576
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Adjust the Machine's Volume
Adjust the Machine's Volume
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the following: a. Select [General Setup] . Press OK .
b. Select [Beep] . Press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [High] , [Med] , [Low] , or [Off] option, and then press OK .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Do one of the following:
• For MFC models:
Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Volume] .
• For DCP models:
Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Volume] > [Beep] .
2. Press one of the following options (MFC models):
(The options will vary depending on your machine.)
• [Ring]
Adjust the ring volume.
• [Beep]
Adjust the volume of the beep you hear when you press a button, make a mistake, or after you send or receive a fax.
• [Speaker]
Adjust the speaker volume.
3. Select the [Off] , [Low] , [Med] or [High] option, and then press the option you want.
4. Press .
Related Information
•
577
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
Change for Daylight Saving Time Automatically
You can program the machine to change automatically to Daylight Saving Time.
It will reset itself forward one hour in the spring, and back one hour in the autumn. Make sure you have set the correct date and time in the Date & Time setting.
This feature is available only in some countries.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the following: a. Select [Initial Setup] . Press OK .
b. Select [Date & Time] . Press OK .
c. Select [Auto Daylight] . Press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [On] or [Off] option, and then press OK .
4. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press
Daylight] .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Auto
2. Press [On] or [Off] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
578
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Set
Sleep Mode Countdown
Set Sleep Mode Countdown
The Sleep Mode (or Power Save Mode) setting can reduce power consumption. When the machine is in Sleep
Mode, it acts as though it is turned off. The machine will wake up and start printing when it receives a print job or a fax. Use these instructions to set a time delay (countdown) before the machine enters Sleep Mode.
• You can choose how long the machine must be idle before it goes into Sleep Mode.
• The timer will restart if any operation is carried out on the machine, such as receiving a print job.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Ecology] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to display the [Sleep Time] option, and then press OK .
5. Enter the length of time (maximum 50 minutes) the machine is idle before entering Sleep Mode, and then press OK .
6. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Sleep Time] .
2. Enter the length of time (maximum 50 minutes) the machine will remain idle before entering Sleep Mode, and then press [OK] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
579
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> About
Deep Sleep Mode
About Deep Sleep Mode
If the machine is in Sleep Mode and does not receive any jobs for a certain length of time, the machine will automatically enter Deep Sleep Mode. The length of time is based on your specific model and settings.
Deep Sleep Mode uses less power than Sleep Mode.
The Deep Sleep Mode setting cannot be disabled due to environmental considerations.
Applicable Models
DCP-L3515CDW/
DCP-L3520CDW/
DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
DCP-L3555CDW/
DCP-L3560CDW/
MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW
Related Information
•
Machine's Control Panel in Deep
Sleep Mode
The LCD displays Deep Sleep .
The LCD backlight turns off and the
Power LED brightens and dims.
Conditions That Will Wake the
Machine
• The machine receives a job.
• Someone presses a button on the control panel.
• The machine receives a job.
• Someone presses touchscreen LCD.
, , or the
580
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Set
Auto Power Off Mode
Set Auto Power Off Mode
If the machine is in Deep Sleep Mode for certain length of time, based on your model and settings, the machine will go into Power Off Mode automatically. The machine does not go into Power Off Mode when the machine is connected to a network or a telephone line, or has secure print data in the memory(available for certain models).
To start printing, press on the control panel and then send a print job.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Ecology] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to display the [Auto Power Off] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to display the [8 hours] , [4 hours] , [2 hours] , [1 hour] , or [Off] option, and then press OK .
6. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press
Off] .
[Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] >
2. Press the [Off] , [1 hour] , [2 hours] , [4 hours] or [8 hours] option you want.
[Auto Power
3. Press .
Related Information
•
581
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Set the
Date and Time
Set the Date and Time
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the following: a. Select [Initial Setup] . Press OK .
b. Select [Date & Time] . Press OK .
c. Select [Date & Time] . Press OK .
3. Press a or b to set the last two digits of the year. Press OK . Repeat these steps for setting the month and day.
4. Press a or b to display the [12h Clock] or [24h Clock] option, and then press OK .
5. Do one of the following:
• If you selected [12h Clock] as the format in the [Date & Time] setting, press a or b to set the hour.
Press OK . Repeat these steps for setting the minute.
Press a or b to display the [AM] or [PM] option, and then press OK .
• If you selected [24h Clock] as the format in the [Date & Time] setting, press a or b to set the hour.
Press OK . Repeat these steps for setting the minute.
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
6. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Date] .
2. Enter the last two digits of the year using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
3. Enter the two digits for the month using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
4. Enter the two digits for the day using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
5. Press [Time] .
6. Enter the time (in 24-hour format) using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
(For example: enter 19:45 for 7:45 PM.)
7. Press .
Related Information
•
582
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Set the
Time Zone
Set the Time Zone
Set the time zone for your location on the machine.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to select the following: a. Select [Initial Setup] . Press OK .
b. Select [Date & Time] . Press OK .
c. Select [Time Zone] . Press OK .
3. Press a or b to select the time zone. Press OK .
4. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Date & Time] > [Time Zone] .
2. Enter your time zone.
3. Press [OK] .
4. Press .
Related Information
•
583
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
Adjust the LCD Backlight Brightness
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
If you are having difficulty reading the LCD, changing the brightness setting may help.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] >
[Backlight] .
2. Press the [Light] , [Med] or [Dark] option.
3. Press .
Related Information
•
584
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Change
How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
Change How Long the LCD Backlight Stays On
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Set how long the LCD backlight stays on.
1. Press
Timer] .
[Settings]
2. Press the option you want:
• [10 Secs]
• [20 Secs]
> [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [LCD Settings] > [Dim
• [30 Secs]
3. Press .
Related Information
•
585
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Set
Your Station ID
Set Your Station ID
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Set the machine to print your Station ID and the fax's date and time at the top of each fax you send.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Station ID] > [Fax] .
2. Enter your fax number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
3. Press [Tel] .
4. Enter your telephone number (up to 20 digits) using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
5. Press [Name] .
6. Enter your name (up to 20 characters) using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
• Press to cycle between letters, numbers and special characters. (The characters available may differ depending on your country.)
. Press the • If you enter an incorrect character, press d or c to move the cursor to it and press correct character.
• To enter a space, press [Space] or c .
• For more detailed information, see Related Information .
7. Press .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
How to Enter Text on Your Machine
586
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Set
Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode
Set Tone or Pulse Dialling Mode
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Your machine is set for a Tone dialling service. If you have a Pulse dialling (rotary) service, you must change the dialling mode.
This feature is not available in some countries.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Tone/Pulse] .
2. Press [Tone] or [Pulse] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
587
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Reduce
Toner Consumption
Reduce Toner Consumption
Using the Toner Save feature may reduce toner consumption. When Toner Save is set to on, the print on your documents appears lighter.
We DO NOT recommend using the Toner Save feature for printing photo or greyscale images.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Ecology] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to display the [Toner Save] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to display the [On] or [Off] option, and then press OK .
6. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Toner Save] .
2. Press [On] or [Off] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
Related Topics:
•
588
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Prevent
Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
Prevent Dialling a Wrong Number (Dial Restriction)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
This feature prevents users from sending a fax or call to the wrong number by mistake. You can set the machine to restrict dialling when you use the dial pad, Address Book, Shortcuts and LDAP search.
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Fax] > [Dial Restriction] .
2. Press one of the following options:
• [Dial Pad]
• [Address Book]
If you combine Address Book numbers when dialling, the numbers will be recognised as dial pad input and will not be restricted.
• [Shortcuts]
• [LDAP Server]
3. Press one of the following options:
Option
Enter #
Twice
On
Off
Description
The machine prompts you to re-enter the number, and then if you re-enter the same number correctly, the machine will start dialling. If you re-enter the wrong number, the LCD will display an error message.
The machine restricts all fax sending and outbound calls for that dialling method.
The machine does not restrict the dialling method.
• The [Enter # Twice] setting will not work if you use an external phone before entering the number.
You will not be asked to re-enter the number.
• If you choose [On] or [Enter # Twice] , you cannot use the Broadcasting feature.
4. Press .
Related Information
•
589
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Reduce
Printing Noise
Reduce Printing Noise
The Quiet Mode setting can reduce printing noise. When Quiet Mode is turned on, the print speed becomes slower. The factory setting is off.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [General Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Ecology] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to display the [Quiet Mode] option, and then press OK .
5. Press a or b to display the [On] or [Off] option, and then press OK .
6. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [General Setup] > [Ecology] > [Quiet Mode] .
2. Press [On] or [Off] .
3. Press .
Related Information
•
590
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Change the Language on the LCD
Change the Language on the LCD
Change the LCD language if needed.
This feature is not available in some countries.
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [Initial Setup] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the [Local Language] option, and then press OK .
4. Press a or b to display your language, and then press OK .
5. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Initial Setup] > [Local Language] .
2. Press your language.
3. Press .
Related Information
•
591
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Save Your Favourite
Settings as a Shortcut
Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
•
•
•
Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card
592
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Settings as a Shortcut > Add Shortcuts
Add Shortcuts
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You can add the Fax, Copy, Scan, Web Connect and Apps settings you use most frequently by saving them as your Shortcuts. Later you can press the Shortcut to apply these settings instead of manually re-entering them.
Some Shortcut menus are not available depending on your model.
These instructions describe how to add a Copy Shortcut. The steps for adding a Fax, Scan, Web Connect, or
Apps Shortcut are very similar.
1. Press [Shortcuts] . (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.)
2. Press a tab.
3. Press any to add a new Shortcut.
4. Press [Copy] .
5. Press the copy preset you want.
6. Press [Options] .
7. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available settings, and then press the setting you want to change.
8. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the available options for the setting, and then press the option you want.
Repeat these two steps until you have selected all the settings and options you want.
9. When you have finished changing settings, press [OK] . (If the [OK] button is displayed.)
10. Press [OK] .
11. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK] .
12. Enter a name for the Shortcut using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
Related Information
•
Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
593
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Settings as a Shortcut > Change or Delete Shortcuts
Change or Delete Shortcuts
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
You cannot change a Web Connect Shortcut or Apps Shortcut. If you need to change them, delete them, and then add a new Shortcut.
1. Press [Shortcuts] . (If [Shortcuts] is displayed.)
2. Press a tab to display the Shortcut you want to change.
3. Press the Shortcut you want to change.
The settings for the Shortcut you selected appear.
To delete the Shortcut or edit the name, press and hold the Shortcut until the options appear, and then follow the on-screen menus.
4. Press [Options] .
5. Change the settings for the Shortcut if needed.
6. Press [OK] (if needed).
7. When finished, press [Save as Shortcut] .
8. Read and confirm the displayed list of settings you have selected, and then press [OK] .
9. Do one of the following:
• To overwrite the Shortcut, press [Yes] .
• If you do not want to overwrite the Shortcut, press [No] to enter a new Shortcut name.
Press any to add a new Shortcut.
Enter a new name using the LCD, and then press [OK] .
To edit the name, hold down to delete the current name.
Related Information
•
Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
594
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Settings as a Shortcut > Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card
Assign a Shortcut to an ID Card
Related Models : MFC-L8390CDW
You can assign one machine Shortcut to your ID card. When you touch your ID card to the machine's NFC symbol, your personal Shortcut will automatically appear on the touchscreen.
• You cannot use the same ID card for different Shortcuts.
• To use the ID card for another Shortcut, unregister the card first, and then register it with the new
Shortcut.
1. If the Home screen appears, press [Shortcuts] .
2. Press the tab that contains the Shortcut you want to assign to your IC card.
3. Press and hold the Shortcut until the options appear.
4. Press a or b to display the [Register Card/NFC] option, and then press it.
5. Touch the IC card to the NFC symbol.
6. Press [Register] .
The Shortcut is assigned to the ID Card.
Related Information
•
Save Your Favourite Settings as a Shortcut
595
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Print Reports
Print Reports
•
•
596
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Reports
The following reports are available:
XMIT Verify (For models with facsimile function)
The XMIT Verify report prints a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Address Book (For models with facsimile function)
The Address Book report prints a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book memory.
Fax Journal (For models with facsimile function)
The Fax Journal prints a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes. (TX means
Transmit, RX means Receive.)
User Settings
The User Settings report prints a list of your current settings.
Printer Settings
The Printer Settings report prints a list of your current printer settings.
Network Configuration (Models with network functionality)
The Network Configuration report prints a list of your current network settings.
Print File List
The Print File List prints a list of the fonts and print macro/stream setting stored in the machine.
Drum Dot Print
The Drum Dot Print prints the drum dot sheet, which helps when it is time to clean the drum unit.
WLAN Report (Models with wireless network functionality)
The WLAN Report prints the wireless LAN connectivity diagnosis.
Related Information
•
597
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
Report
Print a Report
>> DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
>> DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
1. Press Menu .
2. Press a or b to display the [Print Reports] option, and then press OK .
3. Press a or b to display the report you want to print, and then press OK .
4. Press Mono Start or Colour Start .
5. Press Stop/Exit .
DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
1. Press [Settings] > [All Settings] > [Print Reports] .
2. Swipe up or down or press a or b to display the report you want to print, and then press it.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you choose [XMIT Verify] , do one of the following:
To view the Transmission Verification Report, press [View on LCD] .
To print the Transmission Verification Report, press [Print Report] .
• If you choose other reports, go to next step.
4. Press [Yes] .
5. Press .
Related Information
•
598
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Settings and Features
Tables
Settings and Features Tables
The Settings tables will help you understand the menu selections and options that are found in the machine’s programs.
•
Settings Tables (DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
•
Settings Tables (MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
•
Settings Tables (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW)
•
Feature Tables (MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
•
Feature Tables (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW)
599
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Settings Tables (DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW)
Settings Tables (DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW)
Related Models : DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
[General Setup]
Level 3 Level 4
Tray Setting Paper Type
Level 5
-
Descriptions
Set the type of paper in the paper tray.
Paper Size Set the paper size in the paper tray.
Print Position X Offset Move the print start position (at the upper left corner of pages) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots in 300 dpi.
Check Paper
Y Offset Move the print start position (at the upper left corner of pages) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots in 300 dpi.
Select whether or not to display a message indicating you must check the paper type and paper size when you pull a paper tray out of the machine.
Beep -
Notifications Blank Pg Skips -
Ecology Eco Mode -
Adjust the beeper volume.
Displays the skipped pages after scanning is completed.
Turn the following machine settings on at the same time:
• 2-sided Print: Long Edge
(available for certain models)
• Sleep Time: 0Min
• Quiet Mode :
• Toner Save :
Toner Save
Sleep Time
Quiet Mode -
Auto Power Off -
-
-
LCD Contrast -
Setting Lock -
Delete Storage Macro ID
Stream ID
-
-
-
-
Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Set the number of minutes before the machine enters Sleep mode.
Decrease printing noise.
Set the number of hours that the machine will remain in Deep
Sleep mode before going into Power Off mode.
Adjust the LCD contrast.
Restrict unauthorised users from changing the machine’s settings.
Delete the registered Macro data.
Delete the registered Stream data.
1 Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain other machine settings in Web Based Management.
600
Level 3 Level 4
Delete Storage Font ID
Delete All
Level 5
-
-
[Printer]
Level 3
Emulation
Quality
-
-
Print Options Font List
2-sided
Level 4 Level 5
-
-
HP LaserJet
Test Print
2-sided Print -
BR-Script 3
-
Descriptions
Delete the registered Font data.
Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and Font data to the factory settings.
[Copy]
Level 3
Density
Level 4
-
Quality
Contrast
-
-
Colour Adjust Red
ID Copy
Descriptions
Adjust the density.
Choose the Copy resolution for your type of document.
Adjust the contrast for copies.
Adjust the red colour.
Green
Blue
Adjust the green colour.
Adjust the blue colour.
Density Adjust the density.
Quality Choose the Copy resolution for your type of document.
Contrast Adjust the contrast for copies.
2in1/1in1 Make 2 in 1 ID copies.
Descriptions
Set the printer emulation mode.
Select the print quality.
Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
Single Image -
Auto Continue -
Output Colour -
Paper Type -
Paper Size -
Copies -
Orientation -
Edge Emphasis -
PrintPosition X Offset
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Print a test page.
Turn 2-sided printing off or on and select flip on long edge or short edge.
For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided image, select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce printing time.
When you use preprinted paper, you must select the 2sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided Feed for preprinted paper, the last page will be printed on the reverse side.
Select this setting if you want the machine to clear paper size errors or media type errors, and use paper from other trays.
Set the output colour.
Set the paper type.
Set the paper size.
Set the number of printed pages.
Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape orientation.
Make the text appear sharper.
Move the print start position (at the upper left corner of pages) horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots in
300 dpi.
601
Level 3
Auto FF
HP LaserJet
Level 4
PrintPosition Y Offset
-
Font No.
Font Pitch
Font Point
Symbol Set
Table Print
Auto LF
Auto CR
Auto WRAP
Auto SKIP
Left Margin
Level 5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Right Margin -
Top Margin -
Descriptions
Move the print start position (at the upper left corner of pages) vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots in 300 dpi.
Allow the machine to print any remaining data automatically.
Set the font number.
Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Select the symbol or character set.
Print the code table.
ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the right margin.
Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the bottom margin.
Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper.
BR-Script 3
Bottom Margin
Lines
Tray Command
Error Print
CAPT
-
-
-
-
-
Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper.
Set the number of lines on each page.
Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when you use the HP drivers.
Choose whether the machine prints the error information when errors occur.
Use CAPT (Colour Advanced Printing Technology) for optimal print quality when printing a PS file created by a non-Brother PS driver.
Colours and photos appear clearer and more accurate.
Print speed will be slower.
Set the page layout when printing multiple pages.
PDF Multiple Page -
PDF Print Opt
Fit to Page
ClrCorrection Correction
-
-
Reset
Auto Correct -
-
-
Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments
(Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the text.
Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in the
PDF file to fit the selected paper size.
Initiate colour calibration to check and correct colours.
Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Set the machine to perform Colour Calibration and
Registration automatically.
ColourSettings Setting Mode Select whether to apply the colour print settings of the machine or the printer driver.
Colour Mode Select the colour mode.
602
Level 3 Level 4 Level 5 Descriptions
ClrCorrection ColourSettings Improve Gray Turn on or off to improve the image quality of shaded areas.
Enhance Black Turn on or off if a black graphic does not print correctly.
Brightness Adjust the brightness.
Reset Printer -
Contrast
Red
Green
Blue
-
Adjust the contrast.
Adjust the red colour.
Adjust the green colour.
Adjust the blue colour.
Restore the machine settings to the factory settings.
[Network]
Level 3
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
Level 4
Find Network
TCP/IP
Level 5
-
Level 6
-
Boot
Method
-
IP Address -
Descriptions
Configure the wireless network settings using the setup wizard.
Select the Boot method that best suits your needs.
Enter the IP address.
Subnet
Mask
Gateway
Node Name
-
-
-
Enter the Subnet mask.
Enter the Gateway address.
Enter the Node name.
(Up to 32 characters)
Select the WINS configuration mode.
WINS
Config
WINS
Server
-
Primary Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server.
DNS Server Primary Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server.
WPS/PushButton
WPS/PIN Code
WLAN Status
APIPA
IPv6
-
-
Status
Signal
Channel
Speed
SSID
Comm. Mode -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the link-local address range automatically.
-
Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
Configure your wireless network settings using
WPS with a PIN.
View the current wireless network status.
View the current wireless network signal strength.
View the current wireless network channel.
View the current wireless network speed.
View the current SSID.
View the current Communication mode.
603
Level 3
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
Level 4
MAC Address
WLAN Enable
Wi-Fi Direct Manual
Group Owner
Push Button
PIN Code
-
-
Level 5
-
-
-
-
-
-
Level 6
-
-
-
-
Descriptions
View the machine's MAC address.
Turn the WLAN on or off manually.
Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings manually.
Set your machine as the Group Owner.
Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using the one-button push method.
Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
View your machine's device name.
Web Based
Mgmt
IPsec
Device Info.
Device
Name
SSID
-
-
IP Address -
Status Info.
Status -
Signal -
I/F Enable
-
-
Reject Access -
Network Reset -
Channel
Speed
-
-
-
Global Detect Allow Detect -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Print Reports]
Level 3 Descriptions
User Settings Print a list of your User settings.
Print Settings Print a list of your Printer settings.
Network Config Print a list of your Network settings.
PrintFileList Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory.
Drum Dot Print Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
WLAN Report Print the wireless LAN connection results.
View the Group Owner's SSID.
When the machine is not connected, the LCD displays Not Connected.
View your machine's current IP Address.
View the current Wi-Fi Direct network status.
View the current Wi-Fi Direct network signal strength.
When your machine acts as Group Owner, the
LCD always indicates a strong signal.
View the current Wi-Fi Direct network channel.
View the current Wi-Fi Direct network speed.
Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection on or off.
Enable or disable Web Based Management.
If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web
Based Management.
IPsec is an optional security feature of the IP protocol that provides authentication and encryption services. We recommend contacting your network administrator before changing this setting.
Enable or disable Global Detect, a function that detects and notifies the user when the user unintentionally connects to a global network.
Disable connections to the global network.
Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
604
[Machine Info.]
Level 3
Serial No.
Level 4
-
Descriptions
Display the machine's serial number.
Firmware Version Main Version Check your machine's firmware version.
Page Counter
Sub3 Version
Security Ver.
Total Check the total number of pages the machine has printed during its life.
Parts Life
Copy
Other
Toner
Drum
Belt
Fuser
View the approximate remaining toner life for each colour.
Display the remaining life of each drum unit.
Display the remaining life of the belt unit.
Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
[Secure Print]
Level 2 Descriptions
Secure Print You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
[Initial Setup]
Level 3
Date & Time
Reset
Level 4
Date & Time
Auto Daylight
(Available only for certain countries)
Time Zone
Machine Reset
Network Reset
All Settings
Factory Reset
-
Descriptions
Access the Date and Time setting menus.
Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving
Time.
Set your time zone.
Restore all the machine settings that you have changed.
Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings.
Restore all the machine's settings to the factory defaults.
Perform this operation when you dispose of your machine.
Change your LCD language.
Local Language
(available for certain models)
Related Information
•
605
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Settings Tables (MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Settings Tables (MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
[Settings]
[Settings]
Level 1
( Date &
Time )
Toner
Level 2
-
Toner Life
Test Print
Colour Correction
Toner Cartridge
Check
Level 3
-
-
-
Correction
Start
Reset
Black
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
-
Descriptions
Access the Date and Time setting menus.
View the approximate remaining toner life for each colour.
Print a test page.
Initiate colour calibration to check and correct colours.
Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine.
Access the Wired LAN setting menus.
Network Wired LAN
(MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
Tray Setting -
Fax Preview -
Eco Mode -
-
-
-
-
Access the WLAN setting menus.
Access the tray setting menus.
View received faxes on the LCD.
Turn the following machine settings on at the same time:
• 2-sided Print : Long Edge
• Sleep Time : 0Min
• Dim Timer : 10Secs
• Quiet Mode : On
606
Level 1 Level 2
All Settings -
Level 3
-
Descriptions
• Toner Save : On
Configure the detailed settings.
1 Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain other machine settings in Web Based Management.
[General Setup]
[All Settings] > [General Setup]
Level 3
Tray
Setting
Level 4
Paper Type
Level 5
MP Tray
(MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Tray 1
Level 6 Descriptions
Select the paper type that matches the paper in the MP tray.
-
Paper Size
(MFC-L8390CDW)
MP Tray
(MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Tray 1
-
-
-
Select the paper type that matches the paper in the standard paper tray.
Select the paper type that matches the paper in the Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Select the paper size you loaded in the
MP tray.
Tray Use: Copy
(MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Tray Use: Fax
(MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Tray Use: Print
(MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Print Position
(MFC-L8390CDW)
-
-
-
MP Tray
(MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
-
-
-
-
X
Offset
Select the paper size you loaded in the standard paper tray.
Select the paper size you loaded in the
Optional Tray (Tray 2).
Select the tray you want to use for making a Copy.
Select the tray you want to use for printing a Fax.
Select the tray you want to use to Print.
Tray 1
Y
Offset
X
Offset
Y
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the MP tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500
(right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the MP tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the standard paper tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500
(right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the standard paper tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500
(down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
607
Level 3
Tray
Setting
Volume
LCD
Settings
Level 4
Print Position
(MFC-L8390CDW)
Separator Tray
(MFC-L8390CDW)
Check Paper
-
-
-
Ring
Beep
Speaker
Backlight
Dim Timer
Toner Save
Sleep Time
Quiet Mode
Auto Power Off
-
-
-
-
-
Screen
Settings
Notice
Settings
Ecology
Home Screen
Scan Screen
Display
Information
Scan Result(Skip
Blank Page)
-
-
-
IP Address
Eco Mode -
-
-
-
-
Level 5
(MFC-L8390CDW)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Level 6 Descriptions
X
Offset
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray
(Tray 2) horizontally from -500 (left) to
+500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Y
Offset
-
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the Optional tray
(Tray 2) vertically from -500 (up) to +500
(down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Select a specific tray to skip if you know it is loaded with the wrong size paper.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Select the tray that contains the paper used as the separator paper, which is inserted between each print job.
Select whether or not to display a message indicating you must check the paper type and paper size.
Adjust the ring volume.
Adjust the beeper volume.
Adjust the speaker volume.
Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after you go back to your Main Home screen and other functions.
Set the Main Home screen.
Set the default Scan screen.
Select whether or not to display your machine's IP Address on the Home screens.
Displays the total scanned pages and skipped pages after scanning is completed.
Turn the following machine settings on at the same time:
• 2-sided Print : Long Edge
• Sleep Time : 0Min
• Dim Timer : 10Secs
• Quiet Mode : On
• Toner Save :
Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Set how much time should pass before the machine enters Power Saving mode.
Decrease printing noise.
Set the number of hours that the machine will remain in Deep Sleep mode before going into Power Off mode.
608
Level 3
Setting
Lock
Delete
Storage
Level 4
-
Macro ID
Stream ID
Font ID
Delete All
-
-
-
-
Level 5
-
-
-
-
-
Level 6 Descriptions
Restrict unauthorised users from changing the machine’s settings.
Delete the registered Macro data.
Delete the registered Stream data.
Delete the registered Font data.
Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and Font data to the factory settings.
1
2
Available if the Optional Tray is installed.
Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain other machine settings in Web Based Management.
[Shortcut Settings]
[All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings]
Level 3 Level 4
(Select a Shortcut) Rename
Edit
Descriptions
Change the shortcut name.
Change the shortcut settings.
Delete
Register Card/NFC
(MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Delete the shortcut.
Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Delete Card/NFC
(MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
[Fax]
[All Settings] > [Fax]
Level 3
Setup Receive
Level 4
Ring Delay
Receive Mode
F/T Ring Time
Level 5
-
-
-
Descriptions
Set the number of rings before the machine answers in
Fax or Fax/Tel mode.
Select the Receive Mode that best suits your needs.
Set the length of the pseudo/double-ring time in
Fax/Tel mode.
Fax Preview
Fax Detect
-
-
View received faxes on the LCD.
Receive fax messages automatically when you answer a call and hear fax tones.
Remote Codes Remote Codes Answer calls at an extension or external telephone and
Act.Code
use codes to turn the Remote Codes on or off. You can personalise the codes.
Deact.Code
Auto Reduction -
PC Fax Receive On
Off
Reduce the size of incoming faxes.
Set the machine to send faxes to your computer.
You can turn on the Backup Print safety feature.
Memory Receive Off -
Fax Forward Set the machine to forward fax messages or to store
Fax Storage incoming faxes in the memory (so you can retrieve them while you are away from your machine).
If you select Fax Forward or Fax Storage, you can turn on the Backup Print safety feature.
609
Level 3
Setup Receive
Setup Send
Level 4 Level 5
Memory Receive Forward to
Cloud
Forward to
Network
Fax Rx Stamp -
2-sided
Batch TX
Coverpage Note -
Auto Redial
Destination
Report Setting XMIT Report
-
-
-
Journal Period Journal
Period
Time
Day
Print Document -
Remote Access -
Dial Restriction Dial Pad -
Address Book -
Shortcuts -
LDAP Server
Remaining Jobs -
-
-
-
-
-
-
Miscellaneous BT Call Sign
(U.K. only)
-
[Printer]
[All Settings] > [Printer]
Level 3
Emulation
Quality
Print Options
2-sided
Level 4
-
-
Font List
Level 5
-
-
HP LaserJet
Test Print
2-sided Print -
BR-Script 3
-
Descriptions
Forward incoming faxes to the online service.
Forward incoming faxes to a network destination.
Print the received time and date on the top of incoming faxes.
Print incoming faxes on both sides of the paper.
Combine delayed faxes to the same fax number at the same time of day into one transmission.
Set up one or two custom cover page messages to print on outgoing faxes.
Set the machine to redial the last fax number after five minutes, if the fax did not go through because the line was busy.
Set the machine to display the destination information on the LCD during fax dialling.
Select the initial setup for the Transmission Verification
Report.
Set the interval for automatic printing of the Fax
Journal.
If you select an option other than Off and Every 50
Faxes, you can set the time for the option.
If you select Every 7 Days, you can set the day of the week.
Print incoming faxes stored in the machine's memory.
Set your own code for Remote Retrieval.
Restrict the dialling when using the dial pad.
Restrict the dialling when using the Address Book.
Restrict the dialling when using a Shortcut.
Restrict the dialling of LDAP server numbers.
Check which scheduled jobs are in the machine's memory and cancel selected jobs.
Use with BT Call Sign.
Descriptions
Select the emulation mode.
Select the print quality.
Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
Print a test page.
Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long edge or short edge.
610
Level 3
2-sided
Auto Continue
Output Colour
Paper Type
Paper Size
Copies
Orientation
Edge Emphasis
Print Position
Auto FF
HP LaserJet
Level 4
Single Image
Level 5
-
Descriptions
For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided image, select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce printing time.
When you use preprinted paper, you must select the 2-sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided
Feed for preprinted paper, the last page will be printed on the reverse side.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Font No.
Font Pitch
Font Point
Symbol Set
Table Print
Auto LF
Auto CR
Auto WRAP
Auto SKIP
Left Margin
Right Margin
Top Margin
Bottom Margin
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Select if you want the machine to clear paper size errors or media type errors automatically, and use paper from other trays.
Set the output colour.
Set the paper type.
Set the paper size.
Set the number of printed pages.
Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape orientation.
Make the text appear sharper.
-
-
-
Access the Print Position setting menus.
Allow the machine to print any remaining data automatically.
Font No.
Set the font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your
Brother machine.
Soft Font No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your
Brother machine.
Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Set the font size.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Select the symbol or character set.
Print the code table.
-
-
-
-
-
-
ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the right margin.
Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the bottom margin.
Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at
1 cpi.
Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper.
Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper.
611
Level 3
HP LaserJet
BR-Script 3
Level 4
Lines
Tray Command
Error Print
CAPT
Level 5
-
-
-
-
Carbon Menu
(MFC-L8390CDW)
Multiple Page -
PDF Print
Options
-
PDF Fit to
Page
Carbon Copy
Copies
Copy1 Tray
Copy1 Stream
Copy2 Tray
...
Copy8 Tray
Copy2 Stream
...
Copy8 Stream
Colour Correction Correction
Start
Reset
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Reset Printer
Auto
Correction
Colour
Settings
-
Descriptions
Set the number of lines on each page.
Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when you use the HP drivers.
Choose whether the machine prints the error information when errors occur.
Use CAPT (Colour Advanced Printing Technology) for optimal print quality when printing a PS file created by a non-Brother PS driver.
Colours and photos appear clearer and more accurate. Print speed will be slower.
Set the page layout when printing multiple pages.
Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments
(Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the text.
Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in the PDF file to fit the selected paper size.
Enable or disable the Carbon Copy function.
Set the number of printed pages.
Select the tray you use for Copy1.
Select a stream for Copy1.
Select the tray you use for Copy2 to Copy8.
Select a stream for Copy2 to 8.
-
-
Perform colour calibration to check and correct colours, and then perform registration to align the print position of each colour.
Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Set the machine to perform Colour Calibration and
Registration automatically.
Setting Mode Select whether to apply the colour print settings of the machine or the printer driver.
Colour Mode
Improve Gray
Colour
Select the colour mode.
Turn on or off to improve the image quality of shaded areas.
Enhance Black
Printing
Turn on or off if a black graphic does not print correctly.
Brightness
Contrast
Adjust the brightness.
Adjust the contrast.
Red
Green
Blue
-
Adjust the red colour.
Adjust the green colour.
Adjust the blue colour.
Restore the machine settings to the factory settings.
612
[Network]
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 3
Wired LAN
(MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
Level 4
TCP/IP
Ethernet
Wired Status
MAC Address
Set to Default
Wired Enable
Find Wi-Fi
Network
TCP/IP
Level 5
Boot Method
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Node Name
WINS
Configuration
WINS Server
DNS Server
APIPA
IPv6
-
-
-
-
-
-
Boot Method
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Node Name
WINS
Configuration
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Level 6
-
-
Primary
Select the WINS configuration mode.
Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server.
Primary Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the linklocal address range automatically.
-
-
Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Select the Ethernet link mode.
-
-
-
-
View the current wired status.
View the machine's MAC address.
Restore the wired network settings to the factory settings.
Turn the Wired LAN interface on or off manually.
-
Descriptions
Select the Boot method that best suits your needs.
Enter the IP address.
Enter the Subnet mask.
Enter the Gateway address.
Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
-
-
Configure your wireless network settings manually.
Select the Boot method that best suits your needs.
Enter the IP address.
Enter the Subnet mask.
Enter the Gateway address.
Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
Select the WINS configuration mode.
613
Level 3
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
Wi-Fi Direct
Level 4
TCP/IP
WPS/Push Button
WPS/PIN Code
WLAN Status
PIN Code
Device
Information
Level 5
WINS Server
DNS Server
APIPA
IPv6
-
-
MAC Address
Set to Default
(MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
WLAN Enable
Manual
Group Owner
Push Button
-
-
-
-
Status
Signal
SSID
Comm. Mode
-
-
-
Device Name
SSID
-
-
Level 6
Primary
Descriptions
Specify the IP address of the primary WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server.
Primary Specify the IP address of the primary DNS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the linklocal address range automatically.
-
-
-
Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
Configure your wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN.
-
-
-
-
View the current wireless network status.
View the current wireless network signal strength.
View the current SSID.
View the current
Communication mode.
View the machine's MAC address.
Restore the wireless network settings to the factory settings.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Turns the wireless interface on or off.
Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings manually.
Set your machine as the
Group Owner.
Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using the one-button push method.
Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
View your machine's device name.
View the Group Owner's
SSID.
614
Level 3
Wi-Fi Direct
Level 4
Device
Information
Status
Information
NFC
(MFC-L8390CDW)
E-mail/IFAX
I/F Enable
-
Mail Address
Setup Server
-
-
-
SMTP
Level 5
IP Address
Status
Signal
POP3/IMAP4
Level 6
-
-
-
-
-
-
Server
Port
Auth. for
SMTP
SSL/TLS
Verify
Cert.
Protocol
Server
Port
Mailbox
Name
Mailbox
Password
Select
Folder
SSL/TLS
Verify
Cert.
APOP
Descriptions
When the machine is not connected, the LCD displays
Not Connected.
View your machine's current
IP Address.
View the current Wi-Fi Direct network status.
View the current Wi-Fi Direct network signal strength.
When your machine acts as
Group Owner, the LCD always indicates a strong signal.
Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection on or off.
Turn the NFC function on or off.
Enter the email address.
Enter the SMTP server name and address.
Enter the SMTP port number.
Select the Security method for email notification.
Send or receive an email via an email server that requires secure SSL/TLS communication.
Verify the SMTP Server
Certificate automatically.
Select the protocol for receiving an email from the server.
Enter the server name and address.
Enter the port number.
Enter the mailbox name.
(Up to 255 characters)
Enter the password to login to the server.
(Up to 128 characters)
Select the specified folder in the mailbox using the IMAP4 protocol.
Send or receive an email via an email server that requires secure SSL/TLS communication.
Verify the SMTP Server
Certificate automatically.
Turn APOP on or off.
615
Level 3
E-mail/IFAX
Web Connect
Settings
Web Based Mgmt
Fax to Server
IPsec
Level 4
Setup Mail RX
Setup Mail TX
Setup Relay
Report Setting
Manual Receive
Proxy Settings
-
Fax to Server
Prefix
Suffix
-
Level 5
Auto Polling
Level 6
Auto
Polling
Poll
Frequency
Descriptions
Check the server for new messages automatically.
Set the interval for checking new messages on the server.
-
-
-
-
Header
Del/Read Error
Relay Report
-
-
Relay
-
##
Select the contents of the email header to be printed.
The POP3 server deletes error emails automatically.
The IMAP4 server deletes error emails automatically after you read them.
Notification Receive notification messages.
View the subject.
Sender Subject -
Size Limit
Notification
Size Limit Limit the size of email
Maximum documents.
Size(MB)
Send notification messages.
Relay
Broadcast
Relay Domain
Relay a document to another fax machine.
Register the Domain name.
IFAX
-
XMIT
Report
XMIT
Report
-
Print the relay Broadcast
Report.
Select the initial setup for the
Transmission Verification
Report.
-
Check the POP3 or IMAP4 server for new messages manually.
Change the Web connection settings.
Proxy
Connection
Address
Port
User Name
Password
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Enable or disable Web
Based Management.
If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use
Web Based Management.
Select the network connection type.
IPsec is an optional security feature of the IP protocol that provides authentication and encryption services. We recommend contacting your
616
Level 3
Global Detect
Network Reset
Level 4
Allow Detect
Reject Access
-
Level 5
-
-
-
Level 6
-
-
-
Descriptions network administrator before changing this setting.
Enable or disable Global
Detect, a function that detects and notifies the user when the user unintentionally connects to a global network.
Disable connections to the global network.
Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
[Print Reports]
[All Settings] > [Print Reports]
Level 3
XMIT Verify
Level 4 Descriptions
View on LCD Display Transmission Verification Reports about sent faxes.
Address Book
Fax Journal
User Settings
Printer Settings
Network Configuration -
Print File List -
Drum Dot Print -
WLAN Report -
-
-
Print Report Print a Transmission Verification Report of your last transmission.
Print a list of names and numbers stored in the Address Book.
Print a list of information about your last 200 incoming and outgoing faxes.
(TX means Transmit. RX means Receive.)
Print a list of your User settings.
Print a list of your Printer settings.
Print a list of your Network settings.
Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory.
Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
Print the wireless LAN connection results.
[Machine Info.]
[All Settings] > [Machine Info.]
Level 3
Firmware Update
Firmware Auto
Check
Page Counter
Level 4
Total
Level 5
Serial No.
-
Firmware Version Main Version
Security Version -
-
-
-
-
-
-
Fax
Copy
Colour
Black and
White
-
Colour
Black and
White
Descriptions
Check your machine's serial number.
Check your machine's firmware version.
Update your machine to the latest firmware.
View firmware information on the Main Home screen.
Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
617
Level 3
Page Counter
Level 4
Other
Drum
-
-
-
Level 5
Colour
Black and
White
Colour
Black and
White
Black(BK)
Cyan(C)
Magenta(M)
Yellow(Y)
Descriptions
Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Display the remaining life of each drum unit.
Belt
Fuser
PF Kit MP
(MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Display the remaining life of the belt unit.
Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
Display the remaining life of the PF Kit MP.
1 The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
[Initial Setup]
[All Settings] > [Initial Setup]
Level 3
Date & Time
Station ID
Level 4
Date
Time
Clock Type
Auto Daylight
(Available only for certain countries)
Time Zone
Fax
Tel
Name
-
Descriptions
Add the date and time on the screen and in the headings of the faxes you send.
Select the time format (12-hour or 24-hour).
Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time.
Set your time zone.
Enter your name and fax number so it appears on each page you fax.
Select the dialling mode.
Tone/Pulse
(Available only for certain countries)
Dial Tone
Phone Line Set
Compatibility
Reset
-
-
-
Shorten the dial tone detection pause.
Select the telephone line type.
Adjust the equalisation for transmission difficulties.
VoIP service providers offer fax support using various standards. If you regularly experience fax transmission errors, select Basic (for
VoIP).
Machine Reset Restore the machine settings that you have changed.
Network Reset Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Address Book
& Fax
Erase all stored phone numbers and fax settings.
618
Level 3
Reset
Local Language
(Available only for certain countries)
Related Information
•
Level 4 Descriptions
All Settings Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings and delete the personal data in the memory. You cannot see the data on the machine.
Factory Reset Restore all the machine settings back to the factory settings and delete the personal data in the machine's memory. We recommend using this menu option if you want to delete all the data from the machine.
Change your LCD language.
619
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Settings Tables (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW)
Settings Tables (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW)
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW
[Settings]
[Settings]
Level 1
( Date &
Time )
Toner
Level 2
-
Level 3
-
Descriptions
Access the Date and Time setting menus.
Toner Life
Test Print
Colour
Correction
-
-
Colour
Correction
Reset
View the approximate remaining toner life.
Print a test page.
Initiate colour calibration to check and correct colours.
Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
View the installed toner cartridge information on the
LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine.
Network
Toner Cartridge
Check
Wired LAN
WLAN(Wi-Fi)
Tray Setting -
Wi-Fi Direct -
Eco Mode -
All Settings -
-
-
-
-
-
Black
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
-
Access the Wired LAN setting menus.
Access the WLAN setting menus.
Access the tray setting menus.
Access the Wi-Fi Direct setting menus.
Turn the following machine settings on at the same time:
• 2-sided Print : Long Edge (available for certain models)
• Sleep Time : 0Min
• Dim Timer : 10Secs
• Quiet Mode :
• Toner Save :
Configure the detailed settings.
1 Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain other machine settings in Web Based Management.
620
[General Setup]
[All Settings] > [General Setup]
Level 3 Level 4
Tray Setting Paper Type
Beep
Paper Size
Print Position
Check Paper
-
LCD Settings Backlight
Screen
Settings
Notice
Settings
Ecology
Setting Lock
Delete
Storage
Dim Timer
Home Screen
Scan Screen
Display
Information
Scan Result(Skip
Blank Page)
Eco Mode
Toner Save
Sleep Time
Quiet Mode
Auto Power Off
-
Macro ID
Stream ID
Font ID
Delete All
Level 5
-
-
X Offset
Y Offset
-
-
-
-
-
-
IP
Address
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Descriptions
Select the paper type that matches the paper in the standard paper tray.
Select the paper size you loaded in the standard paper tray.
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the MP tray horizontally from -500 (left) to +500 (right) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Adjust the print start position (usually at the upper left corner of a page) for the paper you loaded in the MP tray vertically from -500 (up) to +500 (down) dots when printing at 300 dpi.
Select whether or not to display a message indicating you must check the paper type and paper size when you pull a paper tray out of the machine.
Adjust the beeper volume.
Adjust the brightness of the LCD backlight.
Set how long the LCD backlight stays on after you go back to your Main Home screen and other functions.
Set the Main Home screen.
Set the default Scan screen.
Select whether or not to display your machine's IP Address on the Home screens.
Displays the total scanned pages and skipped pages after scanning is completed.
Turn the following machine settings on at the same time:
• 2-sided Print : Long Edge (available for certain
• Sleep Time : 0Min
• Dim Timer : 10Secs
• Quiet Mode : On
• Toner Save : On
Increase the page yield of the toner cartridge.
Set how much time should pass before the machine enters
Power Saving mode.
Decrease printing noise.
Set the number of hours that the machine will remain in
Deep Sleep mode before going into Power Off mode.
Restrict unauthorised users from changing the machine’s settings.
Delete the registered Macro data.
Delete the registered Stream data.
Delete the registered Font data.
Restore your machine's Macro/Stream and Font data to the factory settings.
1 Changing this setting is possible only after you change certain other machine settings in Web Based Management.
621
[Shortcut Settings]
[All Settings] > [Shortcut Settings]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
(Select a Shortcut) Rename Change the shortcut name.
Edit Change the shortcut settings.
Delete Delete the shortcut.
[Printer]
[All Settings] > [Printer]
Level 3
Emulation
Quality
Print Options
2-sided
Auto Continue
Output Colour
Paper Type
Paper Size
Copies
Orientation
Edge Emphasis -
Print Position -
Auto FF -
HP LaserJet
-
-
-
-
-
Level 4
-
-
Font List
Test Print -
2-sided Print -
Level 5
-
-
HP LaserJet
BR-Script 3
Single Image
-
Font No.
Font Pitch
Font Point
Descriptions
Select the emulation mode.
Select the print quality.
Print a list of the machine’s internal fonts.
-
Print a test page.
Enable or disable 2-sided printing and choose long edge or short edge.
For a print job where the last page is a 1-sided image, select the 1-sided Feed option to reduce printing time.
When you use preprinted paper, you must select the
2-sided Feed option. If you select 1-sided Feed for preprinted paper, the last page will be printed on the reverse side.
-
-
-
-
-
Select if you want the machine to clear paper size errors or media type errors automatically, and use paper from other trays.
Set the output colour.
Set the paper type.
Set the paper size.
Set the number of printed pages.
Set pages to print in either portrait or landscape orientation.
Make the text appear sharper.
-
-
-
Access the Print Position setting menus.
Allow the machine to print any remaining data automatically.
Font No.
Set the font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your
Brother machine.
Soft Font No.
Set the soft font number.
This menu appears if a soft font is installed on your
Brother machine.
-
-
Set the font pitch.
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Set the font size.
622
Level 3
HP LaserJet
BR-Script 3
Colour
Correction
Level 4
Symbol Set
Table Print
Auto LF
Auto CR
Auto WRAP
Auto SKIP
Left Margin
Right Margin
Top Margin
Bottom Margin
Level 5
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Descriptions
(Available only for certain fonts.)
Select the symbol or character set.
Print the code table.
ON: CR -> CR+LF, OFF: CR -> CR
ON: LF -> LF+CR, FF -> FF+CR, or VT -> VT+CR
OFF: LF -> LF, FF -> FF, or VT -> VT
Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the right margin.
Select whether you want a line feed and carriage return when the carriage position reaches the bottom margin.
Set the left margin at column 0 to 70 columns at 1 cpi.
Set the right margin at column 10 to 80 columns at 1 cpi.
Set the top margin distance from the top edge of the paper.
Set the bottom margin distance from the bottom edge of the paper.
Set the number of lines on each page.
Lines
Tray Command
Error Print
CAPT
-
-
-
-
Select this setting if a tray mismatch appears when you use the HP drivers.
Choose whether the machine prints the error information when errors occur.
Use CAPT (Colour Advanced Printing Technology) for optimal print quality when printing a PS file created by a non-Brother PS driver.
Colours and photos appear clearer and more accurate. Print speed will be slower.
Set the page layout when printing multiple pages.
Multiple Page -
PDF Print
Options
-
PDF Fit to
Page
Correction
Start
Reset
Auto
Correction
Colour
Settings
-
-
-
Set the PDF Print setting to print either comments
(Markup) or stamps in the PDF file, along with the text.
Select if the machine scales or resizes the pages in the PDF file to fit the selected paper size.
Perform colour calibration to check and correct colours, and then perform registration to align the print position of each colour.
Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Set the machine to perform Colour Calibration and
Registration automatically.
Setting Mode Select whether to apply the colour print settings of the machine or the printer driver.
Colour Mode
Improve Gray
Colour
Enhance Black
Printing
Brightness
Select the colour mode.
Turn on or off to improve the image quality of shaded areas.
Turn on or off if a black graphic does not print correctly.
Adjust the brightness.
623
Level 3
Colour
Correction
Reset Printer
Level 4
Colour
Settings
-
Level 5
Contrast
Red
Green
Blue
-
[Network]
[All Settings] > [Network]
Level 3
Wired LAN
Level 4
TCP/IP
Level 5
Boot Method
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Node Name
WINS
Configuration
WINS Server
DNS Server
APIPA
Ethernet
Wired Status
MAC Address -
Set to Default -
IPv6
-
-
Wired Enable
WLAN(Wi-Fi) Find Wi-Fi
Network
TCP/IP
-
-
Boot Method
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Gateway
Node Name
Descriptions
Adjust the contrast.
Adjust the red colour.
Adjust the green colour.
Adjust the blue colour.
Restore the machine settings to the factory settings.
-
-
-
-
Level 6
-
-
Descriptions
Select the Boot method that best suits your needs.
Enter the IP address.
Enter the Subnet mask.
Enter the Gateway address.
Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
Select the WINS configuration mode.
-
-
-
-
Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server.
Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
-
-
-
-
-
Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the link-local address range automatically.
Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Select the Ethernet link mode.
View the current wired status.
-
-
View the machine's MAC address.
Restore the wired network settings to the factory settings.
Turn the Wired LAN interface on or off manually.
Configure your wireless network settings manually.
Select the Boot method that best suits your needs.
Enter the IP address.
Enter the Subnet mask.
Enter the Gateway address.
Enter the Node name.
(up to 32 characters)
624
Level 3 Level 4
WLAN(Wi-Fi) TCP/IP
Level 5
WINS
Configuration
WINS Server
DNS Server
APIPA
IPv6
WPS/Push Button -
WPS/PIN Code
WLAN Status
-
Status
Signal
MAC Address
Set to Default -
SSID
Comm. Mode
-
WLAN Enable
Wi-Fi Direct Manual
-
-
Group Owner
Push Button
-
-
PIN Code
Device
Information
Status
Information
-
Device Name
SSID
IP Address
Status
Signal
Level 6
-
Descriptions
Select the WINS configuration mode.
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
WINS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary WINS server.
Primary Specify the IP address of the primary
DNS server.
Secondary Specify the IP address of the secondary DNS server.
-
-
-
-
Set the machine to allocate the IP address from the link-local address range automatically.
Turn the IPv6 protocol on or off.
Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
Configure your wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN.
View the current wireless network status.
View the current wireless network signal strength.
View the current SSID.
View the current Communication mode.
View the machine's MAC address.
Restore the wireless network settings to the factory settings.
Turns the wireless interface on or off.
Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings manually.
Set your machine as the Group Owner.
Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using the one-button push method.
-
-
-
-
Configure your Wi-Fi Direct network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
View your machine's device name.
View the Group Owner's SSID.
When the machine is not connected, the LCD displays Not Connected.
View your machine's current IP
Address.
View the current Wi-Fi Direct network status.
View the current Wi-Fi Direct network signal strength.
When your machine acts as Group
Owner, the LCD always indicates a strong signal.
625
Level 3 Level 4
Wi-Fi Direct I/F Enable
Level 5
-
Level 6
-
Descriptions
Turn the Wi-Fi Direct connection on or off.
Change the Web connection settings.
Web Connect
Settings
Proxy Settings Proxy
Connection
Address
-
Port
User Name
Password
-
-
-
-
-
-
Web Based
Mgmt
IPsec
Global
Detect
Network
Reset
-
Allow Detect
Reject Access
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
[Print Reports]
[All Settings] > [Print Reports]
Level 3 Level 4 Descriptions
User Settings
Printer Settings
Network Configuration -
-
-
Print a list of your User settings.
Print a list of your Printer settings.
Print a list of your Network settings.
Print File List
Drum Dot Print
WLAN Report
-
-
-
Print a list of data saved in the machine's memory.
Print the Drum Dot Check Sheet.
Print the wireless LAN connection results.
Enable or disable Web Based
Management.
If you enable this function, make sure you specify the connection method to use Web Based Management.
IPsec is an optional security feature of the IP protocol that provides authentication and encryption services.
We recommend contacting your network administrator before changing this setting.
Enable or disable Global Detect, a function that detects and notifies the user when the user unintentionally connects to a global network.
Disable connections to the global network.
Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
[Machine Info.]
[All Settings] > [Machine Info.]
Level 3
Serial No.
Firmware Version
Firmware Update
Level 4
-
Main Version -
Security
Version
-
-
Level 5
-
-
Descriptions
Check your machine's serial number.
Check your machine's firmware version.
Update your machine to the latest firmware.
626
Level 3
Firmware Auto
Check
Page Counter
Parts Life
Level 4
-
Total
Copy
Other
Drum
Belt
Fuser
Level 5 Descriptions
View firmware information on the Main Home screen.
Colour
Black and White
Check the total number of pages the machine has printed.
Colour
Black and White
Colour
Black and White
Colour
Black and White
Black(BK)
Cyan(C)
Magenta(M)
Yellow(Y)
-
-
Display the remaining life of each drum unit.
Display the remaining life of the belt unit.
Display the remaining life of the fuser unit.
1 The parts life is approximate and may vary by type of use.
[Initial Setup]
[All Settings] > [Initial Setup]
Level 3
Date & Time
Reset
Local Language
(Available only for certain countries)
Level 4
Date
Time
Clock Type
Auto Daylight
(Available only for certain countries)
Time Zone
Machine Reset
Network Reset
All Settings
Factory Reset
-
Descriptions
Set the date and time on your machine.
Select the time format (12-hour or 24-hour).
Set the machine to change automatically for Daylight Saving Time.
Set your time zone.
Restore the machine settings that you have changed.
Restore all network settings back to the factory settings.
Restore all the machine's settings back to the factory settings and delete the personal data in the memory. You cannot see the data on the machine.
Restore all the machine settings back to the factory settings and delete the personal data in the machine's memory. We recommend using this menu option if you want to delete all the data from the machine.
Change your LCD language.
Related Information
•
627
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Feature Tables (MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Feature Tables (MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
>> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
>> [Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
Wi-Fi Setup
(Wi-Fi Setup)
Level 2 Level 3
( Wi-Fi Setup )
Find Wi-Fi Network
TCP/IP
Descriptions
Configure your wireless network settings manually.
Change the TCP/IP settings.
WPS/Push Button
WPS/PIN Code
(MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
1 Available after a Wi-Fi ® connection has been configured.
[Toner]
[Toner]
Level 2
Toner Life
Test Print
Colour Correction
Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
Configure the wireless network settings using
WPS with a PIN code.
Display the wireless network connection status.
Display your machine's MAC address.
Restore your machine's wireless network settings to the factory settings.
Turn the wireless interface on or off.
Level 3
-
-
Descriptions
View the approximate remaining toner life for each colour.
Print a test page.
Correction Start Initiate colour calibration to check and correct colours.
628
Level 2
Colour Correction
Toner Cartridge
Check
Level 3
Reset
Black
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
Descriptions
Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine.
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is Off)
Level 3
Tel / R
Address Book
Level 4
-
Level 5
-
-
Level 6
-
-
Descriptions
Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the telephone line type. You can use R to gain access to an outside line or to transfer a call to another extension when connected to a PBX.
Search within the Address Book.
( Search: )
Edit Add New
Address
Setup
Groups
Change
Delete
Name
Address
Name
Add/
Delete
(Select
Address
Book)
(Select
Address
Book)
-
Store Address Book numbers, set up
Group numbers for Broadcasting, change and delete Address Book numbers.
(Select Address Book) Apply
Call History Redial
Fax Start
Options
Outgoing Call
-
Fax Resolution
Contrast
2-sided Fax
(MFC-L8390CDW)
-
Glass Scan Size -
-
-
-
-
(Select
Outgoing Call)
-
-
-
-
-
Apply
Edit
-
Broadcasting
Start sending a fax using the Address
Book.
Redial the last number you dialled.
Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
Send a fax.
Set the resolution for outgoing faxes.
Adjust the contrast.
Set the 2-sided scanning format.
Add Number Add
Number
Add from
Address book
Adjust the scan area of the scanner glass to the size of the document.
Send the same fax message to more than one fax number.
629
Level 3
Options
Level 4
Broadcasting
Preview
Delayed Fax
Level 5 Level 6
Add Number Search in
Address book
-
Delayed Fax
-
-
Real Time TX
Set Time
-
Coverpage Setup Coverpage
Setup
Coverpage
Note
-
Total Pages -
-
-
-
Overseas Mode -
Descriptions
Send the same fax message to more than one fax number.
Preview a fax message before you send it.
Set the time of day the delayed faxes will be sent.
Send a fax without using the memory.
Set the machine to automatically send a pre-programmed cover page.
Call History
Address Book
Set New Default
Factory Reset
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Set to On if you have difficulty sending faxes overseas.
Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
Select the address of the recipient from the address book.
Save your settings as the default.
Restore all settings back to the factory settings.
Save the current settings as a shortcut.
Save as
Shortcut
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
[Fax] (When Fax Preview is On)
Level 3 Level 4
Sending Faxes Tel / R
Level 5
-
Address Book
Call History
Fax Start
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Received Faxes Print/Delete
-
-
-
-
-
All(New
Faxes)
All(Old
Faxes)
Descriptions
Tel changes to R when PBX is selected as the telephone line type. You can use R to gain access to an outside line or to transfer a call to another extension when connected to a PBX.
Select the address of the recipient from the address book.
Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
Send a fax.
Select your settings.
Save the current settings as a shortcut.
Print the new received faxes.
Print the old received faxes.
630
Level 3 Level 4
Received Faxes Print/Delete
Address Book
Call History
-
-
-
-
Level 5
Delete
All(New
Faxes)
Delete
All(Old
Faxes)
[Copy]
[Copy]
Level 3
Mono Start
Colour Start
ID
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Descriptions
Delete the new received faxes.
Delete the old received faxes.
Select the address of the recipient from the address book.
Select a number from the Outgoing Call history, and then send a fax to it, add it to the Address Book, or delete it.
Level 4
-
-
-
Quality
Tray Use
(MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Enlarge/Reduce
Level 5
-
-
-
-
-
Descriptions
Make a monochrome or greyscale copy.
Make a colour copy.
Make a copy of your ID card.
Select the Copy resolution for your document type.
Select the paper tray you want to use.
Density
Remove Background
Colour
2-sided Copy
2-sided Copy Page
Layout
Contrast
Stack/Sort
2in1/1in1
Page Layout
Auto Deskew
Colour Adjust
-
-
-
-
-
-
100%
-
-
-
Enlarge Select an enlargement ratio for the next copy.
Reduce Select a reduction ratio for the next copy.
Custom(25-400%) Enter an enlargement or reduction ratio.
Layout
-
Adjust the density.
Change the amount of background colour that is removed.
Turn off or turn on 2-sided copying and select flip on long edge or flip on short edge.
Select a page layout option when you make
2-sided N in 1 copies from a 2-sided document.
Adjust the contrast.
Select to stack or sort multiple copies.
If you select 2 in 1 (ID), you can select the layout options.
Make N in 1 copies.
Set the machine to correct document skewing automatically.
Adjust the colour for copies.
Red
Green
Blue
Save the current settings as a shortcut.
631
[Scan]
[Scan]
Level 3 to USB
(MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW) to My E-mail to My Folder to PC
Level 4
Other Scan to Actions
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
-
Level 5
-
2-sided Scan
(MFC-L8390CDW)
Colour Setting
Resolution
File Type
Document Size
Brightness
Contrast
File Name
File Name Style
File Size
Auto Crop
Auto Deskew
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Skip Blank Page
Skip Blank Page
Sensitivity
Remove Background
Colour
Margin Settings
Document
Separation
-
-
-
Document
Separation
Copies
Number of
Pages
B&W TIFF Compress -
Set New Default -
Factory Reset -
-
-
-
Level 6
-
-
-
to File
-
Other Scan to
Actions
(Select USB or PC)
-
-
Descriptions
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
Options
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your email address.
Send scanned data to your folder in the CIFS server on your local network or on the
Internet.
Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer.
632
Level 3 to PC to E-mail Server to FTP
(MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW) to FTP/SFTP
(MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW) to Network
Level 4 to File
Level 5
(Select USB or PC)
Level 6
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to OCR Other Scan to
Actions
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to Image Other Scan to
Actions
(Select USB or PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
to E-mail Other Scan to
Actions
(Select USB or PC)
Other Scan to Actions
Manual
Address
Book
-
-
(Select Profile name)
( Search: )
Edit -
(Select Address Book) -
Other Scan to
Actions
-
Options
-
Save as Shortcut -
Start -
Other Scan to Actions
(Select Profile name)
Options
-
Save as Shortcut -
Start -
Other Scan to Actions
(Select Profile name)
Options
-
Save as Shortcut -
Start -
-
-
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
-
Descriptions
Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer.
Convert your scanned document to an editable text file.
Scan photos or graphics into your graphics applications.
Send a scanned document as an email attachment.
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to the email address you want.
Send scanned data via FTP.
Send scanned data via FTP/
SFTP.
Send scanned data to a
CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet.
633
Level 3 to SharePoint to Web
WS Scan
(Appears when you install a
Web Services Scanner, which is displayed in your computer's Network explorer.)
Other Scan to Actions
Scan
Scan for Email
Scan for
Fax
Scan for
-
-
-
-
-
[Shortcuts]
[Shortcuts]
Level 1
Add Shortcut
Level 2
Copy
Fax
Scan
Level 4
Other Scan to Actions
(Select Profile name)
-
Level 5
-
Options
-
Save as Shortcut -
Start -
-
Level 6
-
-
-
-
-
-
Level 3
-
to File to OCR to Image to USB to E-mail to E-mail Server to Network to FTP
(MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW) to FTP/SFTP
(MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW) to SharePoint
Descriptions
Send scanned data via a
SharePoint server.
Upload the scanned data to an Internet service.
Scan data using the Web
Service protocol.
Descriptions
Select the settings you want.
Select the settings you want.
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your computer.
Convert your scanned document to an editable text file.
Scan a colour picture into your graphics application.
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
Scan a monochrome or a colour document into your email application.
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to the email address you want.
Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local network or on the
Internet.
Send scanned data via FTP.
Send scanned data via FTP/SFTP.
Send scanned data via a SharePoint server.
634
Level 1
Add Shortcut
Level 2
Web
Apps
Level 3
-
-
These lists appears when each Shortcut name is pressed for two seconds.
Edit/ Delete
Rename
Edit
Delete
Register Card/NFC
(MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
-
-
-
-
Delete Card/NFC
(MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
-
(Select shortcut button.) Rename
Edit
Delete
Register Card/NFC
(MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Delete Card/NFC
(MFC-L3760CDW/
MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
[Secure Print]
Descriptions
Connect the Brother machine to an
Internet service.
Web services may have been added and service names may have been changed by the provider since this document was published.
Connect the Brother machine to the
Brother Apps service.
Change the shortcut name.
Change the shortcut settings.
Delete the shortcut.
Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
Change the shortcut name.
Change the shortcut settings.
Delete the shortcut.
Assign a shortcut to an ID card.
Remove a shortcut from an ID card.
[Secure Print]
Level 1
Secure
Level 2 Level 3
(Select User) (Select Secure
Print Job)
Descriptions
You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
[Web]
[Web]
Level 1 Descriptions
Web Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
635
[Apps]
[Apps]
Level 1 Descriptions
Apps Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
[USB]
[USB] (MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW)
Level 1 Level 2
USB Scan to USB
Descriptions
Scan documents to a USB flash drive.
Direct Print Print the data directly from the USB flash drive.
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
Level 1 Descriptions
2 in 1 ID Copy Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Related Information
•
636
Change Machine Settings from the Control Panel
> Feature Tables (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW)
Feature Tables (DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW)
Related Models : DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW
Wi-Fi Setup
(Wi-Fi Setup)
Level 2 Level 3 Descriptions
( Wi-Fi Setup )
Find Wi-Fi Network Configure your wireless network settings manually.
TCP/IP
Change the TCP/IP settings.
WPS/Push Button
WPS/PIN Code
1 Available after a Wi-Fi ® connection has been configured.
[Toner]
Configure your wireless network settings using the one-button push method.
Configure the wireless network settings using WPS with a PIN code.
Display the wireless network connection status.
Display your machine's MAC address.
Restore your machine's wireless network settings to the factory settings.
Turn the wireless interface on or off.
[Toner]
Level 2
Toner Life
Test Print
Colour Correction
Toner Cartridge
Check
Level 3
-
Descriptions
View the approximate remaining toner life for each colour.
Print a test page.
Correction Start Initiate colour calibration to check and correct colours.
Reset Reset the calibration parameters to the default settings.
Black
Magenta
Cyan
Yellow
View the installed toner cartridge information on the LCD, for example, if the toner cartridge is genuine.
637
[Copy]
[Copy]
Level 3
Mono Start
Colour Start
ID
Options
Level 4
-
-
-
Quality
Enlarge/Reduce
Density
Remove
Background
Colour
2-sided Copy
2-sided Copy
Page Layout
Contrast
Stack/Sort
2in1/1in1
Page Layout
Auto Deskew
Colour Adjust
-
-
Red
Green
Blue
Save as Shortcut -
[Scan]
[Scan]
Level 3 to My Folder
Level 4
to PC to File
Save the current settings as a shortcut.
Level 5
-
Level 6
-
Other Scan to
Actions
(Select USB or
PC)
-
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
Descriptions
Send scanned data to your folder in the CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet.
Scan documents and save them to a folder on your computer.
638
Level 3 to PC to FTP to Network to SharePoint to Web
WS Scan
(Appears when you install a Web Services
Scanner, which is displayed in your computer's Network explorer.)
Level 4 to OCR to Image to E-mail
Level 5
Other Scan to
Actions
(Select USB or
PC)
Level 6
-
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
Other Scan to
Actions
(Select USB or
PC)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
Other Scan to
Actions
(Select USB or
PC)
Options
-
Save as
Shortcut
Start
-
Descriptions
Convert your scanned document to an editable text file.
Scan photos or graphics into your graphics applications.
Send a scanned document as an email attachment.
Send scanned data via FTP.
Other Scan to Actions
(Select Profile name)
Other Scan to Actions
(Select Profile name)
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
-
Other Scan to Actions
(Select Profile name)
-
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
-
Options
Save as
Shortcut
Start
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local network or on the
Internet.
Send scanned data via a SharePoint server.
Upload the scanned data to an
Internet service.
Scan data using the Web Service protocol.
Other Scan to Actions
Scan
-
Scan for Email
Scan for Fax -
-
-
-
-
-
639
Level 3
WS Scan
(Appears when you install a Web Services
Scanner, which is displayed in your computer's Network explorer.)
[Shortcuts]
[Shortcuts]
Level 1
Add Shortcut
Level 4
Scan for
Level 2
Copy
Scan
Level 5
-
Web
Apps
(These settings are available when each Shortcut name is pressed for two seconds.)
Edit/ Delete
Rename
Edit
Delete
(Select shortcut button.)
Level 6
-
Descriptions
Scan data using the Web Service protocol.
Level 3
to File to OCR to Image to E-mail to Network
Descriptions
Select the settings you want.
Scan a monochrome or a colour document to your computer.
Convert your scanned document to an editable text file.
Scan a colour picture into your graphics application.
Scan a monochrome or a colour document into your email application.
Send scanned data to a CIFS server on your local network or on the Internet.
to FTP Send scanned data via FTP.
to SharePoint Send scanned data via a SharePoint server.
-
-
Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
Web services may have been added and service names may have been changed by the provider since this document was published.
Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
-
-
-
Rename
Edit
Delete
Change the shortcut name.
Change the shortcut settings.
Delete the shortcut.
Change the shortcut name.
Change the shortcut settings.
Delete the shortcut.
[Secure Print]
[Secure Print]
Level 1
Secure
Level 2 Level 3
(Select User) (Select Secure
Print Job)
Descriptions
You can print data saved in the machine's memory when you enter your four-digit password.
Active only when the machine has secure print data.
640
[Web]
[Web]
Level 1 Descriptions
Web Connect the Brother machine to an Internet service.
[Apps]
[Apps]
Level 1 Descriptions
Apps Connect the Brother machine to the Brother Apps service.
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
[2 in 1 ID Copy]
Level 1 Descriptions
2 in 1 ID Copy Copy both sides of an identification card onto one page.
Related Information
•
641
Home > Machine Settings > Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS).
•
•
•
Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
•
Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management
642
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > What is Web
Based Management?
What is Web Based Management?
Web Based Management is a utility that uses a standard web browser to manage your machine using the Hyper
Text Transfer Protocol (HTTP) or Hyper Text Transfer Protocol over Secure Socket Layer (HTTPS).
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Windows
Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Mac
Google Chrome ™ for Android ™
Safari and Google Chrome ™ for iOS
•
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
Make sure your machine is On and connected to the same network as your computer, and that your network supports the TCP/IP protocol.
The actual screen may differ from the screen shown above.
643
Related Information
•
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
644
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Access Web
Based Management
Access Web Based Management
• We recommend using the latest version of the following web browsers:
Microsoft Edge, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Windows
Safari, Firefox, and Google Chrome ™ for Mac
Google Chrome ™ for Android ™
Safari and Google Chrome ™ for iOS
• Ensure that JavaScript and Cookies are always enabled, regardless of which browser you use.
• We recommend using the HTTPS security protocol when configuring settings using Web Based
Management.
• When you use HTTPS for Web Based Management configuration, your browser will display a warning dialog box. To avoid displaying the warning dialog box, you can install a self-signed certificate to use
SSL/TLS communication. For more information, see Related Information .
• The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorised access.
>> Access Web Based Management from your Web Browser
>> Access Web Based Management from Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
>> Access Web Based Management from Brother Utilities (Windows)
Access Web Based Management from your Web Browser
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
Access Web Based Management from Brother iPrint&Scan (Windows/Mac)
1. Start Brother iPrint&Scan.
• Windows
Launch
• Mac
( Brother iPrint&Scan ).
645
In the Finder menu bar, click Go > Applications , and then double-click the iPrint&Scan icon.
The Brother iPrint&Scan screen appears.
2. If your Brother machine is not selected, click the Select your Machine button, and then select your model name from the list. Click OK .
3. Click ( Machine Settings ).
4. Click All Settings .
The Web Based Management page appears.
5. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
6. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
You can also access Web Based Management from Brother Mobile Connect for mobile devices.
Access Web Based Management from Brother Utilities (Windows)
1. Launch selected).
( Brother Utilities ), and then click the drop-down list and select your model name (if not already
2. Click Tools in the left navigation bar, and then click Machine Settings .
The Web Based Management page appears.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. If you want to pin the navigation menu on the left side of the screen, click and then click .
You can now change the machine's settings.
If you change the protocol settings, you must restart the machine after clicking Submit to activate the configuration.
After configuring the settings, click Logout .
Related Information
•
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
•
Print the Network Configuration Report
•
Create a Self-signed Certificate
•
Install the Self-signed Certificate for Windows Users as Administrators
•
646
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Set or Change a
Login Password for Web Based Management
Set or Change a Login Password for Web Based Management
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ". We recommend immediately changing the default password to protect your machine from unauthorised access.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. Do one of the following:
• If you have previously set your own password, type it, and then click Login .
• If you have not previously set your own password, type the default login password, and then click Login .
4. In the left navigation bar, click Administrator > Login Password .
• The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked " Pwd ".
• If the left navigation bar is not visible, start navigating from .
5. To change the password, type your current password in the Enter Old Password field.
6. Following the on-screen Login Password guidelines, type your new password in the Enter New Password field.
7. Retype the new password in the Confirm New Password field.
8. Click Submit .
You can also change the lockout settings in the Login Password menu.
Related Information
•
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
Related Topics:
•
647
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management > Set Up Your
Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management
Set Up Your Machine's Address Book Using Web Based Management
Related Models : MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
• We recommend using the HTTPS security protocol when configuring settings using Web Based
Management.
• When you use HTTPS for Web Based Management configuration, your browser will display a warning dialog box.
1. Start your web browser.
2. Type "https://machine's IP address" in your browser's address bar (where "machine's IP address" is your machine's IP address).
For example: https://192.168.1.2
• If you are using a Domain Name System or enable a NetBIOS name, you can type another name, such as "SharedPrinter" instead of the IP address.
For example: https://SharedPrinter
• If you enable a NetBIOS name, you can also use the node name.
For example: https://brn123456abcdef
• The NetBIOS name can be found in the Network Configuration Report.
3. If required, type the password in the Login field, and then click Login .
The default password to manage this machine’s settings is located on the back of the machine and marked
" Pwd ".
4. Go to the navigation menu, and then click Address Book .
Start from , if the navigation menu is not shown on the left side of the screen.
5. Click the target address numbers, and then add or update the Address Book information as needed.
6. Click Submit .
Related Information
•
Change Machine Settings Using Web Based Management
648
Appendix
•
•
•
Important Information About Toner Cartridge Life
•
Environmental and Compliance Information
•
•
Brother Help and Customer Support
649
Home > Appendix > Specifications
Specifications
>> Document Size Specification
>> Direct Print Feature Specifications
>> Supported Protocols and Security Features
>> Computer Requirements Specifications
General Specifications
Printer Type
Print Method
Memory Capacity Standard
Machine display
Power Source
Power
Consumption
(Average)
Peak
Printing
LED
Electrophotographic LED Printer
512 MB
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
20 characters x 2 lines
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW
3.5 in. (87.6 mm) TFT Colour touchscreen LCD
220 V to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
Approximately 960 W
• DCP-L3555CDW
Approximately 960 W
• DCP-L3560CDW
Approximately 960 W
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
Approximately 960 W
• MFC-L3760CDW
Approximately 960 W
• MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Approximately 960 W
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
Approximately 460 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW
Approximately 560 W at 25°C
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
Approximately 460 W at 25°C
• MFC-L3760CDW
Approximately 560 W at 25°C
• MFC-L8340CDW
Approximately 620 W at 25°C
• MFC-L8390CDW
650
Power
Consumption
(Average)
Printing
Copying
Ready
Approximately 620 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3555CDW
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3560CDW
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• MFC-L3760CDW
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
Approximately 460 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW
Approximately 560 W at 25°C
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
Approximately 460 W at 25°C
• MFC-L3760CDW
Approximately 560 W at 25°C
• MFC-L8340CDW
Approximately 620 W at 25°C
• MFC-L8390CDW
Approximately 620 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3555CDW
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3560CDW
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• MFC-L3760CDW
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Approximately 310 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
Approximately 70 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3555CDW
Approximately 70 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3560CDW
Approximately 70 W at 25°C
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
Approximately 70 W at 25°C
• MFC-L3760CDW
Approximately 70 W at 25°C
651
Power
Consumption
(Average)
Deep Sleep
Dimensions
(Typical outline view)
(DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/
DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW)
• MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Approximately 70 W at 25°C
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
Approximately 10 W
• DCP-L3555CDW
Approximately 10 W
• DCP-L3560CDW
Approximately 10 W
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
Approximately 10 W
• MFC-L3760CDW
Approximately 10 W
• MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Approximately 10 W
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
Approximately 0.7 W
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW
Approximately 0.6 W
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
Approximately 0.5 W
• MFC-L3760CDW
Approximately 0.6 W
• MFC-L8340CDW
Approximately 0.75 W
• MFC-L8390CDW
Approximately 0.65 W
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
Approximately 0.04 W
• DCP-L3555CDW
Approximately 0.04 W
• DCP-L3560CDW
Approximately 0.04 W
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
Approximately 0.04 W
• MFC-L3760CDW
Approximately 0.04 W
• MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
Approximately 0.04 W
Unit: mm
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
* : 410
** : 355
*** : 444
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW/
MFC-L3740CDWE/MFC-L3760CDW
* : 410
** : 401
652
(DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/
MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
*** : 444
• MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
* : 410
** : 401
*** : 462
Weight (with supplies)
Noise Level Sound
Pressure
Printing
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/DCP-L3527CDW
18.5 kg
• DCP-L3520CDW
18.6 kg
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/MFC-L3740CDW
20.0 kg
• MFC-L3740CDWE
19.9 kg
• MFC-L3760CDW
20.2 kg
• MFC-L8340CDW
21.6 kg
• MFC-L8390CDW
21.9 kg
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
LpAm = 46 dB (A)
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW
LpAm = 47 dB (A)
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
LpAm = 46 dB (A)
• MFC-L3760CDW
LpAm = 47 dB (A)
• MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
LpAm = 48 dB (A)
LpAm = 43 dB (A) Printing
(Quiet Mode)
Ready
Monochrome
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
LWAc = 6.21 B (A)
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW
653
Noise Level
Temperature
Humidity
Operating
Storage
Operating
Storage
Automatic Document Feeder (ADF)
(DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW/
MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE/
MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/
MFC-L8390CDW)
Ready
Printing
(Quiet Mode)
LWAc = 6.41 B (A)
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
LWAc = 6.21 B (A)
• MFC-L3760CDW
LWAc = 6.41 B (A)
• MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
LWAc = 6.62 B (A)
Colour
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
LWAc = 6.10 B (A)
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW
LWAc = 6.51 B (A)
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
LWAc = 6.10 B (A)
• MFC-L3760CDW
LWAc = 6.51 B (A)
• MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
LWAc = 6.67 B (A)
Monochrome
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
LWAc = 5.81 B (A)
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW
LWAc = 5.79 B (A)
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
LWAc = 5.81 B (A)
• MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
LWAc = 5.79 B (A)
Colour
• DCP-L3515CDW/DCP-L3520CDW/DCP-L3520CDWE/
DCP-L3527CDW
LWAc = 5.89 B (A)
• DCP-L3555CDW/DCP-L3560CDW
LWAc = 5.86 B (A)
• MFC-L3740CDW/MFC-L3740CDWE
LWAc = 5.89 B (A)
• MFC-L3760CDW/MFC-L8340CDW/MFC-L8390CDW
LWAc = 5.86 B (A)
<